Woolner's Introduction To Prakrit

INTRODUCTION TO PKAKRIT
BY
ALFRED
C.
WOOLNER.
M.A. (OXON),
PRINCIPAL OF THE ORIENTAL COLLEGE,
LAHORE.
PUBLISHED
BY THE
UNIVERSITY OF THE PAN JAB,

LAHORE.
CALCUTTA
PRINTED AT THE BAPTIST MISSION PRESS.
1917.
-^/ u>
Ganthaarena niaguruno
Arthur.
Anthony.
Siri-
Macdonbll.
-acarianarindassa Baillatitthatthassa
nam a
aavvaim uvaaranaim sumaria
imassa potthaassa adimmi
sasineham
ahilihidam.
MJi98871
I*KEFA(
Degree
courses
in
E.
almost
Sanskrit
include
invariably
Drama,
of
practice,
whatever Examiners may imagine, the student reads
which a considerable portion
is
In
Prakrit.
in
the Sanskrit chayd, which most editions provide for him on the
same page.
At any rate he begins that way
reading the
Prakrit afterwards, noticing certain similarities, and some of
the differences, so that he
with which he
is
may
be able to recognize a passage,
already familiar in
who
reads the Prakrit as
check looks down at the
have any
definite
'
cannot blame them.
it
comes, at the slightest
Consequently few students
shadow.'
knowledge
any one
of
Sanskrit form, and
Even the more advanced
perhaps in an English translation.

student
its
of the Prakrits
One
Tlie editions they use are often incorrect
in the Prakrit portions, and there
reference on which they can
is
no convenient book of
find definite rules.
One object
of
this Introduction to Prakrit is to provide students
with a guide
more attentive and more scholarly study
of the Saura-
for the
seni
and Maharastri passages
in their Sanskrit Plays.
The main object however
is
History of the great Indo- Aryan

to the present day.
mate knowledge
to assist the student of the
Language from Vedic
The Indian student
of at least
one
times
starts with an inti-
modern Indo-Aryan
language.
In the Sanskrit he learns at school, he becomes familiarised

with the stereotyped literary form of the ancient language.
If
he studies Sanskrit in the University, he will discover that
the Vedic language represents a
still
more ancient stage
of
PREFACE.
vi
For
Indo- Aryan.
works
there are accurate
this
of reference available.'
The middle stage has been comparatively

India
and many
texts,
dead languages, than
have found
in
Sanskrit
is
the language
Pali,
Outside India scholars
itself.
the oldest
of
Buddliist
The
convenient representative of this stage.
student of Indo- Aryan Philology needs a clear view of
main
this
characteristics of the diflFerent Prakrits.
work may prove
Method
In
the mediaeval Prakrits are in a more real sense
itself,
Scriptures,
neglected.
tlie
hoped that
It is
useful for this purpose.
of Study.
Perhaps the best plan
is
to begin with
the thorough study of one dialect, afterwards comparing others
This was the method of the Indian
with this as a standard.
grammarians who took Maharastri as their standard.
But the
only fyroae extant in Maharastri was written by Jains, and that
not in the same dialect as the songs in the dramas.

excellent aids to the study of Pali, but
make a good
curricula,
central point,
and generally
students of Buddhism.
actually
first
come
most
it is
Sauraseni.
of
and
it is
regarded
Pah
is
There are
too archaic to
a separate subject in our

as
appropriate
only
to
Moreover the Sanskrit student does
into contact with Prakrit in the plays,
and
among
has
For
this,
other reasons,
been thought desirable to present a general view
it
of the subject,
with special stress on Sauraseni and Maharastri.
The student making
use of this book
is
advised to read the
general sections, and to study the chapters on Phonetics and
Grammar
'
with special reference to the two main
Particularly
Prof.
.A.
recommended
Vedic
A. Macdonell, Clarendon Press.
(>iinnninr
19)1).
for
Dramatic
Students
by
PREFACE.
Vll
Prakrits.
The more important examples
type, and
may be memorised.
then
The Extracts
be thoroughly mastered, and the
applied to any play the student
The next step

comparison
are printed in bold
may be
to 14 should
knowledge acquired
reading.'
be more philological, consisting in the
will
of the several stages
described in Chapters IV to
and dialects as
far as they are
illustrated in Extracts 15
X, and
to the end.*
The specimens
of
PaH and
of old Prakrit are
intended as
inducements to further study.
Modern forms have been occasionally quoted to show the

historical continuity of
words from ancient times.
should be able to connect up a
from
his
much
The student
number
larger
of
forms
mother tongue.
The Index
is
intended partly for convenience of reference,
and partly to provide an instrument by which one may
test
one's ability to explain forms, and to recognize them out of

their context.
Transliteration.
several reasons.
The Roman
script
Over a dozen years
been used
has
for
of teaching experience has
convinced the writer that the slovenly spelling, so prevalent in

both
Roman and Devanagari
that Hindi
scripts, is partly
and Sanskrit are written
A word
with slightly different sound-values.

nagrl
may
If
he
will
same
script,
VH
as
fact
but
written in Deva-
be pronounced as in Sanskrit or as in Hindi,
HJWTf, as hhagavan or as bhagvdn,
'
in the
due to the
e.g.
dharma or dharam,
read a play for the sake of these two Prakrits only,
let
him
choose KarpCiramanjari (Konow's Edition).

2
The most
interesting play for variety of dialect
is
the Mrcchakatikam.
PREFACE.
Vlli
Î5
mmaveda or samved and
as
creased
if
when the
tion
Confusion
so on.
in-
is
the student has to distinguish a Prakrit pronunciaspelling
Another reason
is
is
modern word.
identical witli that of a
that the
Roman
script being
more atomic
than Devanagarl has advantages for stating phonetic laws in
Enghsh.
Moreover any Indian student who aims at keeping abreast

with modern scholarship should
liar
with the use of this script.
make
himself thoroughly fami-
To make
reference, and Oriental Journals,
is
it
use of
many books
almost as
of
important to
him, as Devanagarl to the Western scholar.
These reasons seemed to outweigh the disadvantages

increased labour in proof-reading, and
tlie initial feeling of
familiarity with Sanskrit in this guise that
may
of
un-
be experienced
by the beginner.
On
doubtful points, such as derivations where "Doctors
disagree," the authority of Pischel has generally been followed.
Controversy has generally been avoided, and where any

ence has been
made
to rival theories or matters of dispute,
only to suggest to the student
it is
refer-
fields of
enquiry that
still
await his enterprise.

facilitating the
Apart from
of Indian Philology,
some
of our students
great
field of
Sanskrit
sible to obtain
191
hoped that
this little
and graduates to take an
Without some knowledge

an adequate idea
Drama, and
of the Indian
Indian thought and literature that
circle.
(lulmarg.
it is
study
book may lead

interest in the
lies
of this,
outside the
it
is
impos-
of the life of mediaeval India.
A. C.
WOOLNER.
TABLE OF THANSI.ITKRA TION.

Vowels.
-^
TABLE OF TRANSLITERATION.
2.
Similarly other nasals are often represented by anusvara.
^^ pamca
^^
for
sainkha
^ damda
for
jambu
for
SJ^,
but see
sankha
danda
jambu
35
3.
For the weak y see
4.
Hindi
pafic
for
Note.
9.
represented by
r, cerebral oS by 1.
In practice
no confusion with the vowels
The
1.
f and
d was probably pronounced as a cerebral r long before
is
this causes
letter
the diacritical dot for

5.
In general
it
was devised.
should be understood that transliteration
is
merely the substitution of one set of symbols for another, and

does not
tell
us anything
quite possible that
more about the pronunciation.
It is
ca was pronounced something like tsa in
Maharlstri as in modern Marathi, and that in Magadha
^T
was pronounced as Bengali renders it to-day. Even if so, we

may feel sui'e that a Midlander would use his own sounds iu
pronouncing either Prakrit.
CONTENTS.
Pages
Preface
Table of Transliteration
Corrections
.
PART
Chapter
v-viii
ix-x
xv
I.
Subject Defined.
I:
Three periods of Indo-Aryan speech Three stages

of the middle period
Various uses of the
word Prakrt
1-4
Chapter II Prakrits
Enumeration of the more important Uterary
:
Prakrits
Chapter III
Remains
4r-7
General Character of Prakrit.
synthetic Grammar simplified Phoassimilation Parallel of Ronetic changes
mance languages
Chapter IV
8. B Medial
9 to
Compound Consonants.
7-10
Single Consonants.
Phonetics.
A. Initial I to
C. Final 29
Chapter V
28.
.
10-16
Nasal and
33 Two mutes 34
Mute 35 Mute and Sibilant 38 Semivowel
and Mute 38 and 41 Two Nasals 46 Nasal
and Sibilant 47 Nasal and Semivowel 48
Sibilant and Semivowel 49 Two Semivowels
Assimilation
50 Svarabhakti
Chapter VI
57
..
..
Vowels.
..
r 60
Change
for ai, au 61
Quantity 62 Lengthening 63 Shortening 67
Vowel for Vowel 69 Omission of
Vowels 74 Samprasarana 75 Epenthesis
76
Substitutes for
of
17-23
23-28
..
29-30
".
Chapter VII: Sandhi.

A. Consonants
77 B.
Vowels
80
XU
CONTENTS.
Pages
Chapter VIII: Declension.
stems
Feminine
R stems
SOI
stems
declension
96 AN
88 U
91
stems
stems
Variants
|j
98 IN
-AT
100
nouns
stems 102 S stems

106 Numerals 112
90
92
stems
104 Pro.Sl-41
Chapter IX: Conjugation.

Indicative
114
Imperative
116
5>
Optative
117 Future 118 Passive 119 Causatives 120 Participles and Infinitive 121 Gerund 122 Irregular Verb.s 123 Past
Participles 125
Irregular Indicatives 126
Irregular Futures 134 Irregular Passives
135 Infinitives 136 Gerundives 137
42-57
Chapter X: Classification of Prakrits.

Magadhi Dialects of Magadhi Ardha-Magadhi
Geographical classification Pali-Apablirain4a

Paiâci
..
Chapter XI
..
..
Prakrit Literaturk.
Ardha-Magadhi ahgas J Siin
Maharastri-Kavya
Setubandha Gaudavaho
Hala Dramatic Prakrits Prakrit Grammars
Jain
Literature
70-80
TT.
Sauraseni
Ratnavali^-(Dialogue)
Translation
81-82
2.
Sauraseni
Ratnavali (The Picture)
Translation
83-86
3.
Sauraseni.
Sakuntala
Translation
4.
Sauraseni.
1.
King)
,
PART
Extract No.
57-69
5.
Sakuntahx
(Vidiisaka)
86-89
(Before
89-92
Translation
Karpura-manjari
and Tunnel)
S'auraseni.
ine
(Hero-
6.
S'auraseni.
Same Play (Puns)
7.
S'auraseni.
Mrcchakatikam
8.
Sauraseni.
Same Play
mires the door)
9.
Maharastri.
with the chiid^
of
H Ala
the
Verses
(Scene
.
..
.
92-96
96-97
97100
(Jester ad..
trom
..
HX> 102
Sattasai
..
102 107
CONTENTS.
Xill
Pages
Extract No.
,,
,,
10.
,,11-
,,
12.
Maharastri.
kuntaia
,,13.
Three
Mrcchakatikam
Maharastri.
Maharastri.
,,14.
from
Verses
..
109-110
Six Verses from the

Cluster
.,
..
110-112
RatnavaU
..
One
and Three Verses

,,
107-109
Maharastri.
Camphor
,,
Five Songs from Sa-
Song
.
Maharastri. Setubandha Building

Rama's head
the Causeway
Sita's
lament
Return to Ayodhya
Translation
..
113-122
Jain Maharastri. Ma ndio the Robber Translation
122-127
..
,,
15.
,,
16.
Domuha
Jain Maharastri.
Doubleface Translation
,,
,,
17.
Jain Maharastri
,.
,,18.
,,
,,
19.
Ardha-Magadlii.
,,
,,
20.
Ardha-Magadhi.
Uvasagadasao
Saddalaputta the Potter Trans-
,,
,,
21.
Ardha-Magadhi. Kalpasutra
King^s Toilet Translation
,,
,,
22.
Magadhi.
S'akuntala.
and the PoHce
,,
,,
23.
Magadhi.
Mrcchakatikam.
varaka on the roof
,,
,,
24.
Magadhi.
,,
,,
25.
Magadhi.
,,
,,26.
,,
,,
tion
Kakkuka
Translation
lation
ses
..
play.
144-149
149-156
..
156-165
Fisherman
.
165-168
Stha.
168-169
The King's
..
play.
The
..
169-171
S'akari ver..
Magadhi (Dhakki).
Same
Mathura and Gambler
Magadhi.
139-144
brother-in-law
Same
134-139
Udayana Tmws
Same
127-133
Inscrip-
,,27.
King
Jain Maharastri.
Kalakacarya
Story of the Shahi Translation
lation
,,
112-113
Lalita Vigraharaja.
..
171-172
play.
.
172-174
Two
Turushka Prisoners and a Spy
174-176
CONTENTS.
Pages
Extract No.
28.
Avanti and Daksinatya.

Mrcchakatikarn.
Viraka and Candanaka
176-179
29.
Pravacanasara
179-180
180-184
30.
Bhasa
31.
Pali.
Jataka (308)
184^186
32.
Pali.
186-188
33.
Pali.
Jataka (339)
Mahavaipsa
34.
Old
Prakrit.
Hathigumplia
191
scription
35.
Old Magadhi.
Index of Examples
Students' Bibliography
188-190
In-
Inscription
193
194
195-214
215
(OKIIIXTIONS.
Page 11,
7, for
dhvanksa read dhvanksa.

dulaha read dulaha.
,,
29, 79, for
,,
38, last line for tain read tai.
,,
65, note 3, for
,,
75, note, line 3, for Mrcchakatikam read Mrcchakatikam,
,,
79, line 24, for Prdkrtd- read Prakrta-.
,,12, for
,,
,,
Biography read Bibliography.
CandakauMkam read Candakauîkam.
Insert a comma after

85, penultimate line.
delete stop after " vanquishing."
So
,,
87, line 9, for nivinno read iiivinno.
,,
93, line 7, for vitthavena read vittharena.
Footnote 6 refers to
Note
,,
13, for
99, line 1, for
in note 2.
line 8 vinnaviadi.
Cakkavatti read Cakkavatti.
mattaa read mattia.
,,
101, line 5. -pataa-, better reading -padaa-.
,,
102, line 9,
Note
f(yr
" Bow" and
bhakkanti read bhakkhanti.
9, for
sa-dahina read sadahina.
J,
110, verse (a), for nisasa read nisasa.
,,
112, verse (a), for sasahara read sasa-hara.
,,
113, verse
,,
115, footnote.
,,
116, verse 63, note, for saindattha read sanidattha.
,,
120, verse 82, note, for vinajjai read vi-najjai.

,,
,,
(6),
Hyphen between
Omit " ? rather
83, for
-supadi-tthia-.
to chastise the
monkeys."
nivvudham Naha read nivvudhatii Naha.
121, verse 14, for latthim read latthirn.
,,
124, note 13, cerebral n thrice.
,,
136, verse 17, for pagada read pagada.

,,
19, /or bia read bla
,,
141, note 6, for nirvuha read nirvaha.
,,
161, note 5, for
paccurpanna read paccuppanna.
INTRODUCTION TO PEAKRIT.
PART
I.
CHAPTER
I.
SUBJECT DEFINED.
The history
may
mediaeval^
(i)
of the
North Indian or Indo-Arjân languages
be conveniently
divided
three
into
periods
ancient,
and modern.
The speech
Old Indian period is repreby the language of the Rig Veda, (&) by
of the ancient or
sented in literature
(a)
that of later Vedic books.
To
this period
spoken dialects on which were based

the Epics, and
{d)
(c)
belonged also those

the poetic diction of
the more highly polished (Samskrta) literary
language of Panini, Patanjali, and thereafter of Kalidasa and

the others
down
to the present day.
The mediaeval or Middle Indian period is represented

by Pali and the Prakrits, It comprises all the
(ii)
in literature
dialects
from the time (whenever
changes, with some variations in
it
was) that certain phonetic
grammar
also,
a language obviously different from Old Indian,

time
(?
about 1100
a.d.)
when
had produced
down
to the
further phonetic changes and the
complete break up of the old grammar had produced a new

type of language similar to that of the modern vernaculars.
Our knowledge
of this period has to be pieced together
from a
variety of records, referring to different localities and different

times.
works.
These records comprise inscriptions as well as
literary
Of the inscriptions the most famous are the Edicts
Asoka. The literature comprises the Pjxli Canon of the

"Southern" or Hinayana Buddhists, the Prakrit Canon of
of
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
the Prjikrit of Lyrics, Epics and Plays and the
the Jains,
Prakrit grammars.
The beginning
(iii)
of tlie third or
been fixed with precision.

V Prakrit, or
apabhramsa
modern period has not
between the
It Hes
latest sort of
Hemacandra
described by
in
the
twelfth century, and the earhest poetry of the Old Vernaculars.
The oldest poem in Western Hindi is the Prithi Raj Rasau by

Chand Bardai of Lahore (about 1200 a.d.).
The middle period can be again divided into three stages

Old Prakrit (or Pali); (2) Middle Prakrit; (3) Late
(1)
Prakrit or Apabhramsa.
The Old Prakrit stage includes
(1)
middle of the Ord century
The
A.D.
as the
Inscriptions from the

to
the 2nd century
and place.
Hinayana Canon and other Buddhist works,
dialect varies with time
Pali of the
(6)
(a)
down
B.C.
Mahavamsa and the Jatakas.
In the Jatakas, or Birth Stories of the Buddha, the verses

(gathas) preserve a
more aichaic form
than the
of language
prose.
(c)
(d)
of
The language
The Prakrits
of the oldest Jain Siitras.
of early plays,
such as those
which fragments have been found

(2)
The Middle Prakrit stage includes
language of the liquid

tic Prakrits,
lyrics of the
of
A^vaghosa
in Central Asia.
Deccan,
(a)
Maharastri. the
(b)
the other Drama-
Saurasoni, Magadhi, etc., as found in the pla3's of
Kalidasa and his successors, and in the grammarians;

dialects
of
Brhatkatha
the
is
later Jain
said to
books
(d)
Paisaci, in
(r)
the
which the
have been composed, but which
is
known
only from the statements of grammarians.

(3)
Apabhram&as were not much used
for literary purposes.
They represent the stage reached by ordinary colloquial speech

when the Prakrit type of speech as found in the plays was
already archaic, and had been refined and stereotyped by the
grammarians. By the time that Hemacandra recorded a
particular
Apabhramâ
of the
West,
was probably already
this
archaic.
This book
concerned in general with the second, mediaeval,
is
middle period
or
with
the
of the Indian language,
Middle Prakrit stage,
and
especially
in particular
the
Dramatic
Prakrits.
Various uses of the word " Prakrit."
Prakrta derived from

meaning
the more precise
prakrti has
of
from a prakrti, the original form

vikiti
its
modification,
means what
is
probable that
'prakrta^
lines of
meaning
in
of
(S'auraseni
applied to ordinary
'
(a)
anything as opposed to a
Samkhya Philosophy
prakrta
derived from Prakrti, the original element;
the looser meanings of

It is
as
two
something belonging to or derived
(6)
natural, ordinary, vulgar, provincial.'
more general sense that

'pdiida' Maharastri 'paiia^) was first
it
was
common
in this
speecii as distinct
from the highly
polished, perfected Saniskritam.
Grammarians and Rhetoricians
days however explain
of later
prdkrtam as derived from the prakrti,
i.e.
perfectly intelligible even
if it
explanation
correct.
is
we take Sanskrit forms
Practically
derive Prakrit forms
therefrom.
This
samskrtam.
be not historically
as the basis
and
Nevertheless modern philo-
logy insists on an important reservation
Sanskrit forms are
quoted as the basis in as far as they represent the Old Indian

forms, but sometimes
frhe
particular Old Indian form required
word is not found in Sanskrit at all, or

work and obviously borrowed from Prakrit.
to explain a Prakrit
only in a late
If in
"Sanskrit" we include the Vedic language and
all
dialects of the Old Indian period, then it is true to say that

all
the Prakrits are derived from Sanskrit.
hand " Sanskrit "
is
language or "Classical Sanskrit," then

that any Prakrit
seni, the
is
If
on the other
used more strictly of the Panini-Patanjali

it
is
untrue to say
derived from Sanskrit, except that S'aura-
Midland Prakrit,
is
derived from the Old Indian dialect
MadhyadeSa on which
the
of
Classical Sanskrit
was mainly
based.
In Europe the word Prakrit has been used
to refer to
(a)
particular languages classed as Prakrit in India, e.g. Maharastrl,

or to the Prakrit passages in plays.
(6)
Of the Middle Period of the Indian languages
and the early inscriptions forming an

times distinguished from Prakrit
(c)
earlier stage
(Pali
were some-
').
Of the natural spoken language as distinct from the

In this last sense
literary learned language.
some writers*
distinguish Primary, Secondary and Tertiary Prakrits as the
natural spoken dialects of the three great periods.
Out of
spoken speech grew the
various
these successive types of

literary idioms
which became stereotyped or
were, and remained
in use alongside of the
fossilised
living
as
it
and ever-
changing dialects.
CHAPTER
II.
p^
PRAKRITS.
The
following are the
being excluded)
more important
Maharastri
S'auraseni
>
Mag"adhi
Ardha-Magadhi
AMg.
M.
Jain-Maharastri
Jain- S'auraseni
M.
f
S*.
Mg.
J.
J.
S'.
(Apa.
1
literary Prakrits (Pali
Dramatic Prakrits.
^
Jain Canon.
ApabhramSa.)
Dr. O. Franke in his Pali
and Sanskrit uses
'
Pali
'
for the
Middle
Period including Inscriptions.

s
Vide Article on Prakrit by Dr. Sir George Qrierson in Encyclopaedia
Britaumica,
XlXth
Edition.
Maharastri was regarded
M.
as the Prakrt par excellence.
For others
first.
rest
is like
"the
then
and
some
Maharastri." Danclin remarks (K.D. 1.35) Mahardstrdsraydm
Prakrit gratamars gave the rules for this

there were
special
rules,
bhdsdm prakrstam prdkrtavn viduh.
who speak Sauraseni, sing their songs in

The Maharastri lyrics were famous far beyond
Maharastram. The same language is used for the
In the drama ladies

Maharastri.
the limits of
This language of the
Prakrit Epics such as the Gaiidavaho.
Deccan poets
of omitting
This
is
carries further
single
than other Prakrits the principle
between vowels
consonants
{vide
natural in a literary song-dialect, for in a song
it is
10).
the
melody and sentiment that matter most, the precise words or

forms of words are
important.
less
however that Maharastri

is
arities of
not to be supposed
It
many
features that survive as peculi-
modern Marathi.
S'auraseni was the Prakrit of the Madhyadeâ taking

the country round Mathura (' Muttra').
S'.
name from Surasena
This
by
It is
a mere invention of the poets.
based on the old spoken language of the country of the
Godaveri, and contains
its
is
is
the ordinary prakrit of a Sanskrit drama.
It is
spoken
ladies and the Vidiishaka; in the Camphor-cluster (Karpiira-
manjarl) even by the king.

classical
Sanskrit.
It
descended from the
This Prakrit
arose in the
spoken
Sanskrit was mainly based.
same
language,
It
is
the nearest to
countrj'-,
on
which
is,
on which Literary Hindi has been based).
the Western Hindi
Owing however
this close kinship with the sacred tongue, Sauraseni

;
continually influenced by
make much independent

Mg.
is
thus forms an intermediate
stage between Sanskrit and Hindi (that
shadowed
and
classical
Sanskrit,
it
to
was overfailed
to
progress.
Mag-adhi is the Prakrit of the East. Its geographical

centre was in the ancient Magadha not far from the land of
modern Magahl, a dialect of Bihari. In the plays Magadhi is
spoken by low people.
Dhakki
in the
Magadhi
Dialects of
also occur, e g.,
Mrcchakatikam.
ously from the others in
its
This Prakrit differs conspicuphonetics, "^ is replaced by U, and
The nominative singular of -a stems end in -e. "^

remains and even replaces ^, (For further particulars vide
Chap. X). Where other Prakrits say haliho, Magadhi has ha&te
others so rdd = so raja, Magadhi se laa.
^ by ^,
Jain Prakrits.
AMg. The
Magadhi, a
oldest
Jain Sutras were composed in
prakrit based
Surasena and Magadha (about Oude).

traces of the old
H^
In
grammar than
phonetic character
its
resembles Magadhi in some respects.
it
Ardha
spoken between
on the dialect
It
preserves
more
and shows a greater
S'auraseni,
independence from Sanskrit.
M.
J.
The non-canonical books
of
the SVetambaras were
written in a form of Maharastri that has been termed Jain
Maharastri.
J.
S'.
The language
of the
Digambara Canon
in
some
res-
pects resembles S'auraseni and has been termed Jain S'auraseni.
Apabhramsa
has been used in
India
for
(a)
anything
diverging from Sanskrit as the standard of correct speech,

for
(6)
spoken languages as distinct from literary "Prakrits,"
including non- Aryan as well as Aryan languages
form
any such vernacular.
The only
(c)
a literary
Apabhramsa
described in detail by the grammarians is the Ndgara Apabhramsa which appears to have belonged to Gujarat. To this
is said to be related the
Vrdcada Apabhramsa of Sindh.
Dhakki and some other dialectic forms of the main Prakrits
are sometimes styled apabhramins.
If wc had records of the
of
apabhramsas spoken
in the areas
main Prakrits an important

in phonetics
connected with each of the
link in tiie history of the Indian
languages would be supplied.
Apabhramsa
literary
Even
as
it is,
the tendencies of
and grammar, as shown by the
rules
INTRODUOTIOxV TO PRAKRIT.
and specimens given by Hemacandra, help to bridge the gap

between typical Prakrit and the modern languages.
The use
of various Prakrits in the
XI on
Chapter
Prakrit Literature.
Drama
is
discussed in
Further details as to sub-
dialects, Paisaci dialects, tlie dialects used in Inscriptions,
their relationships, are given in
Chapter
and
on the classification
of Prakrits.
CHAPTER
III.
GENERAL CHARACTER OF PRAKRIT.

Prakrit (including Pali) was
ancient
still
of case forms
simplified.
and verbal forms tends to dwindle.
forms than the later Vedas.
possessed a greater variety of
Panini's Sanskrit has discarded a
Brahmanas.
Pali
The
The number
The Rigveda
a synthetic language.
grammar had been somewhat
number
of
forms used in the
and old Ardhamagadhi retain a good deal
that has disappeared from the Maharastri and S'auraseni of the

lyrics
and plays.
Apabhraraâ
finally indicates the
ing dissolution of the last remnants of
approach-
the old etymology.
The time was approaching when a noun might have only two
or three distinct endings and the verb was reduced to little
more than one tense and two participles. The ambiguity thus
produced was avoided by new devices, and out of the ruins of
,
the old language grew up the analytic languages of
modern
India.
Though simplified, yet the remaining Prakrit grammar is of

same type as Sanskrit grammar.
There is a strong
the
tendency
to
reduce
all
a-stems, and to conjugate
that
of
declensions
all
to
one type, that of
verbs according to one scheme,
the old A. Conjugation.
The Dative
disappears.
Nominative and Accusative Plurals tend to coincide.

Imperfect,
Perfect and numerous Aorists
The
had gone by the
time of the Middle Prakrit stage.
found
Dual number was
Tlie
Atmanepada
But
was not yet necessary to
it
or auxihary
verbs.
Tlie
essentials
stage.
necessary
ordinary
for
down
Ardhamagadhi and the other Jain Prakrits

advantage of being the language
the
to
tlie
For more important work, for more exact
As
thinking the tendency was to resort to Sanskrit.
Pali,
8uccessivel3' lost
day, or of the
of the
they were unable to withstand
locality,
mean-
its original
resort to postpositions
conversation and even verse-writing remained
ApabhramSa
survived
hardly
Old Prakrit stage and never in
after the
ing.
The
unnecessary.
this
tendency and
were eventually replaced by Sanskrit.
Apart from
this simplification the
lated
rakta
frutto)
.?",
arising in
became raita (as Latin fructu-s became

became satla (as Latin septem became
Italian
sajpta
Some
sette).
main changes
Conjunct consonants are mostly assimi-
Prakrit are phonetic.
ai,
of the
%T
bridge hiatus),
au,
Italian
sounds of the old language disappear
^ ya
(except in Mg. and a
U &a (except in
Mg. where "^
is
shadowy
missing),
'^
^ to
sa
and
Visarga; whereas the only sounds contained in Prakrit and not
vowels e and
recorded for Sanskrit are the short
Final
6.
Not more than two consonants can

follow a short vowel, nor more than one follow a long vowel.
consonants are avoided.
[For details see Chapters
The cumulative effect

lar word may be such
" Vappairaa "
" oinna "
is
does
of
IV
to VI.]
such changes
in the case of a particu-
as to completely alter its appearance.
not
immediately'
not very like avatlrna.
On
suggest Vakpatiraja,
the other hand some
words are identical with Sanskrit and the

readily suggest a Sanskrit equivalent to
colloquial
knowledge
could
majority
anyone with a living
of the classical language.
This
is
true
not only of S'auraaeni but also of the others.
From
this
circumstance
it
may
be understood
different Prakrits were mutually intelligible
among
that
the
the edu-
cated.
speaker of Sanskrit, whose mother tongue was the
spoken form of any one
stand any of the literary Prakrits.
would
S'auraseni
would readily under-
of the Prakrits,
learn
easily
to
Moreover a speaker
many
recognise
of
Sanskrit
words, and even grasp the meaning of a Sanskrit sentence

In the older stage the
without being able to speak Sanskrit.

difference
was
still
less
find only the difference
marked.
between
'
Still
further back
we should
correct' and 'incorrect' pro-
nunciation, grammatical speech and ungrammatical, standard
speech and dialectical
the
differences
between the speech
of
educated and uneducated people speaking substantially the
same language. At this stage though differences existed the

new speech had not attained a separate existence, it was not
yet distinct enough to be recognized as a separate language
capable of having a fixed grammar and a literature of its own.
Even
in the
Rigveda we
,'
find " prdkritisms
'
that
is
phonetic
variations
along just those lines that were followed by the
Prakrits.
For instance Sithird = " loose
as might be expected from the root
similar instances
it is
"'
instead of S'rithird
^rath.
From
this
and
not necessary to deduce a wide difference
between the language of the hymns and contemporary speech.

Rather the inclusion of such " prakritisms " in the sacred
texts indicates that the priests were not yet conscious of the
difference.^
An
interesting parallel
to
the history
languages is shown by that of the
Of several old
Italic dialects,
Roman
Romance languages in Europe.
It has to be
scious.
Men
of Italy
and then
became the language of the largest

the middle ages, and thence the language
Empire,
Christian Church of
the Indo-Aryan
that of the Latin tribe prevailed,
and Latin became the dominant language

of the
of
It
remembered that phonetic changes are generally unconnew pronunciations without knowing that they
slip into
have done so. They will therefore retain archaic spelhngs centuries after
the sounds have changed. This is very conspicvious in Tibetan and in
English.
'
INTRODUCTION TO I'KAKRIT.
10
and Philosophy
Science
of
Europe asserted
men
religion Latin
modern languages
independent existence.
their
was long the medium
in India, Latin
educated
the
until
of
Like Sanskrit
of conversation
between
Again, as the language of
of different nations.
was always to be heard
in the
mouths
of priests,
and common people caught stray phrases of it. The mediaeval

quack or schoolmaster, however ignorant, must needs air his
Here again phonetic changes and the working
Latin.'
logy have gradually simplified the old

sitions
grammar
of ana-
until prepo-
and auxiliary verbs had to be used to avoid ambiguity.
Some
speculation has been devoted as to the causes of such
changes as
may
India
in
effort, progressive
be styled prakritic.
Economy
refinement especially in courts and
of
cities,
softening influence of a semi-tropical climate, influence of the
who adopted
speech habits of non-Aryan peoples

speech
in
all
these
may have been
work both
at
in
the
Aryan
India and
Europe.
CHAPTER
IV.
PHONETICS.
Single Consonants.
A. Initial.
1.
at
thfi
n, y,
y
I
-n
'\
is
s,
The general
beginning- of a
ands
cerebralised
(^T,
rule
is
tliat a sing'le
consonant
word remains unaltered, except
^, U, W).
{ 7).
tA^ ^y becomes j (except in Mg.).
^
I
.iadha=?/a<Art (Mg. yadha),
iiv.
(Mil. yai, yadi).
Y
i
and
The
2.
'
become
initial
jai'
= ?/nrfi,
S'aur. also
has jadi
}0î=yogi.
S (8).
consonant of the second member of a compound
was
the middle of a word.
is
usually treated as
verbal root however often retains
if
it
See Love's Labour Lost, Act V.
in
its initial letter.
Holofornes the Schoolmaster.
11
putta = pM/ra, but dryaputra becomes ajjaiitta.
paasei
3.
= prakdsayati.
Si
te
to d as in the
M. ho'i^hhavati
S'.
Mg. hodavva = 6/iawtovya.

at the beginning of
tdvat.
tado de = tatas
in the root
te.
bhu and
its
(Saur. bhodi).
= 6âms?/aii.
havissadi (Mg. havissadi)
is
vi
and Mg. change
ma dava = ma
te.
bh becomes h
S".
Ph
S'aur.
middle of a word,
In several dialects
pound
member
the second
of
a com-
often retained as at the beginning of a word.
cittaphalaa = cj7ra23âZa)fca, bahuphala saphala.
S'.
(6).
(2nd pers. pron.)
piduno de = pitus
te.
derivatives.
(5).
kim una = kim punar.
= ca.
In tdvat and
na de = na
agadam = drjaiam.
or
Enclities are similarly treated,

{a)pi.
4.
aadam
Aspiration.
kh
ph
khujja = kubja.
for k.
"\
khel=
krid.
M. panasa = pawasa "bread-fruit

tree," an aspirated sibilant becomes ch. AMg. chava =
M. AMg.
Pali chapa = â6a or kdha "young animal."
for p.
S'.
phanasa.
cha = sa^, chattha = f7Sfâ.

(7).
Change
of
Place of Articulation.
Examples,
Mg.
(8).
The
for n.
S. citthadi.
= tist}iaii.
Cerebral for Dental.
M. citthai.
Palatal for Dental.
cht\\B,^\
M. dhankha = dhvanksa
"crow."
nuna = nunam, naana = nayana.
three sibilants
s, S,
S (TT
W '^)
are reduced to one, the
dental s (except in Magadhi where
we have the
pala-
tal i).
9. B. Medial.
Medial or intervocal
generally dropped.
(^, T,
'^,
^,
k,
g-,
(T,
^).
c, j,
t,
d,
are
M. loa = Zoâ, saala = saA;aZa, anura a =awMmg'a, juala =

yugala, naara = wagram, p aiir a = pracMra,
bhoana =
bhojana, rasaala = rasatoto,
hiai^Si
= hrdaya.
12
Medial p, b, v, are sometimes dropped. (^, W,

jM. rVLQ, = rupa, ym\\a, = vihucUw,, d\a,ha, = diva sa.
Medial y is always dropped ('?).
,
vioB.
= viyoga,
'p\B,
= priya.
Note.
In place of the omitted consonant was pronounced
weakly articulated ya {laghw-prayatnatara-ya-kara).
was not expressed
by the Jains,
10
of Sanskrit or
Magadhi, and
in writing, except in
MSS. written
This was weaker than the
^).
e.g., hiysby Q.
= hrdaya.
This principle of omitting single consonants
between
vowels was carried to great lengths in the literary form

of Maharastri used in
Kai may
ambiguity.
Lyrics.
vowels like uaa
string of
It
represent
kavi, or kapi\
= udaka)
The
character of the original word.
changes were possible at
naturally leads to
Icati,
has lost
all
A
the
fact that such
shows that the Indian
all
consonants were, as now, weaker in articulation than

the English consonants.
however were more
Hemacandra
tells us, k, t,
dropped, but became

ndyakah,
The actual workaday dialects

In ApabhramSa,
conservative.
a.ga,do
gf,
= dgatah,
p between vowels were not

naagu =
respectively.
d, b,
of the literary Prakrits also
have the same change.
In the older stage, as in Pah, k,

11.
Some
sabhalau =saphalakani.
p remain unchanged.
t,
Examples.
S'aurj &,didh.i
pdritosika,
= atifhi
'ka.dhedvi
= kathayatu,
paridosia =
hhodi = bhavati, ksidhido = kathitah
Kira-
da. = Kirdta, Sinedi = dnayati ta.do = tatah, ]s.\dci = krta,

Sarassadi = /Sam^
ga.da, = gata, sakkada = sams^'r/a,
,
vati (M. SarassaT).
Magadhi:
pii]ido^'m
= pdritosika,
ÂSkdum
= svdgatam h&ge
,
(" I ") *ahakah, a derivative of aham.
Ardha-Miigadhi and Jain Maharastri
= loka agasa = dkdka.

,
Pah
loka, gacchati, rupa.
Asogai
= Aioka,
loga
12.
In this treatment of medial t

teristic distinctions
rastri of the plays.
Sauraseni.
we have one
between
tlie
13
of tlie charac-
Sauraseni and Maha-
Compare the following
14
I
15. Sometimes instead of being dropped (9) or reduced to
h
S".
( 13)
a consonant between vowels
M.'nakkha = nakha, M.
ujju = r;M,
N Note
The
2.
always
vowel
e, 6.
An
3.
te\la.
the
and
"Ijr
is
literally
chch, and so on.
^y
"^^
double
"^T
consonant
is
represent the short
kkh, ggh, and so on.
double the aspirates, writing khkh,

This
is
merely an orthographical
was the same.
surds t th between vowels become sonant d
become ^,
doubled by prefixing the corres-
difference, the pronunciation
3"
e.g.
68).
aspirate
ponding non-aspirated sound
Some MSS.
16. Cerebral
ekka = eA;a.
= iaila, pemma, = preman.
before
Here
short.
vowels
Note
doubled.
Other consonants are similarly doubled,
1.
j ovvana = ?/a wuana,
Note
is
S'.
dh
(2',
^).
pada = 2?afa, padaa = y>afaA;a, kudila = ^M/i7a, kudumba

=kuiumba, vada = vaâ, padhana = 2Ja?/ia??.a.
Some dialects had the further change of d to 1. ( 22).
M. kakkola = ârA;ofa. Mg. âala = âA;a/a (Saur
Mg. yulaka = ;M<aâ (S'aur *jiiclaa).
saada).
(17).
if
not omitted becomes V.
{^^
becomes
^).
ruva = r?ipa, diva = d?pa (cf. Diwali), uvari = wpari, uvaarana = wpaifcarana, uvajjhaa = M;)a(i/it/a?/a (cf. Ojha),
avi = api, avarat = apara (Hindi aur), tava = <a/>a.
(18).
becomes V.
(W becomes
^).
kavala = kabala, savara = Sahara.

(19).
Aspiration.
( 6).
comes
Prakrit sometimes has kh instead of Sanskrit
This in the middle of a word
generallj'^ be-
h.
M. nihasa = ?iiA;asa, M. S'. phaliha = spAafiA-a.

ta through tha becomes dha. AMg. vadha = m/a, ta
becomes tha, then ha. M. bharaha = 6/iam/a, vasahi =
Rarer; p through ph becomes bh. A.Mg.
vasati
kacchabha = AroccAapa.
n,
m,
and the sibilants are
Aspiration
sometimes aspirated.
from *dithi = dhrfi.
M. dihi
duhitd,
15
sometimes shifted.
is
M. dhiia
S'
Mg. dhuda =
Mg.hahini = bhagini, M. ghettum = grahitum
S'.
Aspiration
through *ghrptum)
is
sometimes
lost.
S'.
sankala = ^rnMa/a but sankhala and sinkhala are also

found.
(20).
Change
of place of articulation.
Cerebral for Dental.
padi = y>raii', M. padia-
prathama.
Mg.
S'.
= patita, padhama
much commoner in
ip?i6.id3i
This cerebralising
is
Ardhamagadhi
AMg. osadha =aMsaiAa (M. S'. osaha).
In most dialects n regularly becomes n
('^ for T) ntina,
naana.
The
(21). Sibilants.
by the dental
three sibilants of Sanskrit are represented
(except in Magadhi which has only the
palatals), asesa
Mg. keê^n = keêsu

(22).
often becomes
= aêsa,
etc.
(S'aur. etc.
( 16)
1.
kesesu).
(^ becomes
In North India books and MSS. use
M. garula
khel = v/
-v/
(23).
(S'.
T and d
M.
S'.
S'.
îla.
= kridd,
krid.
sometimes become
(whence
(24).
garuda; Mg. galuda), M.
alasi = atosi, M.
S'.
55).
^ for ^.
Hindi
doh'dla,
becomes r
or
^. Yi]i\x[\a.
bijll).
(rf,
\,
^ become ^ or
o5).
*vidyutikd " hghtning "
M. Salavahana = Satavahana.
= dohada.
in adjectival
and pronominal compounds
with -dri -drSa -drksa.

erisa.=idrsa
(S'.
also Idisa) kerisa, aiinarisa
tumharisa,
sarisa.
(25).
In dialects
m sometimes became v.
vammaha
onavia = at" anato
So
M.
S'aur.
(T becomes
^).
mammadha = mawma^â.
(from *avanamita).
M.
16
This change
is
more frequent
Apabhramâ which
in
at
the same time nasaUses the preceding vowel and the
semivowel, and then often omits either the semivowel
Thus Apa. kavala = âma?a,

Jauna = Yamuna, na vahl = waman^j. This nasalisation
also appears in M., e.g. Caunda = Saur. Camunda.
or the nasal element.
This change accounts for forma like
Kumara, and gav (<l|cj) with

tions in the modern dialects.
In Magadhi r always become
change
exceptional.
is
'
(?"
Kanwar
(Skt. grama-.
1,
'
'
from
manj' minute varia-
its
Cf Beames,
most Prakrits (g)gama-).

(26).
'
I,
Pali
and
254.
other dialects the
in
become ^).
dalidda ^rfantZra, muhala = m?iMara.

The change is more frequent in Ardlia Magadhi than
M.
S'.
M. or
(27).
Sometimes
vowels.
Loc
Sing: tahim
important
is
= tassiin
commoner
h,
especially
in
of
etc. in Prakrit,
eg
inS'.
Apabhramâ and has an
Sanskrit
Cf. hanti
Final.
29. C.
is
find
an aspirate
ita.
original sound.
an original sonant
H.
aspi-
and aghnan, jaghana.
All final
liiutfes
Nasals become anusvara.

sarga
we
Mg. idha M.
in Sanskrit often represents
\)
long
[tasmin).
Here Sauraseni preserves the more

rate.
after
on the inflectional system.
effect
Sometimes instead
dh
become
sibilants
M. anudiaham(Saur a nudiasara) =anMdiOTsam.
The change
(28).
in
S'.
dropped.
are dropped
ah becomes
Sometimes the
o,
final
otherwise vi-
vowel
is
then
nasalised.
For
treatment
(Ch. VII).
of
finals
in
compounds
see
Sandhi
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKEIT.
CHAPTER
17
V.
COMPOUND CONSONANTS.
$
30.
At the beginning of a word only a single consonant

can remain.
Exceptiom
nh,
1.
At the beginning
a compound.
In the middle of a
mho mha-smai^
(a) ami,
'
(enclitic).
3.
^:il.
nhana = 5wawa,
e.g.,
rah as in mhi=^
2.
of tlie second
member
of
word no group may exceed two
consonants, and these must be only
32.
kk
(1)
Doubled,
(2)
Mute
(3)
Aspirated Nasal
e.g.
(or for aspirate
kkh),
after nasal of the same class,
most
Consequently
(or Ih).
'
e.g. lik,
nd, or
'^
compound consonants
are
either
assimilated or separated by a svarabhakti vowel.
33. Assimilation.
The
general rule
is
that between equals
the second prevails, between unequals the stronger

prevails
The consonants can be arranged
as follows in a scale of
decreasing strength for this purpose,

(i)
Mutes.
(ii)
(iii)
(The
1,
s, V,
y,
r, in
h stands by
34.
five
vargas
less the nasals),
Nasals.
order.
itself ( 52-54).
Two
mutes. According to the rule given above, k +

becomes tt, g + dh becomes ddh, d + g becomes gg and
so on.
= yukta, vappairaa = w^pa^^'mâ, dud= diigdha, chaccarana = sal + ccraîa ( 6), khagga
= khadga, haAa,kka,ra. = baldtkara, uppala = *<pa/a,
Examples, iutta,
dha,
INTRODUCTION TO I'RAKRIT.
18
ug'gama = udgama, sabbhava = sadbhava, sutta =

khu}}3i
35.
= kubja
(6), saddsi
= 6abda,
laiddha.
supta,
= labdha.
nasal before a mute of the same class remains, before
a mute of another class it becomes anus vara.

Sankhala = ^.mHa?a, konca = A-mwwca, kantha, manthara, jambu, but dimmiihsi = dinmiik-ha, pamtipankti, vim^ha. - vindhya (44).
36.
nasal following a mute
aggi = a(jrm/^
= yugma.
-s^
assimilated
s&Vdtti
= sapatni. jugga
(a) jna becomes mia. anavedi = a/zlo/jayaii.

anahinna = anabhijna. j anna - yajna
Exceptions,
1.
At
compound
Note
Note
jna can become jja,
Magadhi has
2.
member
the beginning nf the second
liiia
e.g.
of a
manojj a = wffnopa.
according to Hemachandra
(4-293).
ainian in M. nearly always, in Apa. always becomes
(6)
appa
(cf.
Hindi
The other
i\p).
appa and atta.

dma becomes mma,
(c)
37.
is
viggha, = vighno,
dialects vary
between
pomma = jxidma (alsopaiima, 57).
L with a mute is assimilated.

vakkala = t;a/A;a?a
iphB.ggunB, = phalguna, appa = a/pfl,
=
[Exception
kappa te^'pa.
^/jalp becomes
jamp, but
also japp].
pavamga = pâua<7a.
,
38.
Mute and
ted,
Sibilant.
When
surd.
and the mute
When however
first
member
The mute
of
is
aspirated,
(/w.9.
sca
if
e.g.
assimila-
sta becomes tht.
the
first
member
is
becomes ccha, accharia = at<carya,

niccala = m^c<7/a, duccarida =
carita.
Magadhi
first, it is
compound, the following mule need
paccha = po^caf but

lln
can only be a
the sibilant stands at the end of the
not be aspirated, especially

prefix like
of course
the sibilant comes
ica remains: niscala.]
f/?/.<-
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIl".
li>
Ska and skha become kkh. 8'. pokkhara = p^<5âra,

sukkha = JMsAra. In this case however the aspiration
is
often omitted.
M. caiikka,
ca,dnkka,
S'.
nikkam
duskara,
Sta and stha become

Exception vedha
for
= catusko
PaU
vesia (cf.
dukkara =
S.
etc.
= drsH, sutthu = susthu.
ditthi
tth.
M.
niskram
vethati).
puppha = 25Ms?;a, nipphala
Spa and spha become pph.
= nisphala.
_
^ Sta and stha become tth. thana = s/ana,
.
a.tthi
h&tthi =hasla
kaatthaa = M?/as<Aate.
Sometimes this tth
The
is
^/
cerebralised.
^/sthd especially varies
M.
S'.
(M, also thana).
aitthi
between tth and
thida or ihida =^ sthtta (M. thia or thia).
= sthdna
= (isti,
= a vastha,
= ^ts/ara.
duttara
Compound.
Panjabi hatth), &va.tth2i
(cf.
8',
= asthi.
tth.
M.
fe".
Saur.
thana
thidi or i\iidi =^ sthiti (M.
thii or thii).
spha become pph. phamsa = sparer/

= sp}iatika. A. Mg. phusa'i^sprSaii.
Spa and
y
39.
"ph&liha.
When
the sibilant follows the mute they become cch,
SbCchi
a.r a,
= aksi,
r ksa, M.
va,ccha, = vatsa
riccha,
= matsara,
apsard,
= ksudkd, macch(aAso = vrksa) acchara =

chuhii
juguccha -jugupsd.
\
40.
(49).
Ksa however more generally becomes kkh.

khattia
nikkhividum =
khina = daksina
Sometimes
the
M. ucchu,
khitta
ksatriya,
S'.
M. pecchai,
'
\kk\i\x
S.
sikkhida =
8'aur.
aksi,
dak-
vary between cch and
kkh.
Deccan
dialects
akkhi =
ksipta,
sifet/o.
wtX'sep^mn
(*
= iksu,
").
M. kucchi,
8'.
kukkhi = ^M^s^,
pekkhadi - preksate, M. sariccha,
8'.
sarikkha = *sddrksya.
Sometimes
S'.
"ksdit
paj jharavedi
khina).
becomes ^jh.
= *praksardpayati
M.
8'.
jhlna = kfiva (also
20
Pischel distinguishes
[Note.
kkh,
becomes
xsa)
becomes ccha,
(c)
(6)
(a)
ksa (Avestan
original
ksa from Ssa (Avestan a)
ksa from zza becomes jjha.
zza would seem rather difficult to pronounce.
S'sa
and
Presum-
ably 4sa represents in origin a front palate stop plus

the corresponding fricative, and zza the sonant equivalent, while the original ksa
'
fricative.
Tlie
identical
with
in '^
a back palate stop plus a
is
can hardly have been originally
Indian
the
cerebral
The
and ^, and
x ^^'^ ^> need
sibilant.
history of the different pronunciations of
the
relation
in
Iranian languages of
further investigation].
t + 6
41. In compounds
or
t + s-
= paryutsuka,
VLsa.vai
= utsava,
S'.
ss or
pajjussua
become
with lengthening of previous vowel simply

ussasa.
M. usasa =
ucchvasa.
j
42.
with a mute
M. kadliia
S.
is
assimilated.
kadhida = A;ua/7M7a,
S'.
pakka /x?A-t;a,
ujjala
- ujjvala, satta = sattva, dia = dvija, uvvigga = udvigmi.

^43,
44.
Y with
a mute is assimilated.
Canakka = CaaA;?/a, sokkha. = saukhya, jogga. = yogya,
nattaa = ndiyaka, abbhantara = abhyantara.
denial
is first
palatalised.
= satya, nevaccha = nepathya, accanta = at.yanto,

raccha = â<%, ajja = a%a, uvajjhaa = Mparf^yaya,
samjha = saw(Z//!/a, majj ha = mad//a.
S&cca,
%
N
'
45.
<
with a mute
is
assimilated.
takkemi = torâyam?, cakka = caA;ra, magga= //wrr/a,

gama = grama, samucchida = samucchriia, uibbandha
nirbandhxi, citta = Ci7;r/, patta = pa//ra, attha = ar//irt

bhadda = 6/iac?rrt, samudda = i<tawmrZw, addha orrf/Mi.
/
Exception
[When
6r8t.
atra
becomes attha,
precedes a dental
vattadi = vartate].
it
tatra
becomes tattha.
sometimes cerebralises
it
46.
Two
Nasals,
"^'u
and
^n
is
Tm
(i.e.,
^m become anusvara
"Rm and ^m to following
before
assimilated to following
Tm
21
:
"^ n).
dimmuha. = dinmukha. M. chammuha = sa/mwMa. ummuha. = unmukha, niiina = wmna, Pajjuima = Pradyumna.
47.
Nasal with sibilant.

anusvara.
When
and the order

Ska becomes nha.
is
If
the nasal precedes
the sibilant precedes
it
becomes
it
becomes h
reversed.
panha = /jra^wa.
Kamhira = Kasmira.
8na becomes nha. VLuhB, = tisria Kanha = Kr8nci.
Sma becomes mha. gimha = g'mma.
Sna becomes nha. nhana = 5nawa.
f^ma becomes mha.
Sma
amhe = asme.
becomes mha.
vimhB,B>
= vismaya.
Exceptions
ra^mi always becomes rassi.
(1)
(2)
InitiaHma becomes m. masana = ^ma^wa.
(3)
Sneha, snigdha, either neha niddha or sineha,
(4)
Loc. Singular Pronominal ending
siniddha
smin becomes
ssim or mmi.
mmi; smin becomes either

edassim= efasmm M. eassim or eammi.
S".
msi
48.
lo(i;amsi
(AMg.
= loke).
The semivowel
Nasal with semivowel.
is
assimilated.
annesana = awvesana punna = puny a anna = a nya somma - saumya
gumma = gulma, meccha =
mleccha,
dhamma = f//iarma, kanna = ârna.

Note,
49.
my
Sibilant
after a long vowel
and semivowel.
become m. kamae - kamyayd.
The semivowel
is
assimilated.
sahania = ^^%Aam?/a, pasa = par^va, M. asa

.-^^
'
^^
a^va,
3i.Ya,sS3im
= avasyam,
M. misa
S'.
S'.
a33a
missa = wtâ,
manussa = 7nanusya S'. parissaadi = parisvajate rahassa

rahasya, vaassa = ;ayas?/a, ta,ssab = tasya, sahassa =
,
22
sahattha =
sa/iasra,
Note
Sometimes
1.
s?/"a//a5to,
Sarassadi :=Sarasvati.
8'.
= svdyalam.
saadani
this ss
reduced to
is
thening of the previous vowel (M.
with
nasalisation of the previous vowel, which
(6)
spansa damsana = rfar.a?ia
-phamsB.
2.
Magadhi
^ 50.
Two
kamaha,
kavva =
on
effect
is
oi
more
(64).
s
becomes
kamaho.
So
h.
Later on
inflections.
The stronger
semivowels.
h V, r, y.
g"allakka = f/aZyarâ,
is
Apabhrainâ
had an important
this
change
furtlier dialectic
leng-
Anisu = a^M,
frequent from Ara and general with ria.
Note
(a)
dsa above)
niisa,
prevails in the order
muly a duWdiha ^(hirlabha,

parivvajaa = parivrajaLa, savva =
kavya,
mvi\\3b
sarva.
In ry y becomes j, hence it becomes jj, ajja

=drya, kajja = âr?/o. Sometimes r becomes /, hence
Exception.
11,
pallattha
Note,
= 2>a>"?/asto.
yya becomes
jja^
51. Visarga before k, kh,

6.\\\ikhQ,
sunivdra, du8saha
52.
When h
p,
ph
is
treated like a sibilant,
= duhkha, antakkarana = an<aMam//a
visarga before
except in Magadhi.
sibilant.
precedes a nasal
(also
or
so
is
cadussamudda-cafwA-
S'.
= rfwAsaAa
1,
M.
the
8'.
dusaha).
group
is
inverted.
= madhyahna, M.
genhai, S'. goiihadi = grhndli, ciiiha = cihna (M. also
cindha) barahana = brnhmana, palhattha = *prahlasta
(from ^/hlas = /iras).
avaranha =
apardhva, majjhanha
53.
In hy
jj h.
the
semivowel becomes
and then
the
group becomes
Sajj ha = sahya anugej j ha = anugrahyd.

,
54. IIv becomes either bbh (through vh) or

nhvala,jihai
= jihvd (AMg. jibbha).
//.
(For
fir,
vibbhala
rh see
57.)
23
I
Dental
55. Cerebralisation.
cerebral.
56.
The same
e.g.,
become
sometimes
vuddhn = vrddJia
ganthi
57.
principles apply to groups of three consonants,
matsya becomes macclia, arqhya aggha, astra attha,
and so
5
groups
= mrttikd
(jranthi.
ma,\tia
on.
When one
Svarabhakti.
of two consonants is
a nasal or a
may be separated by an inserted svaraThe two consonants are then treated
semivowel, the two

bhakti vowel.
according to the rules
vowel
times
generally
is
i,
a.
M. raana,
S".
harsa,
radana, Mg. ladana -=ra/wa, M.
kilanta
duma)
S'.
duara
duvara
tvara{sva),
ariha = ar/ict,
suvo = Svah,
paiima = paf/ma
also
dvara,
pa-
acaria =
(The' actual difference of pronunciation here is
slight) xQv\x\\a.
Sometimes
(Pali
sumaradi = smora/i.
f 58. // one of the consonants is y, this is then omitted.
acarya.
harisa =
= klanta, kilinna = fcZmwa, milana =
tuvara =
mlana,
salaha =
S'.
varisa = 'yarsa,
amarisa = amarsa,
Magha,
(M.
The
simple consonants.
for
or u with a labial, but some-
= hyas.
accharia = aicar?/a
accharia 07
S'.
padhiadi = Pali pathiyate
76).
= vaidurya,
appears,
acchera
corisi
= caurya
h'lo
S'.
= pa thy ate.
CHAPTER
VI.
VOWELS.
59. Tlie sonants r
Sanskrit
and
Grammar
("^ and '5) counted as vowels in
disappear in Prakrit, as in Pali.
In
the old Indian language "^ was not pronounced ri (iT)

It was not a consonant plus a
as it is nowadays.
vowel, but a " sonant " fricative used as a vowel. Its
24
may have
pronunciation
been similar to the sonant
some Slavonic languages,
own
Serbs in their
vowel
or introduce a vowel
consonant
Hence
more
is
it
(not re),
(or a sign for
does
syllabic
it)
I)
Substitutes for
the
like
and the
riddhi
a^.
^^^.
= rddhi,
M. kaa
S.
riccha
U. (after labials or
Note
S'.
u as well as by
or
sound
final
!S'.
li,
guna
or a.
ri.
^.
('sonant'
or
no vowel
is
It is repre-
is al.
Kilitta = ArZpto.
li.]
= rksa,
ri<i
rsi.
krpana, gxddha,
hia.a,
when another
nihuda,
ditthi
pucchadi
= grdhra
= hrdaya.
u follows).
= nibhrta, M.
prcchati, raunala = mra/a,
i,
kada = A:r/a, vasaha = vrsa6Aa.
siaila. = srgdh
M. nihua
ftvij,
r.
(commonest) kiwina.
drsti,
a,
Its
I.
[Magadhi
ri. (for initial r)
by
for
iritvija
express the old pronunciation of
Iri
sented in Prakrits by Hi,
i 60.
ar
r ia
Prakrits not possessing
(d)
in English " battle " where there
between the
after).
the guna of
has
Pali
(c)
replace
more
This was
and
before
(a)
Vrtrahan appears in Avestan as Ver6th-
[b]
raghna, rju as erezu,
less
sound before or after the
why
intelligible
irubbeda for rgveda, and
Still
r in
of the
either with the neutral
it
both
(Sometimes
r.
name
Languages not possessing
language.
sound naturally represent
this
Srbi, the
e.g.
pucchai
S'.
vuttanta= vrttanta.
The vowel often varies even in the same dialect.

1.
dadha or didh a. = drdha. M. iiiatta or nivutta=:7?/-
vrtta.
generally have u for r before the

Nouns in
and when they begin compounds, b" jfimfidua = ;ama/;râ, bhadusaa = 6/<r(7//-va/rt. But i also oc-
Note
2.
suffix -ka,
curs:
Note
3.
S'.
bhattidaraa
a,
i,
M. acchaT=
Note
4.
Lona
= bliartrdaraka.
u, also occur at the beginninsr of a

rccliaii,
r
S'.
becomes
isi
= r5j",
or u.
ujju=;/w.
word.
25
61. The Diphthongs
consonants
au
ai,
are replaced by
komui,
tella
= vaidya.
taila, \e]}a,
M.
Before double
Eravana = Airavana,
edihasia, =aitihasika,
S'.
e, o.
u are short ( 15, 68).
and
komxxdl
8'.
= kaumudl
jovvana = /a%mwa,
somma = saumya.
/ôte.
^
i,
Sometimes in M.'and other dialects ai become

and au becomes ail, eg. ya,'ira. = vairin, mauU =
This
7nauli.
62.
Change
is
not correct for S'auraseni or
of Quantity.
.4
MagadhL
by
long vowel can he followed
only one consonant, and therefore every vowel before a

double consonant is short This law obviously covers
many
cases where a long vowel in Sanskrit appears as
a short vowel in Prakrit.

to shorten the consonant
such
cases.
especially in
it
is
This
commoner
is
Ardha Magadhi and

or
S'auraseni
in
There was also a tendency

and lengthen the vowel in
in
Maharastri (and
Jain- Maharastri) than
This principle has
Magadhi.
played a great part in the modern Indian languages
(cf
Pr, aggi Panjabi agg, but Hindi ag).
63.
Lengthening of short vowel.

This occurs most frequently before
r +
consonant (espe-
and before sibilant +
cially a sibilant),
;ya,
m,
va, or
sibilant. S'.kadm]^ = kartum,kMsi.vv = kartavya. AMg.

(S'auraseni
phasa, = spar ia, AMg, ma.nu8a. = 7nanusya
manussa} M. asa = a^ya (S'. assa). M. S'. iisava = Mfsam,
diisaha = duhsaha.
a.
64. Instead of being lengthened in such cases the vowel is often
nasalised.
dB.msai.na. -^darsana,
M. a,msa = a^ru
65.
Vice versa a vowel

nasalised before
(S'.
is
assu),
3iha.
= simha
(S'.
sometimes lengthened instead
r, s,
dadha = c?am.sfra, M.
M.
p hams a = sparâ
AMg. amsi -asmi
(also
(49)
mhi).
of being
or h.
pisai
S'.
simgha
pisedi
S'.
= *pinisaii-pinasti,
siinha).
26
number
66. There are a
lengthened
M.
g.
Ahriccha,
is
middle of a compound,
in the
before certain inflections, or
words, e
where the vowel
of other cases
sometimes
by analogy with other
= sadrksa by
analogy with
taric-
cha, jariccha.
67.
As stated above every vowel
Shortening" of vowels.
followed by a double consonant must be short, so must
every vowel with anusvara and a consonant.
A vowel
is
sometimes shortened when the previous vowel
= aZâ
when the
following vowel
is
accented
is
accented: M. mamjara =war;ara, but also mamjara
alia
or
(S'majjiira).
Maharastrl follows rather the Vedic, and S'aura-
Note.
The
seni the classical Sanskrit accent.
difference often
accounts for divergences between Marathi and Hindi.

68.
long vowel before a single consonant

the consonant being doubled,
if
is
often shortened,
the word
was
originally
accented on the la>t syllable.
evvam = emw, j6vvana = ?/aMuawd,
tella
= /ai7, pemma
= premdn.
Note
Final vowels are shortened before enclitics with
I.
double consonants,
Note
e.g.
8'aurasenl jeva
2.
after a short
vowel
e.g. ajjassa
after a shortened
jevva
Note
3.
Sri
Note
4.
In M. the
ened
69.
= ita
ido
Vowel
M. thia mhi = sthitds)iii

jewa = eva becomes jjeva jjewa
iiewa, = dryasyaiva
6: bhuniie
or
jjevva = 6//m//amet'fl,
eva.
becomes
Siri.
final
a of adverbs
is
very often short-
iixhd = yatJia.
for vowel.
a hecoiiicK
Examples.
in syllables preceding tlie accent.
in M. than
S'.
or Mg.)
M. niajjhinia but
M. kuTma but
S'.
S'.
pikka = /)aA-ua
(S'.
majjhania ^madhyama,
kii(.\iima,
= katania.
(Coaimonei
also pakka).
INTRODUCTION 10 I'RAKKIT,
27
Hindi has pakka, Marathi pika.]
[Note.
a becomes u
moner
with labials: pnloedi
(i)
M. AMg. than in
in
stems in a especially -jua
(ii)
a becomes
= pralokayati
(com-
S'.).
S'd.VY annm
= sarvapia.
(sometimes) after the accent; M. jampimo =
jdlpamaJi
the
before
vitastimatra
vihatthimitta =
AMg.
accent:
In this case
generally becomes
metta-
e.
= midtra-.
70.
becomes u
=
i
becomes
an u follows: M. ucc\\xi= iksu, AMg. usu
before
= grr%a
g"ejjha
I
if
isu.
becomes
consonant: etthsi
double
(from* gijjha, from* grhya for
in idr&a etc., or
it
remains
S'.
= ittha
graliya).
erisa, generally
idisa, so kerisa, kidisa.
{Note,
71.
erisa is really
u becomes a in the
ga,r\i^
n.
u becomes
i.
from Vedic aya +
first
dr&,'\
when the second contains
syllable
= guruka, mSiVila, = mukula.

purisa = pitrMsa (Mg. puliâ).
u becomes 6 before a double consonant.

puskara, p6ttliaa = ^MSâA;a
(cf.
S'.
pokkara =
Hindi pothi), moggara
= mudgara, M. gdccha = gMCcAa.

u becomes 6 or o before double consonant, or where a
compound consonant has been simplified. M. m6lla =
raulya, thora from *thorra = 5f^Mra, so tambola = fambula [tambula
u
72.
becomes
*tambulla *tambolla tambola].

in
(i)
unaccented syllables: 'M.'xnk
end,
viana = vedana diara = devard.

,
(ii)
(iii)
before double consonants

(dialect) after a long
S'.
vowel
Mittea = Maitreya.
S'.
Mg. edina = eêna
(also edena).
/3.
o becomes u
for
(i)
annonna
(ii)
before
(
double consonants
M. annunna
Q\)anyonya.
In Apabhraiiisa where o comes from ah, as in the
Nom.
Sing, of
nouns
in
e.g. \ou
= lokah,
siliu
28
= simhah.
/
V
74.
[This survives in Siudhi, v.g. candu
candru = " moon."]
or
Omission of Vowels. Examples.

AMg posaha = upavasathd, S'. vatthida =
v&nna.
= aranya{" Rann "
api after anusvara becomes
\y
itiîter anusvara
S'.
Mg. idanim
danim.
becomes
in
its
pi, after
ti,
ava<ithita,
Kach).
of
vowels
vi.
after vowels tti.
weaker sense "then"
becomes
= pitrsvasrkd from *piusasia.

ip6ppha]i = pugaphali k.h\x=^khalu.
M.
-piusaia,
M.
S'.
majjhanna = madhydmdina,
8'.
Mg. dhida = duhiid {*dv-
hltd)
Note.
Only unaccented vowels are omitted.
Such omis-
sion therefore sometimes throws light on the accentua-
ttion of a word.
.
Samprasarana. The reduction of ya to i and of va to n

is
more frequent than in Sanskrit. Aya and ava
become e and o. S'. tiriccha. = *tiryaksa from tiryak,
tuTida. = tvariia, "k&dhedn = kathayatu odSiTa. = avatdra
,
nomai,\iai.
= navamdlikd
M.
lona
= /at;a7/a
S'.
bhodi
bhavati.
76. Epenthesis.
pera,i\ta,
-aria
from
^paryanta,
accharia as
in
-(trya
M.
S'.),
M.
sometimes becomes
acchera = aicarr/a
kera. = kdrya.
S'.
(but
-erOf
also
tumhakera,
amhakera.
[Nole.
From
a derivative keraka was derived the Old
Hindi and Old Gujarati kero keri used to form a genitive.
Beames disputed the derivation
kdrya, vide B.
thani -ro
keraka.]
-ri,
ii.
286.
etc.,
Generally H. ka,
and
of
keraka from
ki, etc.,
RSjas-
Bengali -er are derived from
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRfT.
CHAPTER
29
VII.
SANDHI.
Consonants.
A.
77,
As Prakrit does not allow
final
consonants
of the complications of Sanskrit external
29)
most
sandhi dis-
appear.
Sometimes however the

is
as
AMg
jad
Sitthi
= sad
an
= yad
78.
\^c3i,ê
This form
e.g.
= ekaikamfi.
Thus
ekkam-ekke.
comes to be used as a sandhi consonant,
angammi = a%e'nê,
icchase,
remains.
as in M. ekkam-ekkani
then declined,
is
= yad
AMg. chacceva = sad eva chap
api.
m sometimes survives
i}
Mg. yad
asti.
enclitic
R in dur and nir regularly

=
duragada (^Mmgra/a, nirantara.
pi
were revived before a vowel
it
or before
S'.
consonant, usuall}' dropped,
final
e.g.
aiiga-m-
AMg. gona-m-ai = gravac?a?/o,
esa-
m-aggI = eso'g'm^.
More
AM.g.
%
79.
and
rarely y
d\\\-x
In compounds the
final
usually assimilated
second
member
\ V
are used as sandhi consonants.
Skt\:\\\i = dhig
'
astu.
consonant of the
to
the
first
member
is
consonant of the
initial
but sometimes the two are treated as
separate words.
M. sarisamkula = sanVsamA;M?a, duIaha = c?MrZa6â (usually

dullaha), dnsaho.
= duhsaha
B.
80. Prakrit
S'.
is
(usually
duasahaor
Vowels.
tolerant of hiatus
member
but in compounds the
of the first
initial
vowel of the second, as in Sanskrit.
= ^/eâ/ia?a,
is
final
usually combined with the
vowel
kilesanala
diisaha).
jammantare = /anmaritore
before two consonants) raesi = raa +
isi
= rdjarsi.
(a
30
Sometimes however they are not combined. S". puaariha

= pujdrha, vasantussava-uvaana = vasantotsavopayana.
81.
the second
If
member
compound begins with
of a
before a double consonant, or with
i,
u the
or u
final a or
member is dropped.
= gajendraS'. n^trinda. = nare)iclra manda-marud'u vvellida = manda-marutodvellita, mah'usava = wahofsa-
of the first
M.
gsbinda.
vasantusava.
Sometimes when the second member begins
Exception.
va,
u followed by a single consonant, the

so regularly
S',
mantharoru
combined
with a prefix 8'. pekkhadi, M. pecchai, Mg. pcskadi =
Hiatus between ! or u and a dissimilar vowel
preksate.
with long
vowels
t,
are
remains
82.
Hiatus caused by dropping iniervocal consonants renmins.

Exceptions,
(i)
paikka for
= paddlika
d followed by
a,
(ii)
Similar vowels are sometimes contracted
îxii\kka,
t, i
'
foot-soldier.'
or u, u, thera for thaira
sthavira.
pomma
M.
8'.
paiima = parfma, mora. = mayiira
maiira), M. moha,
= may uk ha
M.
In compounds.
(iii)
(also
a,ndhATisi,
(also
mauha).
= andJMkdrita. D
cammaraa = carma&araA"a. AMg. lohara = /o/mkdra.

denla = devakula, Mg. ]au]ix = rdjaknla.
83.
Between loords in a sentence hiatus remains.

Exceptions,
initial
S'.
(ii)
(iii)
(i)
vowel,
Na
('*not")
natthi
is
often
combined
= ndsti, naham = wa
nadidnr a = 7idtidura, ncccha,di = na

In 8aur. Mg. nu + etad
Initial
a after
Sanskrit.
e,
is
-i-
witli
an
+ aham
icchafi.
make one word nedam.

sometimes dropped,
ac?
in
CHAPTER
31
VII r.
DECLENSION.
84.
Prakrit declensions differ from those of Sanskrit mainly
through
(a)
the working of the phonetic rules given
above and some others affecting particular inflections,

(6) the simplification effected hy transferring words
from one declension to another,
i.v.
by analogy.
There
are a few cases where tlie Prakrits preserve old endings

or
is
methods not found in Sanskrit. There is little that

new. On the whole Prakrit Grammar represents the
gradual wearing away of the old system

the building up of a
85.
The Dual has been

merged
new
lost.
in the Genitive
The Dative
is
almost entirely
(Dat. sing of a-stems occurs in
The general phonetic rules rule out the consoDanthough some traces of it remain.
M.)
tal declension,
The great majority
86.
of
nouns are declined as
1.
Masculine or Neuter stems in
a.
2.
Masculine or Neuter stems in
3.
Feminine stems \na,
Declension of
Masc
ratlier tlian
one.
i.l,
u,u.
stems. Normal.
" son "
putta = pM^m
or u.
INTRODUCTION TO PEAK KIT.
32
Plural
Note,
Nom.
putta
putta
Ace.
putte
putta or putte
Instr.
puttphim
Abl.
(puttehim-to)
Gen.
puttanain
Loc.
puttesu(ni)
puttado puttao,
(i)
ending
this ablatival
-ias
"j
jputtana(in)
puttesu(m).
abl.
9,mg.
= *j)utratas.
a short vowel
though when used adverbially
it
is
Before
lengthened,
can keep the short
e.g. Sioaa,doa(jraiah, \di,mnia,do=^janmatah.
vowel,
(ii)
puttehi(m)
(various)
',
putte ace. plur. by analogy with pronouns tumhe,
ime, etc.
(iii)
puttehim
= *pMf7'e6î^
instr. plur.
(as in the
Kgveda)
(29).
(iv)
abl. plur. is rarely
found except in AMg.
quoted = Instr. plur. +

(v) ^\xt\.Sbmm\
The form
tas.
*'putrasmin.
pronora. declension.
87. Neut: phala, "fruit."
This
Nom.
88.
declined like putta except
is
Ace. Sing, phalain
Declension of
stems, Normal.
di.ggi=agni, "fire."
Masc.
Singular
Plural
N. Ace. Plural phalaim.
Nom.
aggi.
Ace.
aggii]^-
Instr
aggina.
Abl.
Not common. Various forms.
Gen.
aggino or
Loe.
aggimmi.
Nom.
aggio or aggino (M. aggino or aggi).
Aec.
aggino.
in
M. aggissa.
Instr.
aggihim (M.
Gen.
agglnani (M. or aggina).
Loc.
agglsu(m).
agglhi).
Note,
33
Gen. Sing, aggino like the Neuter in Sanskrit
(i)
borrowed from the declension of tw-stems
is
aggissa
by
analogy with puttassa.

(ii)
Loc. Sing, aggimmi compare puttammi.
Nom.
(iii)
Ace. Plural aggino from m-stems aggio com-
pare the Feminines in
(v)
plural -io
The vowel
aggihim Instr. Plur.
before the endings -hi him,
anusvara
Neut. dahi
This
90.
as.
The
final
these forms by
all
= c?arf;ii, "curd."
dahim
Ace. Sing,
Instr.
= vdyu
or dahi.
Plur.
dahiim.
stems.
Nom. vaii, Ace. vaum,

vauna,Gen. vauno (orinM. vaussa),IiOC. vaummi.
Ya,\i
Plur.
always lengthened
otlier dialects.
Closely parallel are the
Thus
is
puttehim.
declined like aggi except
is
Nom.
cf.
optionally omitted in
is
M. and some
{89.
=i
M. aggi by analogy with putta from putta.
(iv)
(wind) has Sing.
Nom. vauno
M. vau), Ace. vauno, Instr.
(or in
vaiihi(m), Gen. vauna(m), Loc. vaiisu(m).
Neuter.
msihvL
mahu(ip).
91.
= madhu,
Plur.
'honey,' has
Feminine Declension.
The instrumental,
locative smgular have

i,
ii
Ace. Sing.
fallen
together.
genitive and
Nouns
in a,
are exactly parallel.
Singular:
Nom. mala
malam
Ace.
Abl.
malado
(M. malao)
I.
G. Loc.
Voc.
Plural:
Nom.
mahuim.
Nom.
devi
vahil, 'bride.'
devini
vahum.
devido
vahiido.
(M. devio)
malae
devie
male
devi
(M. vahiio).
vahue.
vahu.
maiao mala devio
vahuo.
Instr.
malahi(m)
vahuhi(m).
Abl.
(malahimto devihimto vahuhimto).
Ace.
de\ Ihi(m)
Gen.
malana(m)
devrna(in)
vahiina(m).
Loc.
mala8u(in)
devisu(m)
vahusu(m).
34
Note
ado-ao from the masculine declen-
Abl. Sing,
1.
Sauraseni also uses
sion.
2.
I.
3.
Nom.
Veda and Brahmanas
Abl. in Yajur
=1
*-
stems,
Nom. Sing, in Mg. and AMg. ends in e.

AMg. pur'ise = purusah in Apabhrainâ
(i)
puliSe.
Nom. Ace.
(ii)
Sing, in u.
AMg. has
a Dat. Sing, in ae (from fem. decl.)
= devatvaya.
devattae
(iii)
etc.
ah).
Normal Declensions.
92. Variants in the
Mg.
by analogy with devio,
Plural -ao
{10
ae.
G. Loo. Sing, -ae from Skt -ayai used for Gen.
AMg. becomes
Abl. Sing, -do in M.
dii
metri causa
rannau = aranydt.
M. AMg. have also a form

va&dt, gha,vsi
Common
Rarer
(iv)
in
is
M.
from
in a
vasa =
-at:
grhdt.
is
Abl. Sing, in hi
-himto
Gen. Sing. Mg. has
mulahi, diirahi.
hia,ahim-to = hrdaydt.
Ma
ox
ha.
CaludattaSâ or
Caludattaha.
(v)
In M. forms in
Loc. Sing.
together
-e
gaammi paose = g'aê
In AMg. the commonest form

47).
Some
-ammi often stand
logainsi
dialects
pradose.
is in
msi
= 5min
= loke.
have Loc.
in -him.
Mg. pavaha-
nahim = pravahane.
(vi)
M. dim
Neut. Plur
-ai -ai.
Forma
in
dni also
occur in AMg. and Sauraseni.

Dialectic also d (as in Veda)
S'.
midhuna, jana-
vatta = ydnapdtrdni.
jvii)
Ace
Masc
Plur.
qunnn,
Dialectic
A.Mg. asa
blirainiâ.)
d = dn M. guna
= a^van (common
in
Apa-
93.
and
(i)
35
stems.
Examples.
Abl.Sing.
kucchlo
M.\ia,h\ii
= udadheh,AMg.
kammaggino =
JM.
kukseh,
kar-
mdfjneh.
(ii)
In AMg. the commonest form
Loc. Sing.
= A;M^saM
msi: kucchimsi
a,ihi
(iii)
Nom.
in
in
is
Apabhramâ
hi:
= adau.
Plural.
Ay[g.Tisa,o
= rsayah,sa.ha,vo = sadha= a^.//i, also acchini,
vah, (Neuter) M. acchrini
AMg. mamsuim-or
(iv)
Masculines in
ina.msn ni
= s/na^runi.
and u shorten these and

i and u.
are
declined like nouns in

94,
Feminine stems.
(i)
1.
(ii)
stems.
G.L. Sing, -ae
form
in -aa is
but occurs as
(iii)
S'.
= asyd
(iv)
95. I,
ai.
forbidden by some grammarians:

in
M.
]6nha,si
Mg. also have
= jifotsnaya.
is in
-de.
-a
>
S'.
Mg.
imae maa-tanhiae
mrgntrsnikdydh.
N. Ace. Plur. sometimes

S'.
shortened metri causa to
Commonest form
Abl. Sing.
-ado.
is
puijjanta devada
in
a: M. reha
= pS;?/amana
= reA;Mfe.
devatdh.
stems.
For
(i)
(ii)
S'.
-le
M. often has
d\tXhiB,
= distyd
ta.
preserves the older form of the
Instr.
Nom.
(iii)
96.
Ace. Plur. to uo become lu uu, metri causa.
Stems derived from Skt.
between relations and agents
Nom.
Sanskrit.
in
f)
pii-,
Nom.
Ace. Sing, and
or a
is
Tlie distinction
maintained.
In the
Plural Prakrit follows the
Otherwise the stems become stems in u (or
now stem
or pia ra-
= hharir.
stems.
is
= pj7r-
made from
;
bhattu
the Accusative: piu-,

bhatti-,
or
bhattara-
36
bhattu = feârir Relation.
97. Agent,
Singular:
Plural
bliatta
S'pida, M, pia.
Ace.
hhdttdram
pidaram,
Ins.
bhattuna
piduna, M. piuna.
Gen.
bhattuno
piduno, M. piuno.
Log.
S'.
Nom.
bhattdro
S'.
98.
ting
piaro.
pidaro or pidare piaro or piuno.

piuhini.
Gen.
bhattarana(iii)
piunam.
Loc.
bhattaresu
piiisu(m).
=" lord "
beeomes
an
Ace. bliatta ram.
mdtr Nom.
AN stems.
M.
pidaro,
bhattdrehim
M. maa.
M. maaram.
Inst.
maae.
S'.
Nom.
madarani.
S'.
madae.
mau or maara
These are mostly reduced
N = middling
i-stem.,
Inst, bhattina.
Mg. mada.
S*.
Ace.
Can be declined as maa mai
piaram.
bhattdre
bhatta.
2.
M.
Ins.
6/iar/r
1.
= pt7f.
Nom.
Ace.
Note.
piu
A stems by
to
omit-
base before pada endings and in
stem
is
pemma = preman Nom.
Ace.
pemmam
compounds), or a new
formed from the strong
base.
So
I.
pemmena;
pemmassa; i/)c. pemme (M pemmammi);

Nom. Aec. p6mmaini Gen. pemmanani.
G.
Plur.
Muddha
or
or
muddhano = mUrrf/m.
(the Nom.
muddhaiienam
only
relic of
sion
however
is
Declension of raa
Singular:
Nom.
Ace.
Ins.
AAIg. Instr.
Sinsr. in
the old declension).
common words
90.
The
is
muddhena
often the
old -an declen-
partially preserved, especially in the
rajan and atman.
= ra;an.
raa = raya.
raanam = rdjdnam.
ranna = m/na (36)
Svarabhakti vowel
or
i).
raina
(with
ra n no
(raimmi raammi
Voc.
T&sim
Nom.
Plural:
= rdjnah
Gen.
Log.
or raino.
rae).
= rdjan.
(Ace), raa no
= m/anai^.
raihim
Ins.
37
(as
from an I stem; from
if
raina).
rainam.
Gen.
In Compounds rda does not always follow the
Note.
declension.
msiha,Ta.o
S'.
= mahdrdjak
rdjah, Va,ccha,va,o= Vatsara j ah,
]ua,VRO
= yuva-
but AMg. devaraya =
devardjah.
S'.
maharaam
(Ace.),
maharaena
(Ins.),
maharaassa (Gen.),
but AMg. devaranna, devaranno.

100.
Atman becomes
M.
Nom. appa
Ace. appanam
atta- or appa-
Ins.
appana
attanaam = * afmawaâm
appano
AMg.
also declines
-IN
or attano
attano (Mg. attanaaiâ).
Nom. appo
in
the
declension.
stems are also formed; appano, attano, and in
Compounds
101.
atta.
Gen.
New A
( 366).
Mg.
S'.
stems.
partly
attana-, appana-.
These partly retain the Sanskrit method, and
become
stems.
As the
stems in Prakrit
have borrowed from the -IN declension the difference

is
apparent only in a few forms.
Nom.
Sing.
]idX\,\n.
(occasionally
often
S'.
= hasti,
but Ace. hatthim = fea5^mam
has. Ace.
have Gen. in
-issa,
in -inam).
otherwise
Jain Prakrits
it
is
regularly
-ino.
102,
-AT
stems.
Stems
manta, vanta.
in -at, -mat, -vat
form ^-sterns anta,
38
Examples.
karento = A;urt7an,puloanto = pralokayan,
S'.
karentena-A;wr?'a<a,
mahantassa = wiaâfa^, gacchante-
him = gacchadbhih.
Ardha-Ma'jjadhi often
103, Exceptions.
retains
the old de-
mahao = mahatah.
bhavat and bhagavat.
Nom.
bhavam
bhaavam
Ace.
bhavantam
bhaavantani
Ins. M. bhavaa. S' bhavada
M. bhaavaa. S'. bhaavada
Gen. ,, bhavao. S'. bhavado
S'. bhaavado.
,, bhaavao.
clension,
e.g.
knvvAvn = lcurvan,
Other dialects do so
104.
Stems in
sa joi
Nouns
-S.
Examples.
S.
in -as -is -us
form stems
There are some traces
-i
-u.
of the old declension.
Pururava (Nom), Pururavasam

(Loc
in -a
Pururavassa, dlha.um = dirghai/usam, AMg.
= sajyotisam.
Exceptions.
S'.
in
Old Instrumentals are
manasa, sahasa,
t&vsiaa,
(Ace), Puriiravasi
common
= tapasd,
AMg. JM.
in
teyasa,
= tejasd,
cak-
khnsa, = caksusd.
105.
Other exceptions or irregular forms consisting generally

forms subjected to phonetic changes, occur
of the old
sporadically, and cannot be reduced to rules.

106.
Pronouns.
pronouns
great variety of forms
of the first
The following
is
found for the
and second persons.
table gives only the
commonest
Plural
Noni.
39
40
S
108.
'Srd
Person,
sa-
41
111. Pronominal adjectives are similarly declined.
Examples-
a,ima,3sim
S'.
= anyasmin
= toa-
parassim = para5mm,
AMg. savvesim = sarve-
rasmin, avarassirn
= aparasmtw,
anne = ant/an.
savvanani
S'.
kadarassira
sdm.
112. Declension of Numerals.
1.
2.
ekka (AMg. ega) follows the pronominal declenLog. Sing. S'. ekkassim Mg. ekkasîm
sion.
M. ekkammi AMg. egaipsi or egammi. Plur.

ekke AMg. ege.
do = dvau) duve (from dve Neut. Dual.) also
Neuter (by analogy with tinni = ^nwt)) donni
{
All are used without reference to gen-
dunni.
der.
S'.
donni kumarIo =
(Zi'e
kumaryau.
Ins.
dohi(m), Gen. donha(m), Loc. dosu.

3.
tinni
= <nt, AMg.
ta,o
= trayah
tinction of genders).
(used without dis-
Gen. tinh(am)-
Ins. tihim,
Loc. tisu.
4.
cattari
is
the
commonest form.
Nom. Masc. and
caiiro
Cattaro from the
from the Ace. occur and
are used for either case.
caiihi(m), Gen.
Ins.
caunha(tp), Loc. caiisu.

5.
6.
panca I. pancahi(m), G. pancanha(m), L. paficasu.

cha I. chahirn, G. chanha(m), L. chasu, and so on
up to 18.
19 to 58 are neuters in -am or feminines in -a in the
Nom
e.g.
visae
other cases mostly like feminine singular,
20
Nom:
59-99 are neuters in

100.
S'.
visain
(also Nora, visai

irn
visa Ace.
visam I.G.L.
and vTsaim).
or feminines in
i.
sada M. saa and 1000, sahassa are neuters and

declined according to the
declension.
42
CHAPTER
IX.
CONJUGATION.
113. The Prakrit Verb has undergone greater changes than
The general phonetic laws have naturally

disintegrated the consonantal conjugation, and by forthe Noun.
bidding
final
consonants have tended to
forms ambiguous.
make
the old
There has been the same tendency,
as in the case of declension, to reduce
all
verba to one
This process had not gone so far in the old
type.
Prakrits such as Pali, whereas by the Late Prakrit or
Apabhramâ period only one conjugation remained,

a dwindling number of "irregularities," i.e.
with
isolated survivals of tlie older system.
The Dual Number

Attnanepada Voice has almost gone;
apart from some scattered remnants all the wealth of
Moreover fewer forms were used.

disappears: the
Perfects, Imperfects and Aorists has been lost, and

the past tense
is
expressed by a participle with, or
Thus
without, an auxiliary verb.

there remain only:
Optative,
acid
ciples, Infinitive
(i)
system
Imperative,
and Passive:
Future: Active
Parti-
and Gerund.
In place of the old
normal
of tlie old
Present Indicative,
Ten classes
of
Verbs only two are
the A-class including the great majority of verbs
and the Passive,

(ii)
the E-class (with

all
derived from
axja)
including
Causatives, most Denominatives and some
simple verbs.
The
inflections of the
two
classes are the same.
{Normal Conjugation)
114. Present Indicative.
A -Class.
Singular:
= pfcchaini
1.
p\icchB.Wi\
2.
pucchasi
S'. pucchadi
3.
M. pucchai
Plural:
4S
2.
pucchamo
M. pucchaha
S'. pucchadha
3.
pucchanti.
1.
E-Class.
M.
Singular:
Plural:
Note
1.
kadhemi
kahemi = kathaydmi
2.
kadhesi
kahesi
3.
kadhedi
kahei
1.
kadhemo
kahemo
2.
kadliedha
kaheha
3.
kadhenti
kahenti.
AMg.
1.
Maga-
follows M. in pucchai, pucchaha.
dhl has the same endings as Saur. puscadi, pu^cadha,
and
Note
of course puscadi.
ApabhramSa
2.
Sing.
1.
Plur.
1.
pucchau,
2.
pucchahu,
further
pucchai.
3.
From
pucchahi.
3.
not a long step to the modern forms,
is
Hindi.
pucche.
much
travelled
pucchasi or pucchahi,
2.
pucchahu,
this stage it
e.g.
has
Sing.
2 ,p^. Y^ <^ f
1.
pucchu,
^C
2-3.
pucche.
Plur.
115. Atmanepadam.
In SaurasenI this
and
in
is
rare, occurring occasionally in verse,
in stock expressions.
jane,
2.
janase,
occurred).
Examples.
3.
Plur.
M.
S'.
= labke, icche,
Gha,e = preksate
It is
The endings
M. AMg. JM.
janae
3.
would have janade
(S'.
jane,
M.
ma,nne = many e
tlrae
= tiryate
iic a,ie
S'.
= icchase M.
,
(passive).
116. Imperative.
Singular
1.
if
it
janante.
M. janase, Mg.
,
somewhat commoner
shown in Sing. 1.
are
(pucchamu)
2.
puccha, kahehi, pucchasu, kahesu.
3.
S'.
pucchadu
M. pucchau.
lahe
pec-
44
Plural
Note
pucchamha.
1.
S'.
3.
pucchantu.
By
1.
rule hi
AMg.
Sing.
kahemha.
pucchadba
2.
M. pucchaha
added to a long vowel
is
= Indie.)
kahentu.
generally, M. Mg. sometimes
in the
add
2nd
it to a-
a.
AMg. gacchahi (S' gaccha)
The ending -su has been explained as a survival
the Skt. Atmanepada ending -sva.
Pischel ( 467)
stems lengthening the

Note
of
2.
explained
as a product of analogy
it
Indie, pucchadi
pucchanti: Imperat, pucchadu, pucchantu.

pucchasi, Imperat. pucchasu.
Singular,
pucchami
Indie,
This -dmu however
is
pucchdmu.
Imperat.
person
It
is
Magadhi often have the form
though otherwise they rarely use the Atmane-
karesu^^wrw, anesu = a/iai/a, kadhe8U =

As however Pali derives -ssu from sva, and
padam.
S'.
kathaya.
Parasmaipada stems
uses this also with
Grammar,
Pali
1st
found only in grammars.
true that Sauraseni and

in -su
..Indie,
So also the
107), this
p.
(E. Miiller,
probably
is
though analogy may have aided
its
its
origin,
adoption in the
active voice.
Note
3.
ing
to
1st Plur.
Pischel
-mha = 5ma is from the Aorist accordwho compares Vedic jesma

( 470),
desma (Whitney 894

117.
This
Optative.
is
c.).
common in AMg.
JM., rarer in M. and
exceptional in the other dialects
There are two types
(i)
the usual form in
JM. derived from the Opt.

= ydm, -yah, -ydt, etc.
e.g..
Singular
Plural
of
M, AMg.
the 2nd conjugation.
1.
vattejja, (vattejjami, analogy with Indie.)
2.
vattejjasi (ahi)
vattejja.
1.
vattSjjaraa.
2.
vattSjjaha
3.
vattejja
(''asu).
3rd Sing.
'
(ii)
45
the only form in Sauraseni, also found in the others
derived from
-eyam, -eh
Singular
Note.
the
Opt.
the
of
1st
conjugation,
-et.
1,
vatteam
2.
vatte.
3.
vatte also used
(vatte analogy witli 2, 3, persons).
for 3rd Plural.
The short e in -ejja seems to be for ^ ( 72). So

becomes AMg. janijja, janejja, but doubtless
prevalence is partly due to the influence of the 1st
janiydt
its
conjugation.
118. Future,
from
(-issa-
Singular
Plural
pucchissaip, AMg. pucchisaami.
2.
pucchissasi (M. AMg. pucchihisi).
3.
pucchissadvM
I.
pucchissamo.
2.
pucchissadha, M. pucchissaha.
3.
pucchissanti (AMg. pucchihinti).
The forms
Note.
-isya-)
1.
pucchissai (or pucchihii).
in ihi arose
The 3rd
diphthongs or long vowels.

contracts
to
from forms in hi after

Sing, pucchihii
The
pucchiln as the metre requires.
grammarians give
also 1st Singular in ihdmi, ihimi:
(Apabhraima has
-ihimo, 2nd Plural
\iek.\i\\\\\'\va\
1st
passive either
(i)
corresponds to
the Sanskrit form in -ya (y being omitted in
and becoming
-;;;
la, others -ijja) to

(iii)
Plural
-ihiha ihittha.
The Prakrit
119. Passive.
= 'preksisye)
^^^ others), or adds
i^
(ii)
the root, or more
-la-
S'
Mg,
(S'.
Mg.
commonly
to
the present stem.
The endings are those of the (A-class) parasmaipada

but M. AMg. often have atmanepada endings especially
in the Present Participle.
Examples,
mai, M.
(ii)
(iii)
(i)
M.
jujjai.
dijjai, S. dijjadi
S'.
iujjsidi
vom. ^/(jam M. gamijjai,
From
gacch-
S'.
= yujyate.
-diyate.
S'.
gacchiadi.
gamiadi.
M. gam-
46
Mdharastri.
S'auraseni.
Singular
120.
1.
pucchiami
pucchijjami,
2.
pucchiasi
pucchijjasi,
3.
pucchiadi
pucchijjai,
and so on.
and so on.
Causatives.
This
hase'i
formed as
is
aya (becomes
of
hasayati.
by the addition
in Skt.
to the strong form of the
e)
After a Skt. inserts p
root,
-paya be-
comes Pkt. ve.

ni vvavedi
121.
= ntrmpai/a^t.
Prakrit extends this usage to
many
other stems, lengthening the a of the present
stem,
e.g.
pucchavedi.
The normal forms
Participles.
ing
scheme
are
shown
in the follow-
Active.
pucchanto,
Present,
pucchanta, N. pucchantani,
F.
causal, puccha\;'ento
.etc.
Future,
pucchissanto,
Perfect,
nil.
-ta, -taip.
Middle (active meaning,

Present,
pucchamano -na
Future,
pucchissamano
common
in
AMg.)
(ni), -nani.
etc.
Passive
Present.
Future.
vo
pucchianto, AMg. pucchijjamano.

("Gerundive") pucchidavvo - M; pucchiavS'.
(pucchanio).
M. pucchanijjo.
[kajjo
kdryah]
(137).
Past.
121.
S'.
pucchido, M. pucchio
Infinitive.
Sanskrit -turn becomes
The ending
stem (with
Examples,
( 124-5).
is
i).
added
(a) to
S'.
the root,
Mg. -dmn. M.
(6)
'iim.
to the present
S'pucchidum M. pucchium.
gantum,
dum = krimayitum,
S".
gacchiduiii, gamiduin,
dhixridum
= dhdrayitum,
and karidutn M. kiium = kartum.

(For Inf. in -ttae see
136.)
S'.
S*.
kame-
kadum
122.
47
Gerund.
AMg. pucchitta
M. pucchitina.
pucchia.
S'.
chiduna.
Mg. have ksidua. - krtvd
S'.
or puc-
g'adua = gatva.
has sometimes in verse the ending una-duna,
S'.
pekkhiiina, otherwise only -ia
Examples.
naia
S'.
apaniya,
oda,r\a,
(for
nltva.)
is
= *nayiya
= avatirya
e.g.
correct.
(Mg.
but avan!a =
odalia),
pekkhia,
bhavia, pavisia,
In Magadhi
Examples,
AMg.
tlie form in -una is the commonest.

hauna, gantiana, hasiuna, kauna.
prefers
form in
tlie
ttd
(to,
after a
bhavitta, ganta, hasitta, karitta, also ttdnam
nasal)
bhavit-
tanara.
123.
Irregular Verbs.
The normal or regular conjugation being as given above,
there
numerous
are also
are of two kinds;

their formation,
''
(a) tliose
trregular^^ forms.
These
that agree with Sanskrit in
only undergoing phonetic changes
by both Sanskrit and

Prakrit standards. These latter, wluch are not very
numerous, may be due to analogy, or to the survival
(&)
of
those that
forms used
are
in
irregular
the ancient spoken language, but not
recognised by classical Sanskrit.
124.
large
number
of
"irregular" verbs in Prakrit
from the normal conjugation only

ciple
Passive.
It
was natural
in the
tliat
differ
Past Partiolder
forms
should be preserved in the case of this participle
Some words
like gafah, krtah
were in such constant
use, that their phonetic equivalents, e.g. gado, gao,
kido, kao, were hkely to hold their
own
against new
forms suggested by analogy such as *gacchido, karido.
Moreover
width
literal
in
many
cases this participle has acquired a
meaning as an adjective over and above its

meaning as a participle. Words, e.g. like snig-
of
dha, mugdha,
Buddha
are not necessarily thought of
48
as parts of verbs, though their derivation
The degree
to
vailed, or older forms survived (or
from Sanskrit) varies with

ent writers.
is clear.
which normal analogous forms
It is
pre-
were introduced'
different dialects
and
differ-
not a matter of precise rule, nor
would an extensive list of occasional exceptions be of

much value. There are however a number of forms
of more frequent occurrence, with which the student
should be familiar from the outset
125.
Past Participles Passive.
( 125).
khimia
49
50
bhutta
INTRODUfTION TO PRAKRIT.
52
126.
Irregularities in Present Indicative.
Regular or Normal Indicativês are of the type pucchadi
kadhedi (114) and
or
are either
the phonetic
(a)
equivalents of Sanskrit Indicatives of the 1st Conjuga-
from roots in the 2nd Conjugation, equivawhat Sanskrit would most naturally have had,
if they had been included in the
1st Conjugation.
Thus we may class as regular such forms as (a) gaction, or (6)
lents of
chadi, icchadi, siiicadi, muncadi, maradi, suraaradi

pivadi, phusadi, kuppadi, naccadi, kadhedi, takkedi,
cintedi, (6) hanadi (y/han) sasadi {-y^vas).
Irregular
'
forms comprise
type, e.g. thai;
nasalised roots; (v) addition of
(iii)
(vi)
other
survivals
n original or by
Skt. conjugation
of
of
Sing, in di (S. adi) arises (a)
Apa. k\mi = kha:SL'i = khddati
tion.
form
in Skt.
vaadi),M.
(S.
h\mdi
class,
anomalies.
Type with 3rd
(i)
forms diverging from Skt. types in a
karedi
(iv)
(vii)
127.
forms not of the normal
e.g.
analogy
(i)
verbs attracted into the
(ii)
bhdti,
2nd
Tp
M.
va,i
= vibhdti;
{S.
but also vaai
paclihaadi), S.
by analogy M.
(c)
tisthati (S. citthadi)
roots ending in a.
contrac-
by survival
(b)
= vnti
SidihM = pratibhdti
vihsidi
thM = * sthdtiiov
all
class.
by
and so with
dhai or dhaai, gai, jhai
Epic dhydti).
Other contracted forms are S. bhodi
bhavati,
nedi =
nayati,
(
v^
da to give has demi desi dedi
dedi
128.
(ii)
is
from *ddyati,
Many
cf. S.
denti.
Fut. daissani.
Examples. Karedi
from
causal
class
(10th class
= Karoti)
(distinguish
verbs are attracted to the
in Skt.).
Absol. daia.
muncedi (causal
karedi =^*aral/a/^),
moavedi) hasedi, sumaredi cinedi sunedi, bhanedi

,
dhuvedi,
etc.
129.
(iii)
ravai (1st class), ruvai (6th) and rovai
tias
*M
v/
Inf. roviura.
M.
y/ dhau.
(S.
has forms from
AMg.
dhuvaii.
bhu has M. hoi huvai.
v/
53
riid.
homi hosi bhodi.
S.
bhaveam bhave. Infin bhavidum.

ruccadi = * ntc?/afe (transferred to 4th
130.
(iv)
From
Opt.
(also roadi
(^Z vraj), jujjadi
class)
Mg. loadi) similarly laggadi, vajjadi
^yujyati
rodiduin).
dliovai dhovei S. dhoadi.
(Epic yunjati).
chid
come chindai chindadi. This is natural

was nasalised in the Sanskrit Present.
as the root
Bhin-
Similarly with other roots of the 7th class.

dai, bhanjai, bhunjadi.
The
[^
nasal in rambhai
rabh)
also familiar in Skt.
is
(Epic rambhati).
derivatives.
muncadi (M. muiicai)
is
regular, but
M. has
muasi
also
= *mucasi.
131. (v)
is
preserved in cinai S. cinedi {Skt. cinoti)
kunai
(Vedic krnoti), sunedi (M. sunai), janaii S. janadi,
na anadi, kina>i = knndti, gen\ia,di =^grhnati, S. sakkanomi sakkunomi = âknomi, dhunai (S. dhoadi,
Pali dhovati) by analogy in jinai (8. jaadi) thunai
:
{x/ stu).
132.
"to go" has emi
(vi) ^/i
be. .mhi
{Note.
Atthi the only
(M.
esi edi
ei)
enti: ^ as
mha (M. mho) ttha santi.

common non-enclitic form
to
is
used
all
^/ bhl.
bhanadi as
if
nedi. sunadi
v/ svap
from bha-na-mi (9th
= sunedi
becomes suv,
as
if
class) also bha-
in 9th class,
lience suai
and (by analogy with
ruai rovai) sovai S. sovadi.

133.
Survivals of other conjugational forms.
Imperfect,
asi
= a5?<
used f or
all
persons of both num"^
bers.
\^
'
numbers and persons).

M. bihei (S. bhaadi).
with
(vii)
si atthi,
5-1
AMg. siya = sydt, kuj ja = kurydt, buya = bruydt,
Optative.
sakka = Vedic &akyat (Pischel

Precative M.
AMg.
Aorist.
akariipsu
134.
= aHrsl/i
AMg.
or akdrsit.
d6jja = d?/a/.
Plural
-msw
the Aorist in Pali).
(cf.
AMg. ahu- dhuJi.
Perfect.
akasi
465),
hojja = 6/m?/a<.
AMg.
Plural aharnsu.
Irregular Futures.
Futures in -issadi
(or
M.
ihii)
are normally formed from
the Present base: pucchissain, kadhissaip, M. pucchi-
ham kaheham
They
118).
are also
M.
the root as in Sanskrit.
ne\\\\
formed from
= nesyati,
but
S.
naissadi, S. gamis.sadi.
From
^ bhu various present bases are used to
future.
S.
form the
bhavissam, huvissam, Mg. huvi^âni M.
hokii hossam.
v^ Sthd M. thahii (pres. thai).
S.
citthissadi (pres.
Other forms represent the Sanskrit
thadi).
especially in
M.
AMg
so dacchani
dacchisi,3.s.dacchii 3pl.dacchinti),
cit-
sydmi
= rf;'ai'si/awt, (2. s.
mSccham {y/ muc)
veccharp (y/ vid), rocchani (v^ rud) voccham (^Z vac).
S.
daccham and the rest are not used in S. Mg.

pekkhissam (M. pgcchissam) rodissam, vedissam.
Causatives and others in E- class form Futures (a) as in
Sanskrit (omitting intervocal y). S. kadhaissam moavaissasi
niattaissadi
= nivartayis-
M. AMg. from the e-stem vattehami
yati (b)
,
= * mocdpayisyasi
= vartoyis-
= e. M. kahissam, S. kadhissam,
M. puloissani = pro/oA;a?/a?/isyami S. takkissadi = /ar/ra?/-
ydmi
(c)
i'syati,
omitting aya
su3smssa,m -û^rusayisydmi.
Mg. mali^SaSi-
mdrayisyasi.
v/ dd has S,
daissam M. dahain,
y/ kr has S.
karissam
M. also kahaiii
J?
135.
Irregular Passives.
(a)
Many
passives
that are often
called
irregular
a.s
not being formed with the commonest ending
55
INTRODUCTION TO PBAKRrT.
-ijjai
iadi, are regular equivalents of Sanskrit
S'.
(119.
passives.
m&l- gamy ate.
(i))
iuHsidi = yujyate, gam-
e.g.
examples
Other
{ksifi, luppai {Iwp), bhajjai
dhy becomes
are:
(&/<ai),
Khippai
bajjhai (badh:
arabbhai
jjh 44), rujjhai [rudh],
rabh), gijjai {gd), khajjai (khad), labbhai
(a-
S. lab-
(Za6^), ehijjai {chid), bhijjai {hhid), bhujjai
bhadi
muccai (mwc), vuccai
(hhuj),
(vac), tirai {tr), kirai
[kr).
{h)
Others are similarly formed from obsolete roots or

e.g. vubbhai = M%af
= duhyate,\ihhha.i = lihyate,
gheppai = gr.r%ae and with wi'
modified forms of roots,

(from *vuhh), dvihhha.i
ruhhh&i = rudhrjate,
TUYv a.1 = * ruvyate
for u
(S.
(S. rodiadi),
sunladi), thuvvai {stu),
dhunij jai.
Similar are civvai
suvvai
dhuvvai
{civ.
{dhu)
(sru)
also
for ci) also cini j-
jai, S, cladi, jivvai {jiv for ji).^

(c)
adhappaiis a causative
Tpsissire
âdhapyate, so also
vidhappai.
(d)
jammai, "is born,"
is
derived from janman Pkt.
jamma; similar is the case with hammai

khammai {,' khan).
Anomalous summai {sru), cimmai {\/ ci).
{y/ Jian)
Magadhi often prefer the form from

the present base. M. labbhai, S. labbhadi, but also
lambhladi M. muccai, S. muncladi; M. suvvai, S. sum-
j\ôfg._SaurasenI and
adi, Mg. Sunladi;
bhunjiadi;
S.
M.
*karyate);
M.
S. rodiadi;
M. ruvvai.
kirai.
najjai,
S.
kariadi
S.
jdniadi;
M. bhujjai,
(AMg. kajjai =
M.
bhannai,
S.
bhaniadi
The two
Grammarians.
passives civvai jivvai are assigned to ci and ji by the

They have been explained as analogous to the forma
from roots in u or
CIV
u.
Pischel held that civvai
given in the Dhatupatha
from
jiv
{-
'please
').
(=
'
take' or
Vide Pischel, 537.
'
was a regular passive from
cover') and jivvai probably
56
INTRODIUTION" TO PRAKRIT.
136. Infinitives.
(Variations).
commonest form
Tlie
especially
mn,
derived from itum (M.

sent base,
i.e.
in
Sauraseui
haridum
dahidum
{jnd),
is
tliat
idum) added to the pre-
gacchidum, anucitthidum
duni (grah), janidum

(ksip),
S.
(stha),
genhi-
khividuni
(dah),
Causatives, karedum, dhilre-
{hr).
damaednmdansayitum, (sometimes uncontrac= nivartayitum) or by analogy with

A-stems: dharidum, maridum, kadhidum.
duip,
ted S. ni3ktta.id\im
Equivalents of Sanskrit forms in
Saur
found
in
but are commoner in M.
Ihadum
S.
-turn are also
{stha),
gantuni
(gam).
padum
(to drink),
kadum kauin
M. hhottum = bhoktum,
(kr).
datthuin
drastum, dclum {da), neuin {ni), pauni {pa) S. paduni
JM. pivium, souin {^rotum), jeutn {ji) (AMg. jiniuui),

laddhum {labh), vodhum {vah), chettum {chid), bhetturn
mottum
naum {jna). Similarly

*
ghfp-tumior grahitum)
( 19)
= *sov-tum for svaptum cf. rottuni = roûw).
{bhid),
{muc),
formed are ghettuin

sottum
v/ vac has M.
'
vottum
S. vattuni.
Ardha-Magadhi often uses the -tum form

that kauiii means krtvd.
For the
as a 2:erund, so
Infinitive this dialeer
prefers a form in ttae or ittae. citthittae (stha), gacchittac
This
(gam).
found
is
derived from a Dative Infinitive
137. Gerundives (Varieties),

(a)
a.*
in Vedic.
From
-tavya, either
(cf.
(i)
121).
with the present stem, or
(ii)
with the root (strong form),

(i)
pucchidavva, gacchidavva, hodavva
or bliavi-
( 4)
davva, anucitthidavva, dadavva, sunidawa,
jaiii-
davva, genhidavva.
(ii)
sodavva M. soavva
M. kaavva
''
'
!
Al.go
'
{iru),
ghettavva, kadavva (63)
{kr).
"
'
'
'
M. pahium. AMg. ginhinm,
JAT. jr^nhinm, 6. gJ*nhidiim."
(6)
From
M. AMg.
-niya.
D,
Mg. -ania: karania,
-anijja, S.
damsania, (from Present stem pucchania), M. karanijja, danisanijja.

(c)
AMg. vojjha = vahya

-ya. kajja ( 50) = karya.
from Present stems: gejjha {^10) *grhya from
From
present stem grha (as in Vedic
(Hemacandra)
grhe
and Apa
grhanti).'
CHAPTER
X.
CLASSIFICATION OF PRAKRITS.
The
rules
and examples given in the
last sis chapters deal
Maharastri and Saurasenl.. other languages being
mainly with
mentioned incidentally.
The
principal peculiarities
of
some
of
may now
these
be
brought together.
Magadhi.
It
is
a matter for regret that the sources of
information about this language are not more abundant, as
some ways the most
in
is
interesting of the Prakrits.
have here striking variations

accounted
it
We
in phonetics that are not easily
for.
(^ for ^) is an equation that is reflected in the

modern languages of the East of India, where people speak,
and even write of the "Sham Ved " and " Sheeta." As
for S.
S'.
^ s this law should cause
other Prakrits use only
no
diflBculty
bhavissadi
is
of S. bhavissadi, tassiin of tassim, sa of sa,
and so
on.
or
(^
for T) is
ning of a word,
more
laano =
'
'
striking,
puttassa of puttassa.
especially at the begin-
kings."
This is Pischel's derivation. However grahya would become *gajand association with the group gSnhadi ghSttum, etc. might account
jlia,
the student
easily recognised as the equivalent
for the
change of vowel a to
e.
58
puliso = S. puriso, galuda = S

i8Al}a,
= apavaritaAarira,
ia,ma\e
garuda,
Caludatta, ovalida-
^samare, nagalantala = nagrara7?-
tara.
This change
(
26)
and
for r is
in Pali (taluno
found occasionally in other Prakrits
= taruno)
found also
it is
language, where alam y/ kr replaces aram-{krnoii)

replaces nic.
it is
There are many
in the
,
Vedic
and v^
instances in other languages,
^w<^
and
often difficult to determine which was the original sound.
It is however remarkable to find an Aryan dialect without

an R sound at all. The modern dialects of Bihar and Bengal
have not replaced every r with an I. Perhaps this rule for
dramatic Magadhi
a conventional exaggeration of a
is
in
the mouths
marked
Possibly as Magadhi
tendency of the Eastern dialects.
of only low-class people,
it
is
put
represents only the
habit of a non-aryan stratum of society, which like the Chinese

coolies of to-day
may have had no
R's.
remains and replaces J (^ for^).

yadha = S. jadha (1), yanadi = ?awaî.
yanidavvam = S, janidawam, yanavada = ;/a7iajoa(fa.
ya,y&de
Dy.
= jayate.
ry. all
rj,
(jh
becomes yh.
become
(^
Magadhi has yy.
yy.
for
= jhatiti.)
Yhsitti
So that where Sauraseni hasjj,
^).
a,yySi = adya or arya (S. ajja),

avayya = avadya, mayya = madya
(dhy becomes yyh mayyhanna = majjhanna
ayyuna = ar;Mna, ka,jya. = karya (kajja 50).
:
74),
duyyana = durjana.
From
these examples
it is
clear that '^ in
Magadhi represents
a front palate fricative different from the semivowel sound

English " yes."
West
The equivalent
to express a foreign
coins of
King Azes we
of "^
was used
sound written Z
in Greek.
find the genitive Ayasa.
in
in the North-
Words
So on
spelt
with the equivalent of ^, are pronounced in some

dialects with a sound resembling Z, in zeal or zh in 'azure.'
in Bengali
'
similar sound
^=r^
is
pronounced
commonly given
ziie.
to
'
in
many
words,
e.g.
50
Ny, ny. jn. nj become nn.
punna = 2)Mwt/a
anna)
(S.
(S.
a,nnsM = anjaU
(S.
punna
keeps
Medial cch becomes
sc.
anna = an?/rt.
48).
= kanyaka.
ksLunskka.
\3inno
= rajnah
(S.
ranno
99).
fij).
("^ becomes ^.)
= gaccha isciadi = tccâft (*icchyate), uScaladi = wccâlati, puscadi = prcchati.

tili^ci peskadi = M. tiricchi pecchai = îVyafe preksate.
gSLSCSi
sibilant is retained at the beginning of a group of con-
sonants.
Grammarians
written.
MSS.
vsivy
differ as to
too
much
to
which sibilant should be
much
give
help
in
the
matter.
becomes i^kh according to Hemacandra, otherwise we find ^11% i\i&ke = ûskah, Tuluka = Turu3ka.
Sta sth become sta (or ^ta) 5Fg becomes =h^ or ^T2"
Ska.
^P^
susthu becomes ûstu or Sustu.
Spa, spha become spa, spha, nisphala = w?'spâ?a (M. S. nipphala, 38).
Ska, skha.
-pabskhalsidi
= praskhalati.
Sta. stha becom'e sta for 6ta)
hattho
38) uv&stida,
haste or haste
= /â.stoi^
(M.S.
= upasthita.
Spa. Buhaspadi = Brhaspati (or Bihaspadi).
Ksa becomes
peskadi = preksate
ska.
paSka = pa^sa.
(or it
Hemacandra says pahka,
is
i.e.
written Ska.
with visarga
jihvamullya).
The
real
Magadhi sound may have been neither the
their of the Midland Sanskrit.

it
is
These groups being
"^FT
nor
difficult,
not surprising to find that MSS. generally write the
assimilated forms
ttk^ etc.
As verbal forms in ccha go back to I.E. forms in -SKA the MagadhI

might be regarded as more archaic than the Vedic cch (however pronounced): cf. Slavonic, but this is considered inadmissible as Magadhi
'
.<c
has 6c also for secondary cch as in uScaladi, ma^cali (=Fish. matsya-ViPr.
maccha),
iechadi etc.
cf.
Hindi machli.
On
the other
hand
if
originally correct foi
the sa jae group would be readily introduced in other cases
where âuraseni
etc.
had
cch.
'
60
NTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
becomes
rth
may be merely
Magadhl
liaste
conventional analogy,'
hage =
Mg.
S. attho:
.*.
Nom.
characteristic points are
and
= tirtha,
(or ^t) so t\stsb
st.
"I"
e.g.
aste.
Iti
Sing, in
-e.
Otherwise
(107).
a.3te
= arthah.
This
Sauraseni hattho:
grammar the two

= so hattho
e liaste
grammar
the
closely
follows Sauraseni.
Some
Magadhl appear
Dialects of
S'akari
is
in the plays.
spoken by the King's brother-in-law
in tlie Little
Clay Cart.
Peculiarities.
weak y before
palatals.
Yc'isthsi^tisl/ia/
da in Past Participles especially from roots in

(the
same feature
is
found
kada = ^Tâ
Loc. Sing. ahim. pavahanahim
as a&&a Caludattaha.
hane.
r.
Gen. Sing, in aha as well
AMg.).
in
{y edxc-asdh)
Voc. Plur-aho.
These
= praua-
three points
last
resemble Apabhramsa.
Dhakki spoken by Mathura and

Mrcchakatika.
bhramsa
Has both
stage.
the two gamblers in the
form of Magadhi that approaches the Apa-
and
sa
ia.
Oandali and Sabari appear to be
Ardha Magadhi.
regarded
it
grammarians called
excluded
'
'
language
"Arsa" from
i.e.
of
the old Jain Sutras
Hemacandra explains that
Arsa.
'
'
all his rules
Trivikrama, another grammarian

treatise,
his
were rudha, or conventional, not

etymology,
The Indian
more archaic Maharastri.
the
Rsi.
have exceptions in
Magadhl.
Jacobi called this Jaina Maharastri and
as an older,
" Arsam " from
dialects' of
because
meanings
its
accordance with
strictly in
not based on Sanskrit.
Namisadhu commenting on Rudrata's Kavyalaiiikara (2-12),

derives the word Prakrit from prakrii in the sense of natural
'
On
tho other hand
tlie
Avestan niasyo=war<.i/aA.
^
MSrkandeya gives
change
G.I. P.
this for
I.
rt
becomes
Magadhi and
Yf\\nm:=ci mm. The prontinciation
is
.s
is
found
ii\
Iranian.
289.
Vracada
Apabhrara^n.
not rloar {ride Selivtiona. ATapadhi).
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKKIT.
61
speech free from the rules of grammarians, or from prak krta,

'
created of old
because, says he, the Prakrit of the Arsa
'
Ardhamagadhl is the language of the gods. Arisadevanam Addhamagahd vdnl. Obviously Namisiddham
vaijane
sadhu was a Jain. The Jains indeed supposed that ArdhaMagadhl, the language in which Mahavira preached, was the
original language from which all others were derived.'
There is some difference between the prose and verse portions
Verses often have Nom. Sing, in -o instead of
of the Canon.
canon,
the characteristic
(like Mg.),
-e
while prose prefers ltd or ttdnam
Other points
gerunds in tuna Turn

(
The verse
somewhat nearer to M. than the prose.

Ardha Magadhi agrees with Magadhi
the use of Gen, Sing, tava
roots in r (but not always)

this is rare in
Mg.)
ApabhramSa).
markedly
in
and
M.)
Verse
Verse meccha, prose milakkhu.
are.
kunai, prose kuvvai {=^* kurvati)
-e,
(like
122).
in the
dialect
Nom.
is
thus
Sing, in
past participles in da for ta after

in ka
becomes ga " Asoga" (but
in Pluti of -a in Voc. Sing,
(common
and sa. In general

than the dramafeatures
archaic
more
AMg.
tic Prakrits.
AMg. is assigned by the Bharatlya-natya-astra
(followed by Sahityadarpana) to servants, Rajputs, and the
heads of guilds. The Jain monks in the plays who might be
expected to speak AMg. appear to speak ordinary Magadhi.'
AMg. differs in many respects from Maharastrl.^
Phonetics. am becomes am before eva and avi = a'pi).
iti become i after pluti vowel or in iti vd.
prati drops i pad uppanna = prafi/M^pawwa (rare
It differs
in the retention of ra
(like Pali) retains
in other dialects).
Vide Pischel,
16.
Buddhist dramas found in

Old Ardha Magadhi.
3 Jacobi considered the language of the Jain Canon to be
an older
form of Maharastri. Kalpa Sutra, S.B.E. XII. Pischel showed this view
^
One
of the dialects in the fragments of
Central Asia
is
classed
to be untenable.
by Liiders
Pr. Gr.
18.
as
)x
62
teiccha
dentals for palatals,
= cikitsd.
aha = yatha.
use of samdhi consonants
Noun
dative in -ttae
( 92),
instrumental in sa
locative in -msi
Verbs
( 78).
92
104),
v.).
v^khya aikkhai (Pali acikkhati) M.

kuvvai (in prose, see above).
akkliai,
Relics of Aorists, e.g. 3 plur. pucchirasu.

ttu -ittu
Infinitives in
used as gerunds,
e.g.
kattu (means krtva) avahattu (means apahrtya)

sunittu, janittu.
Infinitives in -ttae -ittae
Gerunds
in
136).
ttanam,
-tta,
-ccana(in),
-cca,
-yana(ra).
M.
is
Cerebralisation
is
common
AMg. is often
much commoner in AMg. and so
Moreover where they agree what

rare in
is
in
the change la for ra.
The vocabulary
is
also often quite distinct.
AMg.
It will be obvious that
differs still
more from Saura-
seni.
The
later Jain writings belong to times
spread more widely and
Owing
rich
when
the sects had
were influenced by other dialects.
possibly to the popularity of this reUgion
mercantile communities on the
West
among
coast,
the
the
non-
canonical writings of the Svetambara Jains are in a language
which
may
retains a
in -ittu,
be regarded as a form of Maharastri, although
number
gerund in
of the peculiarities of
-itta
and ga
for ka.
AMg,
This
is
e.g.
it
infinitive
the main dialect
of Jacobi's Selected Narratives in Maharastri.
The language of the Digambara canon has Nom. Sing, in o

Hence it has been called Jain S'auraseni.
th become d, dh.
:
t,
It has
however much that
in either M. or
AMg.
is
foreign to Sauraseni, but found
In the direction of Gujarat were
many
strongholds of Jainism, and here the Sauraseni type of dialect
would meet Maharastri.
That JS. preserves rather more
of
AMg. than JM. does,

somewhat older.
the peculiarities of
fact that
it is
The resemblances and
is
63
probably due to the
differences of the i^rincipal Prakrits
given above would not necessarily lead to a closer
We
tion.
classifica-
have an Eastern Prakrit (MagadhI), a Southern
Prakrit (Maharastri), and a Central Prakrit (âuraseni).
Ar-
dhamagadhi appears to resemble the Southern more than the

Central Prakrit. Hoernle,' on the basis of a comparative
study of some of the modern Indo- Aryan languages, supposed
that the whole of Aryan-speaking India was at one time
divided between two languages, a " S'auraseni tongue
" and
" Mdgadhl
artificial
tongue.''''
literary language,
Maharastri he regarded as an
without any direct relation to the spoken

Further study of the Prakrits and
language of Maharastram.
of the
modern
dialects has
shown that
this
view
is
untenable.
Maharastri (and Jain Maharastri) has peculiarities which

can be traced in modern Marathi, aad there can be no doubt
that this Prakrit was based on the language of the Marathi
country.'^
Grierson^ with more abundant material has developed the

idea of the geographical classification of the Prakrits on the
basis of a comparison with
tion
modern
dialects.
classifica-
is
Central Prakrit
Sauraseni.
Outer Prakrits
E. Magadhi.
Intermediate
S.
This
is
His
is
Maharastri.
Ardha Magadhi.
a convenient classification inasmuch as Sauraseni
the most Sanskritic, and the representative of the Madhyawas the centre of Hindu culture after the early
desa, which
Rigvedic times
1
while literary centres at a distance from this
Grammar of the Gaudian Languages, 1880. Introd., p. xxx.

See Introduction to Volume on Marathi in the Linguistic Survey of
India.
3 See Article on Prakrit in Encyclop. Britaonica, 11th edition, and
chapter on Language in Imperial Gazetteer of India.
64
middle point naturally show more independence from Sanskrit.

This classification
indeed connected with a theory relating to
is
the immigration of the Aryan-speaking tribes into the Penin-
The speakers
sula.
krit
of the dialects
was created, and on which
on Sauraseni was based,
way
into the Madhyadesa

Aryan invasion. The descendants
produced the " Outer Band " of languages.
are supposed to have forced their
some time
out of which classical Sans-
later
after a previous
of those first-comers
Much may be
both for and against this particular
said
theory as an explanation of certain linguistic facts.
however
possible to accept a classification
It
based on such
is
facts,
without necessarily accepting this particular explanation.
A weak
position of
point in the classification might appear to be the
Ardha Magadhl.
would expect the language
and
half S'auraseni.
differs
If this
was centred
in
Oude, one
to be roughly speaking half
Now Magadhi
from Sauraseni except
as far as
we know
Magadhl
it
hardly
in striking phonetic variations.
we allowed Ardha Magadhi a Nom. Sing, in e, a certain

amount of
for r, and for s with perhaps some traces
of the other phonetic peculiarities of Magadhi, we could invent
If
a Prakrit that would

quite different
Canon.
and the
to
fit
in with the scheme,
Eastern Hindi does indeed

dialects of Bihar,
of the languages
but
it
would be
the real Ardha Magadhi of the old Jain

lie
between Western Hindi
and combines some
on either side
of the peculiarities
but in the case of the Prakrit
Ardha Magadlu this does not appear to be the case.

It must however be remembered that this classification deals
primarily with the spoken languages on
languages were based.
The
literary
which the
Prakrits
literary
were not
all
same time, and so do not represent strictly

dialects.
Ardha Magadhl is obviously more
crystallised at the
contemporary
archaic than Sauraseni.

oldest Jain Sutras
of the sect
Further tho lancuage of even the
may have been
towards the West.
literary Prakrits
influenced by the spreading
It
were influenced by
is
also possible
that later
earlier literary Prakrits.
Pali originally meaning a " boundary, limit, or line"
Pali.
was applied
it is
65
to the
Canon
of the
Hinayana Buddhists.
Thence
used of the language of that Canon, found also in some non-
canonical books
all
being preserved in what were originally
the missionary Churches of Ceylon,
again
Pali
'
'
is
Burma and Siam.
sometimes applied to
the
(a)
Thence
inscriptions
of
ASoka, although these comprise three or four distinct dialects

(b)
the
official
Middle Indian
Prakrit
wideh'
including
'
court language of Asoka's Empire, a form of
and
understood,^
Sanskrit ousted Prakrit (or " Pali
The
").''^
'monumental
when
(c)
down
the inscriptions
all
to the time
Pali language of
the Buddhist books forming a separate academic subject, (a

classical
language appropriate to Buddhists of Burma), has not
been much studied

the study of
(a)
Nevertheless
in India,
it is
important for
the history of Indian speech, and
the Old
(6)
Prakrit inscriptions.
For the study

texts
of classical Pali
and translations are
numerous grammars, readers,

Only a verj'- general des-
available.''
cription need be given here.
more of the old grammatical system than AMg.

The atmanepada is commoner
(The Aorist and ImAorists, especially the S-Aorists, abound.
Pah
Characteristics of Pali.
perfect have fused together).
but occurs.
classes,
e.g
retains
The reduplicated
There are more survivals

.sunoti
sunadi,
S.
karedi, dadati (also deti)
karoti
y remains, r sometimes becomes
Mg., n
rare,
(Atm kubbate) =
I,
the sibilant
S.
is
dental
but not always as in
sometimes cerebralised but not always.
is
is
S. dedi.
In Phonetics the striking points are
^,
Perfect
of the old conjugational
Intervocal
consonants generally remain, and surds are only exceptionally
Rhys Davids, Buddhist India.

is made by Dr Otto Franke,
See
This wide use of "Pali"
Sanskrit.
Pischel preferred
and "Lat"
"Lena"
dialect for
dialect for Anoka's inscriptions.
'monumental
See Biography.
und
Prakrit,'
Liiders suggests that the
widely understood Lena dialect was really Old Ardha Magadhi.

^
Pali
66
replaced by sonants.
Hence we have bhavati, or hoti,

mato = mrlah, kato = kftah.
pucchati, gacchati, etc.
katheti,
In some words conjuncts like dr- br- remain.
Svarabhakti
From
is
common.
these examples
Arya becomes ayya
it will
be seen that Pali
or ariya.
is
more archaic
than the Prakrits described above.
The geographical basis of Pali has been disputed. The

Buddha was supposed by tradition to have preached in
Magadhi. The Scriptures were naturally supposed by Southern
Buddhists to be in the language of the Buddha. Therefore
As a matter of fact it is not. The
Pali should be Magadhi.
Nom. Sing, in -o, the presence of sa, ra, ja show this clearly.
Some regard it as the language of Ujjain, whence Mahinda,
the son of ASoka, took the sacred Canon to Ceylon, others as
the Aryan language of the Kalinga country.' The latter seems
Pali would then represent a very old form
the more probable.
of Eastern Maharastri in touch with Magadhi on the North.
Asoka's Edicts are found in two different scripts, Kharosthi
and Brahmi, and in a variety of dialects.^ These often preserve
conjuncts not found in Pali,
e.g.
pr in priya.
Such are not
to be explained as Sanskritisms but as Archaisms, survivals of
the old phonetics, especially in the North-West where such
conjuncts
exist.
still
Cf.
Sindhi tran, T.ahnda tre = 3.
Dealing with the circle of Buddhist ideas these inscriptions
have in
many
instances to be interpreted
by comparison with
the Pali scriptures.
Later Prakrit inscriptions are generally of a simpler character,

often too brief for their dialect to be classified with certainty.
Apabhramsa (see Ch. II, p. 6).

To the student of philology it
'
will
be of interest to state
Vide Oldenborji, Vinayapitaka, Introduction,
p. liv.
but conaidered tlio

" L5t. -dialect " to be on the whole one definite language, perhaps the
official language more widely understood than spoken in the North-West
'^
Pischel (Gr.
and South.
29) tidmitted clear traces of dialects,
some
of the
()7
main features of the Apabhraiiisa
Whereas
stage.
Old Prakrit stage the typical phonetic and grammacharges are not carried so far as in Dramatic Prakrits,
in the
tical
so naturally in this Late Prakrit
At the same time being
further.
all
such changes are carried
touch with spoken
in close
ApabhramtSas occasionally retained very ancient

features, that had survived outside the main current of lin-
dialects, the
Some
development.
guistic
of the
"Outer"
dialects preserve
quite ancient features to the present day.
The following
and conjugation
Apabhramsa, not those shared with
tables of typical declension
gives only forms peculiar to

Prakrits.
Declension.
Nom.
Sing.
Ace. puttu
[Neut. phalu]
Plur.
If
Ins.
putte
Abl.
puttahe puttahu.
Gen.
puttassu puttaho puttaha
Log.
putti puttahl
Nom.
Ace. putta (Neut. phalal)
Ins.
puttahi(m)
Abl.
puttahQ
Gen.
puttaha
Loc.
puttahl
the oblique forms be compared
needed only the blurring of the
final
it
apparent that
is
it
vowels to reduce these to
one form for the singular and a nasalised form for the plural
(vide
Beames,
seen
is
II,
Genitive Sing, an
Nom.
The Apabhramsa Nom.
form survives
Sing, in o (Rajasthani
dard Hindi and Panjabi)

-aka-.
42).
Sing, in
in the Sindhi forms with a very short m.'
is
o or a.
Apabhramsa.
and Western Hindi
dialects) or
This
.'?
5 (Stan-
derived directly or by analogy from forms in
was dropped, hence from
becomes either
in
In the
*aL-o
we
get
*a-o.
Apa. a-u whitli
68
appears in
tlie
Marathi dative and in Kashmiri.'
seen only in the pronominal declension tis-ka
is
In Hindi
it
kis-ka.'^
Conjug-ation.
Sing.
1.
pucchaii
2.
pucchasi or
3.
pucchai
This
is
Plur
-hi
1.
imcchahu
2.
pucchahu
3.
pucchahi.
very close to Old Hindi and not far from the modern
forms pucchu, pucche, puccho, pucche.

In general
it
may
be said that the Apabhratiisa forms, when-
ever these can be ascertained, should be taken as the starting
point for the derivation of words in the modern languages and
Thus to derive
Hindi pahla "first" we should start from an Apabhramsa
form pahilail rather than from prathamah or padhamo.*
the comparative study of their phonology.""
Pais'aci Prakrit.
Paisaci
lies
outside the circle of languages
The term seems to have been used (a) of

the language of demons ' Bhutabhasa," (ft) of a number of
uncivilized languages, including some Apabhranisas and some
non-aryan languages, (c) the Paisaci dialect of the grammarians
(especially Hemacandra) with asubdialect Ciilika PaiSaci (C.P.).
dealt with so far.
This Paisaci dialect
archaic in character.
is
liarity is the substitution of
tara
= Damodara.
C.P. nakara
gharma, kanitappa
na
becomes na
T,
h.
la
becomes 35
not dropped.
ny become nn
jn,
nagara raca
raja,
Tamo-
khamma
kandarpa.
Intervocal consonants are
reduced to
chief pecu-
Its
surd mutes for sonants.
fas in
/a
ya remains.
Aspirates
are
not
Mg. and probably every
other dialect at a sufficiently early stage).
Who
Edict agrees with

I
Also in
tliis
Roniani
"'
dialect in
of Gypsies in
Europe, C'oros-kero
These forms have fused with the old fominino
t>f
thief."
tifsa. etc.
Sec Grierson's Phonology of the Indo-Aryan Vernaculars.
Grierson derives from an Apabhrainda padhdvillail apparently deduced
from AMg. padhamilla with the
The Shahbazgarhi
a number of particulars.
The
were the speakers of this dialect
44!t
suffix -ilia so frequent in
wlio assumes Old Indian *pra(>iila.
M.
cf.
Pischol
Brhatkatha
of
69
Gunadhya was composed, according

This work was popular in Kashmir
to
the
in
the
Soraadeva produced one version
Katha-
story, in Paisacl.
ilth century.
in the
and Ksemendra a shorter one in the BrhatkathaSome scliolars have concluded that Culika PaisacI
saritsagara,
maiijari.
was a
dialect of the
connects
it
North-West
of India.
Sir
George Grierson
Hindu
with the Dard and Kafir languages of the
Kush, including Shina and the under-layer
of Kashmiri.'
it is admitted that Gunadhya was a SouthThe Brhatkatha was composed many centuries before
that late literary development in Kashmir which produced
Ksemendra, Bilhana, Somadeva and Kalhana. 'Î na becomes
f na, and ^ becomes 55 1 are suggestive of Dravidian influence.
On
the other hand
Indian,
Other features such as the retention
Surd
merely archaic.
medial
of
and
t,
of y are
can be paralleled in the South
for sonant
common
corruption when a
The
student will relanguage
member the Welsh parson Sir Hugh Evans in the Merry Wives
Speakers of Gaelic have the same tendency.
of Windsor.
Any such corrupt dialect on the fringes of Aryan speech would
necessarily disappear with the continued extension of Aryan
as well as in the North.
is
adopted by an alien
So that
speech.
It is
it
race.'^
seems quite as possible that the original
Cockscomb' Demons belonged to the Vindhyas
as that they
were Cannibals of Kashmir.*

1
Vide the PiSaca Languages of North- Western India.
R. As. Soc. ilon.
The author's theory that these, mostly mixed, dialects

should be provided with a separate compartment between the Iranian and
Vol. VIII, 1906.
Indian subdivisions of Aryan, because they combine Indian and Iranian

peculiarities, is
Nor
not convincing.
is
the connection with C. PaiSaci
obvious, as the main peculiarity of C.P. (surd for sonant)
is
exceptional
in this area.
'^
It
is
If that is the
* References.
Home
of
393-421.
same change
quite probable that the
and Teutonic (Gothic taihun)
meaning
is
in
Armenian
(tasn
ten
')
due to the same cause.
of ciilika, cuhka.
Grierson's
Monograph,
Paisaci Z.D.M.G. Ixiv, pp. 95
pp.
ff.
and
2.
Sten
Konow.
Grierson Z.D.M.G. xlix. pp.
70
CHAPTER XL
PRAKRIT LITERATURE.
If
tirst
the whole of the Middle Indian period be included, the

place in literary development
Its claim to this place
must be assigned to
due not only to
is
its
Pali.
antiquity, but
also to the inherent worth
and
Buddhist
Indian religions, Buddhism has had
Of
literature.
all
historical interest of the early
the profoundest effect on Asia as a whole.
"
or " Triple Casket

religion.
Tlie Pali_5ipitaka
contains the oldest scriptures of that
Moreover from the Pali books we get incidentally
a view of Indian
life,
that serves to supplement the more
pedantic outlook of the orthodox priesthood, and the romances

of the bards.
Every student
of Indian History should at least
read some of the Jatakas or Birth Stories of the Buddha.'
Representations of these stories, and scenes

of the
Buddha occur
from the
life
continually on the sculptured panels of
Buddhist stupas and vihdras.
Indeed without a knowledge of
some comprehenBuddhi.sts, lay and cleric, as revealed by

the student cannot really grasp what was
the outlines of the Buddhist doctrine, and

sion of the lives of
these old scriptures,
one of the dominant factors in Indian History for more than a
thousand years after the Founder's death.

Indian Philosophy
will find
The student
of
that acute reasoning and bold specu-
lation were not confined to the ortliodox schools of tliought.
but also found among the Bauddhas.

i]
History
is
represented by the versified monkish chronicles
contained in the
Mahavamsa
dealing with the early history
of Ceylon.
The term
Prakrit Literature however does not ordinarily
include Pali Literature.
If
Pali
works be excluded, then the
greater part of the whole of the Prakrit Literature is made up

This, as we have seen, is found in three
of Jain Literature.
distinct Prakrits.
'
See Bibliography.
_
/,
Ardha-Magadhi
is
the language of the oldest Jaiu books,
which form the Canon

comprises
4:5
71
This canon
S'vetgjubara^ct.
of tlie
dgamas including
ele ven
anga s and twel ve updngas
These are sometimes spoken of under their Prakrit names and

sometimes under the Sanskrit equivalents,
Ayaranga-suttani
Sii5'a-gadangani
,,
7th
1st
= Acdrdnga-sutram.
= Sutrakrtdngam.
UviissLgardskaao = Updsaka-daSdhJ
Ovavaiya-suttam = Aupapdtika-sutram.
Anga.
1st
2nd
e.g.
,,
Upanga.
This great collection of writings was arranged by Devaddhi
Ganin in the 5th century a.d.

the work is given as 980 years
the Founder of Jainism,
The
i.e.
The date
of the completion of
after the entrance to nirvana of
a.d. 454 (or possibly a.d. 514).
older books, G'a,\]ed_Puzvas on which this redaction

,
Thus the
based, have completely disappeared.

tains materials of different centuries
is difficult
to distinguish them.
Bhadrabahu (about 300
B.C.).
The
is
collection con-
mixed together, so that
Some portions
One such work
suttam'" {Kalpa-sutram) which contains a
This apparently
was
it
are ascribed to
the
is
life
of
Eappa-
MaEavira.
not really older than the 5th century a.d.
style of the oldest prose
books
is
diffuse, delighting in
elaborate descriptions and endless repetitions. Their chief interest to the general student lies in their incidental references to
and circumstances of the ordinary everyday life in India.

The oldest Kdvya work in Jain literature is the PajimaL^cariya,
which gives a version of the Ramayana. It dates perhaps
facts
from the 3rd century a.d.

In Jain Maharastri there are non-canonical books of the
Svetambaras,
consisting
mainly
from the
lives of
famous
of
collections
of
stories
and narratives of the

The Svetamconversion of various people to the Jain religion.
bara literature has as yet been only partially explored by
stories
Edited and translated by Hoernle

Edited by Jacobi, and translated
See Bibh'ography.
saints,
in the Bibliotheca Indica.

in
Sacred Books of the East Series.
:Q
72
modern
scholars,
and much material both
works of the Digambara sect
in
and
for philology
Even
history awaits scientific treatment.
less
known
for
are the
Bhandarkar
Jain S'auraseni.
has published extracts from the Pavayana-sara of Kundakund-
acarya and the Kattigeyanupekkha of Karttikeyasviimin, both
which are
of
in verse.
Jain literature
is
neither so famous, nor so widely studied as
Much of it is
Much of it again
the Pali Buddhist hterature.
still
or in uncritical editions.
is
in manuscript,
difficult
without
(and even with) a commentary.
Apart from the Jain Canon the earl}' literary development of

Ardhamagadhi has been deduced from its occurrence in certain
inscriptions, and in fragments of plays
ascribed to Asvaghosa
'
or his contemporaries.
kuka
Jain Maharastri
is
found
in the
Kak-^
inscription.
For the purposes
Kavya however
of
the most important
Prakrit was from an early date Maharastri.^
This was the
language of the Prakrit Epics and Lyrics, and formed the

starting point for Prakrit
Most famous
Grammarians.
of the Epics
excellent technique, that
it
is
the Setubgjidha, a work of such
has often been ascribed to Kali-
The poem, which is called in Prakrit Ramnavaho or

Dakamuhavaho relates the story of Rjima, but is supposed to
commemorate the building of a bridge of boats in Srinagar by
dasa.
Pravarasena, king of Kashmir.
'
Luders.
Jacobi (Selected Narratives, Introd.. 1886) suggested the 4th centur\
about the time when M. attained
A.D. as
tions of
M. country are of the Pali type
this position.
:
Early
inscrip-
the latest of these (sliowing
some instances of elision of single intervocal consonants) date from 150

and 200 a.d. Tlie Jain Canon according to tradition was written down
in 454 A.u. Its language [AMg.j was influenced by M. [Pisohel denies
this].
^
Dandin praises the Sotubandha.
Macdonell.
Rajatarangini,
lif-ntioii
For Pravarasena II see

For an attempted identiMntrigupta, sec Stein's note on verse 129.
Sanskrit Literature, p. 331.

Steiii'a trana.
of Kfilidasa witli
Bk. Ill, V. 354.
73
The Gaiidavaho celebrates the conquest of Bengal by

Yaovarman of Kanauj about the end of the seventh centur}'
A.D.
Its author's name was Bappai'raa ( = Vdkpatirdjd) possibly
a nom de plume. The same author composed another Epic
Maliumahaviaa of which only one or two verses have been
preserved in quotations.
The Ravanavaho and the Gaiidavaho have both been much

influenced by Sanskrit models, and dehght in long compounds.
The last eight cantos of lêvaa.ca.nAtai' s Dvyd&raya-Mahdkdvyam
form a small Prakrit Epic entitled Kumdrapalacarita describing
The
the deeds of Kumarapala of Anhilvada in Gujarat.
object of these cantos, as of the whole work,
to illustrate
is
the rules of the author's compendious Sanskrit and Prakrit
grammar called Siddhaj-Hemacandra.

The most important work for tlie study
This
Sattasai {Sapta&aiakam) of Hala,
many
prising verses by
names, another, that
of
is
of Maharastri is the
a n_anthQlogv_jcom^
One commentary gives 112

The various
poets.
Bhuvanapala, gives 384.
'
much in the distribution of the verses,

and probably few can now be definitely assigned to their
authors.
The collection is evidence of the immense amount of
recensions differ very
Maharastri poetry that must have been composed, but not

Besides Hala
preserved.
(spelled
who
is
variously Sahvahana,
known from other sources.
identified
with Sdtavahana
there are a few
etc.)
names
Hariuddha, Xandiuddha and Pottisa
are mentioned in Rajaêkhara's Karpuramaiijari Act I, p. 19,
The Vidiasaka
says, " ta
ujjuam jeva
kini
na bhaniadi
2.
amha-
nani cedia Hariuddha-Xandiuddha-Pottisa-Hala-ppahudinam pi
purado sukai
The date
put
it
'
of this anthology has not
been determined.
in the 3rd century at earliest, but earlier
century.
it
tti."
Weber
than the 7th
Macdonell says, the poet Hala probably lived before
In Lanman's racy translation this runs:

straight out
Our
little
pussy
's
"Then why
first-rate
Harivrddha, Nandivrddha, Pottisa and the
rest."
don't you say
poet, ahead even of

{Sukai- Stikat'i.)
<4
Some
1000 A.D.
confusion has been caused by the identifica-
tion of this Hala-Satavahana with the 17th king of the
dynasty (68
Andhra
Jacobi on the other hand identified him
a.d.).'
with the Siitavahana, king of
who induced the
Pratisthana,
Jains to change their Church Calendar in 467 a.d.
There can be no doubt that

poets well
known
this anthology, including lyric
the time of Rajasekhara, was not put
in
when we should rather expect

The introductory verses of the
together in the 1st century a.d.*

early Prakrit of the Pali stage.
Sattasai rather suggest that these
love
lyrics
were not so universally on the
men
as they
lips of
of
the South
had formerly
been.
Another anthology of similar material
""A
some 700
Some
verses.
Jaavallaham
the
is
Svetambara Jain.
or Vajjalagga of Jayavallabha a
of these are
common
to
It contains
Hala's
collec-
tion.
Dramatic Prakrits.
The ordinary use
(M. S. Mg.) in Sanskrit plays

Sanskrit.
The
kam
is
among
one of the richest in
The Hero
of course,
its
of
differ
to the precise
as
The Mrcchakati-
the roles.
variety of Prakrit dialects.
and male characters
of similar standing,
except the Vidusaka, speak and sing in Sanskrit.

tional for a
woman
Prakrits
three
familiar to every student of
however
authorities
allotment of the Prakrits
is
to speak Sanskrit, bub the
It
is
Nun
excep-
in Mala-
timadhavam does so. A purely Prakrit play in which even the

Hero speaks Prakrit is also exceptional. A well-known instance
is
the Camphor-cluster.
The author however thinks

Sanskrit has been
'
See Vincent Smith,
whence
*
it
well
Early
History of India,
classical'
jud'jineiit.
why no
'2nd
edition, p.
19<i.
liistories of India.
Vincent Smith has evidently given too
and Sanskrit,"
explain
to
In the Prologue the Stagemanager
has been copied by school
much
weight to
hi.s
"
late;^t
on the relations between the vernacular language and

or .secondary' Sanskrit," i.e. Professor O. Franke's " Pali
leading authority
the
>ised.
it
'
1902.
This
is
a book of some ingenuity, but
little historical
INTRODUCTUiN TO PRAKRIT.
reflects,
75
Then why has the poet abandoned the Sanskrit
language and undertaken a composition in Prakrit
"
His
assistant replies in Maharastri
" parusa, Sakkaabandha Paiia-bandho
vi hoi
suumaro
" purisa-mahilanani jettiam ihantaraiii tettiam imanani
but a Prakrit poem
"Sanskrit poems are harsh:
smooth
as that
between man and woman."
the difference between
Sauraseni
is
very
thera in this respect is as sjreat
is
Magadhi
the corresponding verse dialect.
used by menials, dwarfs, foreigners and the
is
II
the ordinary prose language of ladies and of the
Mtiharastri
jester.
is
two policeman and the fisherman
in
like, e.g. the
Sakuntala.
It
is
also
MSS. and texts often

assign the dialects contrary to the rules of Poetics and the
statements of commentators. They also confuse the dialects,
so that Magadhi appears almost the same as Saurasenxspoken by Jain monks and small boys.'
This mixture of languages in the Indian
much
There
is
no exact parallel to the Indian usage.
always made fun

brings
in
of the
the Thracian
speech of foreigners.
barbarian Triballos,
jargon with a vague resemblance to Greek.
The
corded
Drama
has been
discussed, and various explanations suggested.
Pischel
Mrcchakatikatn
(
:
Aristophanes
who speaks a
The Phoenician
following note of characters supposed to speak
bj'
Comedy has
Magadhi
as re-
be useful to students of the Drama.

6akara, his servant Sthavaraka, the shampooer-
may
23)
Kumbhilaka, Vardharaanaka, the two Candalas and Rohasena. Sitkun,

tala
Fisherman and two policemen, Sarvadamana Sakuntala's young
Prabodhacandrodaya the Carvaka's pupil and the messenger from
son.
:
Orissa.
Mudraraksasa
servant, Jain
monk, messenger, SIddharthaka
and Samiddharthaka while they appear as Candalas. Lalita-vigralia[Otherwise Turuska

raja: the bards and the spy (who also speaks 6.).
captives and spy. The Indian spy speakes 6.]. Vemsamhara the Raksasa
:
and
his wife.
Mallikamarutam
Caitanyacandrodaya
servants.
elephant-keepers.
Nagananda
servants.
Candakausikam: Candalas and Rascal.
Dhurtasamagama barber. Hasyarnava Sadhupirnsaka. Latakainelaka

Amrtodaya: Jain
Kamsavadha: the Hunchback.
Digambara Jain.
monk.
:
76
tongue was parodied in Latin comedy, tliough the readings are

too corrupt for
much
speech of
common
made
to be
Welshmen and Frenchmen
are
of
it
Shakespeare's
now.
Again the vulgar
familiar.
people, as opposed to the language of the
educated, has al\va3rs found
its
way on
the comic stage.
to
more or less conventional form, has appeared

Moreplays from Shakespeare's time onwards.
Dialect also, in a
even
in serious
over in Greek Tragedy

dififerent to
vvc
have the chorus singing
dialect, a literary poetic language based
in fact
The Doric chorus
the general language of the play.
in the Attic play, like other lyric poetry,
what
in India
in a dialect
is
in a conventional
on the Doric
dialects,'
would he called a (literary) Prakrit.
The Indian usage however dififers from all these partial

In the first place we may find four, and regulady
three, different dialects used in the same household, nay by
members of the same family secondl}^ one of these is a learned
parallels.
('dead') language belonging to a previous stage of linguistic
development;
thirdly, dialects purporting to represent widely
distant areas are combined iu a single play, and assigned to

particular characters without
any obvious reason
and
finally
>
the practice has been reduced to definite rules.
The systematisation
Everything
prising.
and
the
codified,
'
faults
making
of
Brahman
of the
else
from the virtues

in the endless
'
Dramatic Prakrits
not
is
about the Drama has been
sur-
classified
Hero to
ornament. The
of tlie various sorts of
kinds
of
poetic
minute rules seems to have characteristics
of the
in all ages.
Explanations of this Sanskrit- Prakrit

or three different lines.
One
Drama may
line is the Realistic
follow
two
namely that
the conversations in the plays represent the actual conditions

Grierson writes: " In
of Indian life in say the Gupta period.
India there
'
is
nothing extraordinary in such a polyglot medley.
See Giles. Manual
of
Comparativo
I'liilology.
014-6.
Almost
every word of these three sections dealing with Greek dialects can be
applied to Indian dialects.
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRir.
It is paralleled
by the conditions
of
any
77
large house in Bengal
at the present day, in which there are people from every part
of India
each of
whom
speaks his
own language and
under-
is
stood by the others, though none of them attempts to speak
what
is
not his mother tongue."
Of course
explanation.'^
it is
'
Beames suggested a
similar
admitted that the dialects are
conventional in form, not faithful copies of spoken vernaculars,

also that the assignment of a particular dialect to a particular
sort of menial
may have been mor#or less true to fact. Again,

men could speak Sanskrit and that
granted that educated
ladies generally could not, it
men
is
not to be supposed that the
could speak nothing but Sanskrit, and habitually addressed
not only their wives but even their grooms in that language.
The well-educated man was able
to speak Sanskrit.
hero therefore spoke Sanskrit, and by
spoke
it
The
a stage convention
^^
always, just as stage kings almost always, and real
kings rarely, wear a crown.
Of course
drama was
this explanation implies that the
form
fixed in the SaurasenI country.
Another
of the classic
line
be adopted to explain the use of Maharastri in verse.

clearly a case of
is
Literary convention.
must
This
school of lyric
poetry developed in the South and became famous far beyond

the borders of the Great
Kingdom.
Maharastri verses were
doubtless sung throughout India as Persian verses
was natural to regard
It
still
are.
this dialect as the only appropriate
one for Prakrit songs.
more difficult to account for the use for the other dialects
along this line.^ The solution of the problem is obviously
bound up with the history of the origin and development of
It is
Encyclopaedia Britannica, 11th
Grammar,
Vol. I, p.
ed., Vol. 22, p. 254.
7.
Le Theatre Indian (1890), p. 331, suggested that the

was connected with the development of the Krishna cult
at Mathura the capital of the 6urasena countrj'. The use of Magadhi
he would regard as a legacy from the ancient Magadhas, the bards of
^
Sylvain Levi
use of Sauraseni
JIagadha.
x,
INTRODUCTION lO PRAKRIT.
Of this we have
the Indian drama.
little direct
knowledge.
Opinions have differed as to whetlier richness in Prakrit, as in

the case of the Mrcchakatikam,
a sign of early or of late
is
date,
Again some authorities believe
drama
to
Tlie
which Sanskrit was added
in
an original Prakrit
later.
fragments of Buddhist plays ascribed to the time
of
Kanishka show the use of two or three distinct Prakrits. The

Sanskrit is not quite "correct" and Prakrit is sometimes
On the other hand the plays ascribed

Bhasa (not yet dated) evidently prior to the Mrcchakatikam
are not so rich in Prakrit.
One play has none, and some at
used in stage directions.
to
lea8t of these plays are closer in
feeling
and diction
to
the
Mahabharata than to Kalidasa or Bhavabhuti. The extreme

antiquity of Bhasa' s plays has been supposed to be supported
by the character of his Prakrit, e.g. ayyautta instead of
This however
ajjautta.
is
The Trivandrum
South Indian MSS. As
MSS.
common
feature in South Indian
edition of Bhasa's works

so often happens, these
is
based on
MSS.
are evi-
dently unreliable for the original form of the Prakrit.^
Prakrit origin has been proposed not only for the Drama,
but also for the Epic and Puranas,* that the Brhatkatha was
composed
in Paiâci Prakrit
{vide p. 69 above).
recorded by literary tradition
is
The evidence
Mahabharata and Puranas
consists in small points of
and metre considered to point

The question cannot be discussed
bered however that
J
hm
for
mh
and hn
all
for
for Prakrit originals of the
to
translation
here.
poetry and
nh at
It should be
verse,
grammar
from Prakrit.
remem-
that has had a
appear archaic, but are proguhniadu = (,r7?7jp/ta<M). In the
first siglit
bably only orthographical variations
cf.
SvapnavSsavadatta the Vidusaka speaks âuraseni, while the dialect of

the ladies and servants contains many forms proper to MaharSstri (or
AMg.).
^
Pargiter.
Dynasties of the Kali Age.
Griersoii.
Enc. Brit. Prakrit,
p. 253.
Compare
also the tlieories of the origin of the Paucatantra.
Jayadeva's Gitagovinda
original.
(Pischel).
is
(Hertol.)
supposed to be based on an Apahhramia
popular origin, must
and
definite
crystallised
litive
existed (in
79
some form however
Sanskrit.
in
poem be
the
If
old
in-
was
fluctuating) in the popular speech before it
enough, the
must have been current in Primary Prakrit, not in

Middle Indian. Primary Prakrit would not be identical with
the "Sanskrit" of Panini but it would bear a strong family
original
resemblance
Progressive
thereto.
acting unevenly
period,
would produce much the sort

find in tlie
Prakrit
is
Sanskritising
its
later
work,
the
plienomenon we actually
of
Such a sanskritisation
Epic Dialect.
very different in
at
on various portions of
of
Primary
significance from translation out
of a Middle Indian Prakrit into the Classical Sanskrit.
special
section
of Prakrit
Literature
is
formed by the
Prakrit Grammars.
The
oldest authority
is
the Bhdratiyandtya sdstra which gives
only a short description of Prakrit grammar in verses 6-23 of
Chapter
17.
Chapter 32 contains examples in Prakrit.
fortunately the text of this work
can be made of
is
Un-
so corrupt, that little use
it.
There seems to be no good authority
for ascribing to Panini
The oldest Prakrit grammar

extant is the Prakrtaprakasa of Vararuci Katyayaua, who
has been identified with the author of the Vdrttika kdraJ The
oldest commentary on the Prdkrtd- prakdsa is the Manorama of
JBhamaha. With this commentary the work has been edited
and translated by Cowell. (See Bibliography). In Chapter X
a grammar called Prdkrtalaksa na.
on PaiSaci Bhamaha gives two short quotations from the
lost
Brhatkatha.^
Canda
in his
Prakrits (AMg.
Prakrtalaksana
JM. JS.) together.
deals with M.
and the Jain
The arrangement
work shows it is comparatively ancient.

The most important of the Prakrit grammars
Hemacandra
of
Gujarat (1088-1172
For the authorities see Pischel Gr.
Under Sutra
4.
hrdayasya hitaakam
||
the
that of
a.d.).
32.
Kamalam piva miikham.

Hitaakam harasi me taluni.
ivasya pivah
\\
is
of
Sutra
14.
80
This forms the eighth chapter of his Siddha Hemacandra,

first seven chapters of which deal with Sanskrit grammar.
The same author compiled a DeÎnamamala.
Other grammars are
The last chapter of the Samksipta-
the
Vararuci and
ffdra of
Kramadi^vara
value.
Prdkrtavyakarana of Trivikramadeva (about 13th cen-
this follows
is
of
little
Hemacandra.
Mdrkandeya Kavindra who lived in
Orissa in the reign of a Muiiundadeva (perhaps 17th century).
Prdkrtakalpataru of Ramatarkavagiâ and many others of
tury) follows
Prdkrtasarvasvam of
less
importance.
Isolated verses in
treatises
Apabhramsa
on poetics and in
occur in Jain
works, in
late collections of stories like the
Seventy Tales of a Parrot and the Twenty-five Tales of the
More remarkable is the inclusion by many MSS.

Apabhramsa verses in the 4th Act of the VikramorvaSiyam
Vampire.
be recited by King Puriiruvas.'
Apabhramsa
or
verses
is
Another source of Late Prakrit
the Prakrta-Paiiigalain, an Anthology
of the fourteenth century or later
S. P.
of
tu
.'^
Pandit (Bombay Sanskrit Series) omits them as spurious.
His
reasons for doing so have been disputed.

2
Edited by C. M. Ghosh in the Bibliotheca Indica, with commentaries,
various readings and glossary.
PART
II.
Extract No.
S'auraseni.
1.
Interlude preceding the 2nd Act of the Ratnavali.

logue between the heroine's two girl-friends
dia-
Susangada and
Niunia.
Susangada enters with a maina in a cage.
Susan
HaddhI haddhi
'
Adha kahim daniin mama hatthe
imaiii sariani nikkhivia^
me
gada
piasahl Saaria bhavis
(Looking another loay) Esa khu^ Xiunia, ido jjevva
sadi?
aacchadi,
{Enter Nipunikd\.
Nipu
Uvaladdho* khu mae bhattino vuttanto
bhattinie nivedemi.
ta Java
gadua
{Steps round).
Susan: Hala Niunie! Kahim danim vimhaakhittahiaa^ via

idha-tthidam mam avadhiria ido adikkamasi?
Nipu
Kadhain
Haddhi
= ha dhik.
also used for

^
Susangada
'*
where
Hala Susaiigade
mama
khu
Edain"
jaiiidam.''
Adha
Kahim
14.
" and " whither
nikkhivia gerund of nikkhivadi
"
sutthu
vimhaassa
in
form a
danim
tae
karanam.
loc. sing.
=fcamtn
74.
In the previous Act the
{ni-\-kfjip).
Heroine Sagarika mentioned giving her maina into SusahgadS's charge,

" Saria mae Susahgadae hatthe samappida " (= samarpita) before going
with Queen Vasavadatta to the Love God's grove, where indeed she saw
not the
;s
God but
Esa kkhu
should be so shortened in
*
uvaladdho
"so."
Java
gada
the liing.
Capeller has
khu
= khalu
mae
106.
gadua, gerund
9, 45, 13.
74) but only e
ido jjSvva
6. (Pischel, 94).
17, 125.
1,29.
piasahl
125.
for esa
bhattino 96.
122.
" So
68
and o
(2).
ta from vedic tat
I will
go and
tell
my
mistress."
6
vimhaa 47.
(v)iva). (t)thida
6
sutthu
edam
6
38.
12.
Skhitta (^^ksip)
{^stha)
janidam
125.
hiaa
9, 60.
via iva (from
adikkamasi {âti hram).

125 (i^jila) " you are quite right."
125.
82
Ajja
'
bhatta Siri-pavvadado aadassa Siri-Klianda
kila
Dasanamadheassa dhammiassa saasado aala-kusuma-sanjasikkhia,
nana-dolialain
devie
iiivediduiii
patthida
Susan
Nipu
pesida
nomaliaip
edam vuttantam
Tumani una* kahim
karissadi
'^
mhi.
tti
Piasahim Saariam annesidum.'
mae
Dittha*'
Saaria
gahida-8amuggaa-oitta-j)halaa-
Ta gaccha
vattia kaaliharaiii pavisanti.

pi
parigahidaTii
attano'^
kusuma-samiddhi-sohidam
Devisaasani
"
piasahini.
Aharn
gamissam.
[Exeunt].
Translation.
Susan: Oh dear, oh dear! Now wherever has Saaria got to

{Looking another
after thrusting this maina into my hand ?
this
way.
way) Why, hereis Niunia coming
[Enter Nipunika].
Nipu
Well
have received
go and
will just
tell
my
Susan: Hullo Niunia! why,
news from the master,
this
mistress.
how
is
so I
(Steps round).
this?
you seem altogether
perplexed, and go walking off without noticing
me
stand-
are
quite
ing here.
Nipu
What Susangada ? Hullo Susangada
right.
This
is
the cause of
my
You
perplexity.
To-day the
ajja 44.
Siri 68. pavvadado " from the mountain." 50, 86.
Sada 2. dhammia 'righteous' here = " juggler," dhammiassa saasado
" from a juggler " (saka.<at). aala = akala.
2 attano 100.
gahida (^grah) 125. nomalia 75.
3 " bright with an abundance of flowers " tti 74.
pesida mhi 08(1)
+ if).
una=' but (piinar in this meaning is treated as an enclitic
meaning " again " it becomes puno). patthida (pra-^ \îftha).
6 annesidum Inf. fr. annesadi {anu-k-\/is).
dittha 125 (dr^) samuggaa " box " (aamudga).
citta-phalaa " paint"
" wick." cf. H
"
means
also
paint brush
{vartika
ing tablet," vattia
(pro
*
'\
'
batti).
T
kaaliharam
for
-aBsain " to," pi
kaaligharam.
74.
named
master learned from a juggler
S'^
Khanda Dasa,
Siri
returned from the mountain of Sri, about the longing to

see flowers produced out of season,
Queen, that he
to inform the
will
with an abundance of flowers
But where are you
Susan
Nipu
To hunt
she
if
have been sent
bright
embrace
will
it.
for our Saaria.
saw Saaria with her paint-box,
off to
and
make a jasmine
into the plantain-house.
tablet
and brush going
So go to your friend.
I will
go
Queen.
to the
Sauraseni.
Extract No.
Katnavali, Act
2.
Soliloquy of Sagarika and conversation
II.
with Susaiigata.
[Enter Sagarika with a painting
Sa
Hiaa,
tablet,
Kim
pasida pasida.'
and
evidently in love].
imina'^ aasa-mettaphalaena
dullahajana-ppatthananubandhena? Annamca,
Jena jevva
ditthamettena idiso^ sarptavo vattadi puno
tam jevva
pekkhidum
aho de* mudhada!
ahilasasi tti
Jammado^ pahudi
hiaa.
vi
Adinisarasa^
samvaddhidam
saha
imam
janam pariccaia khana-metta-damsanaparicidam'' janam

anugacchanto na lajjasil adha va ko tuba doso ? Anangasarapaclanabhidena^
Anangam dava
1
2
'
Pasida (pro
imina
idiso
-mStta
{Tearfully)
dullaha
69.
annam
samtavo
70.
uvalahissam.*'
Bhodu!
Bhaavam Ku-
ajjhavasidatn.
sad).
-t-
anena.
desire' (prarthana).
3
evvam
tae
'
hard
to attain',
ppatMiaaa
48.
anguish
'
(tap),
vattadi
45.
ahilasasi (abhi
laa).
*
de
3.
ati
nrsamsa
Jammado 'from
pariccaia
sacca
cf.
'
very
44.
damsana
49, 64.
paclana
20
bhodu
**
(cf.
cruel.
birth' pahudi
12.
vaddhida past. part.
H. ^5It).
ajjhavasidam
cf. 44.
cf. 75.
uvalahissam
'
I will
[vrdh).
(pari + iyai).
reproach
'
(upa + a + labh).
(adhi
+ ava +
<to)
84
sumaiilia nijjida-surasuro
ua
lajjasi
Ta
tablet)
pidara^
mama
savvadha
mittena'^ avassam
vi
{Takes the
(Looks at her
idha aacchadi tava alekkha-samap-
pekkhia* jadhasamihidani
aliiinadain janain
taiii
karissani.
mandabhainle imina dunni-
maranarp uvatthidani.
na ko
jilva
bhavia, itthljanam paharanto
'
tablet
and
resolutely fixes
her atten-
Jai vi adi-saddhasena*) vevadi aani adi-
tion, then sighs)
mettam me aggahattho, tadha vi

damsanovao^ natthi tti jadha tadha
anno
janassa
tassa
alihia
pekkhissam.
[Enter Susangada].
Susan
Edam khu
kaaliharam ta Java pavisSmi,
mam
na
alihantr
una
Kiiu
surprised)
looks
Ta Java ditthipadam
pekkhadi.
{Goes softly behind her,
pariharia niruvaissam.
Delightedly)
over her shoulder.
sahu Saarie sahu
{Enters
Kadbam
and
"^
se
looks
Bhatta alibido
Adha va na kamalaarani
and
garuanuraakhitta-hiaa
esa
vajjia raa-
hamsl annassim ahiramadi.
Sa
mae
{Tearfully) Alibido
me
-salila
Kim una
eso.
nivadanta '"-baha
{Looking up
ditUiI pekkbiduip na jDabhavadi.
and forcing a smite) Kadhaiii Susangada
Sahi Susarigade
ido uvavisa."
nij jida
*istrl.
(mr + /i).
bhavia
omen.'
dun-nimittarn
pekkhia
''
saddhasa=sad/(-t;asa.
form
'
u\atthidaiii {upa+stha).
alelchija-sainarpita))i.
122.
means'
uvao.
"^
garua " heavy "
'
se
'
'her'
investigate
1*
itthi (=s</I) held to indicate old
122.
paharanto pres. part, (pra + hr).
'
109.
17.
natthi
isn't "
'
ij
8."5.
71.
pariharia.
gorund (pari -\-h/).
niiQxaissain
'
I will
S 17.
kamalaarani mass of lotuses,' a lotus pool, vajjia gerund of vajjed

" excepting."
(vrj)
I"
nivadanta
17.
-baha-
ently Ijappha becomes *b5pha

etc., it
II
remains bappha
nvavifia (iipa +viN).
(cf.
(65.*/)//
a) against
baha
H.
^HS
(!) 0.'5.
'HHT
'
13).
38.
For
-'
tear." appar-
In the moaning
(Pisch. 305).
'
steam,"
INTRODUCTION TO TKAKRIT.
Susan
{Approaching and looking
alihido
Sa
ko eso tae
at the tablet) Sahi,
Sahi nain pautta-maliusavo
'S5
Bhaavam Anango.
'
Susan: [Smiling) Alio de niunattanam! Kim una sunnaiu via

padibhadi
cittain
Sa
Radi-sanadhaip
alihia
pi
[Indignantly on recognising the drawing) Klsa^ tae ahaiii
ettha alihida
Susan
Sahi kini aarena kuppasi'?
ahhido, tadisi
mae Radi
ma
Sahi,
lajja,
ma
annadha-sanibhavini
ta
janida mhi piasahie.
mahadi khu me lajja.

na edam vuttantam avaro ko'vi
Ta tadha
Piasahi,
Susan
Kfimadevo
tae
Kadhehi savvain vuttantam.
Xam^
[In confusion aside)
Jadiso
alihida
tuha edina^ alavidena
kira
Sa
ahani
ta
[Takes the brush and paints).
karissai)!.
[Aloud)
karesu'' jadha
janissadi.
lajja.
Translation.
Sa
Be
quiet,
my
in
Another
trouble.
What
heart, be quiet.
on wanting a person that
thing ^What
though the mere sight of him results

desirest to see
ashamed
him again
the use of keeping

!
folly
in
It
is
this,
that
such anguish, thou
Cruel, cruel heart
only results
art not thou
grown up with you

from a moment's
known
only
one
to desert this person that has
from birth, and go after

glance
is
unattainable
is
Nay what
fault is
it
of thine
Thou
didst so
determine when frightened by the falling of the Love-
God's arrows.
Revered Lord
Demons
and
'
paiitta
Be
not
art
Bow
God
edina
nam=nundm.
karesu
= edena.
116.
'
here "
ashamed
to
harry
avaro
17.
(H. aur).
savva
45.
Love
Gods
womenfolk
70.
alavida (5 + iop).
of
after vanquishing.
125 {pra-irvrt).
then I will chide the
Flower
of the
KIsa " why ? " ettha

kuppasi " art angry."
it so,
(H. sab.)
86
am,
Utterly illfated that I
my
death
omen
this
inevitably
So while no one
is
coming,
I will just
one in picture limned, and gaze to
my
Although perturbation makes
have no other means
yet
him
just as I
gaze at
my
finger
of seeing
her heart
so beset with
is
me
does not see
shake so violently,
him, so
I shall
see
master, Bravo, Saaria bravo
I will
up
is
So
go
in.
to.
avoid her
What
Of course
will
deep attachment that she
as she draws.
and find out what she
vision
beloved
this
heart's content.
draw him.
Susan: This must be the plantain house.
Why
means
imminent.
is
line of
drawn the
swan does not
delight in ought but a lotus pool.
Sa
have drawn him, but
and cannot see him.
my
Susan
Sa
drowned
What Susangada ?
sight
Who
this
is
you have painted
So
I will
it is.
paint in Rati at his side.
Why have you drawn mp. there

My dear, why are you angry
Siisaii
?
without,
have drawn a Rati to match your God

sembler,
:
here
But the picture seems rather
Sa
down
Sit
whose great Festival
of Love,
Ah, how clever you are
empty.
Sa
in falling tears
is
dear Susangada.
The Revered Lord
Susan
my
So she
My
:
lias
My
me out the dear

am much ashamed.
found
dear,
nobody
Susan
away with circumlocution, and
comes
else
to
know
of
This extract
Extract No.
is
Love
me
all
So, dis-
about
it.
So do take care that
it.
dear, there's nothing to be
S'auraseni.
of
tell
any reason
ashamed
of.
3.
taken from the Bengal recension edited by

A comparison with the usual or " Deva-
Pi.schel (1877), p. 29.
nagarl" version
have been taken
will
show that considerable liberties must

Here the king carries
witli the original text.
87
INTRODUCTION TO PHAKRIT.
a bow in his hand and wears a garland of forest flowers, in the

other version he is attended by Javanihim with
'
who carry the bows and wear
Yavana women'
There the kin? passes
the flowers.
a sleepless night thinking of his beloved, here
it is
the Vidusaka
who cannot sleep though worrying about his return to luxury

The VidGsaka in the second act of vSakuntala describes his
!
companion to a sportive monarch.

Hi manahe,' bho hado mhi, edassa miaa-silassa ^ ranno
troubles as
vaassabhavena nivvinno.
Aam
'
mao,^
aam varaho'
tti
maj-
gimhe virala-padava-cchayasu vana-raisu'* ahindia,

patta-sankara-kasaa-virasaim 5 unha-kaduaim pijjanti giri-naijhandine
vi
mamsam
Aniada-velam^ ca unhonhara
salilaim.
bhunjiadi.
Turaa-gaanara ca saddena rattim'' pi natthi pakama-suidavvam.
Mahante jjeva pacciise- dasTe puttehim saunia-luddhehim

kannovaghadina vanagaraana-kolahalena pabodhlami '" ettikenavi " dava pida na vutta jado gandassa uvari vipphodao
**
Hi manahe, an exclamation
assigned
Another reading
expressing weariness.
by high authority to VidQsakas,

Hi hi bho. This however is
is
said to express astonishment.

^
"^
miaa 'hunting.' ranno 99. nivvinno disgusted (nir-i-vid).

mao " deer." majjhamdine of. 69. gimhe in summer 47. padava
17.
vana-raisu 'in forest tracks.'
possibly non-aryan root, " to

5
pijjanti Passive
'
aniada 'uncertain' (x/yam).
rattirh pi, ace. of duration,

vi
'
ahindaa
= traveller (Mrcch.)
unha -hot"
bhunjiadi Passive
even at night.'
47.
kadua
'
'is eaten.'
Through the night' the other version

suidavvam = suvidavvam from suvadi
:
sleeps.'
^ paccuse
at dawn' cf. 44.
commoner lubdhaka) hunter,
saunia (= vakunika) -hiddha
'
'
"
'
cf.
are drunk.'
has rattimmi
wandering' hind a Prakritic
ahindia
wander"
patta 'leaf 45. samkara "mixture."
bitter.'
'
'
'
tree'
'
'
'ear-splitting.'
forest-going,'
i.e.
kanna
'
cf.
1'^
'
6.
H.
kan.
vana-gam.ina
The other version has

This
explained by commentary as a "drive.'
makes better sense.

pabodhiami am awakened'
II
kann,
Panjabi
of foresters not
-ggahana 'forest-taking'
(= lubdha,
fowler.'
6ttika(M. gttia)e<am<.
on top of a boil' (vi+sphut).
of
ascetics.
passive.
vutta
'
finished'
(y.r.').
vipphodao a pimple
'
8s
sanivutto. Jena
kila amliesum avahlnesum tattha-bhavada maanusarina assama-padam pavitthena^ mama adhannadiie
'
Sauntala
nama ka
vi
tavasa-kannaa dittha.
sampadajii naara gamanassa kadhain
gadi
mama
cintaantassa
jjeva
?
pahada,'*
Tani pekkhia
na karedi.
pi
'
Java nam kidaaraparikammaiii
Edain
Ta ka
acchisum raani.
pekkha-
pia-vaassaiii
Eso banasana-hattho hiaa-nihida-pia-ano vana puppha-
mi.
Bhodu anga-maddanama vissamain" laheani.
mala-dharl ido jjeva aaccliadi piavaasso.
evam
vialo" bhavia citthissani,
pi
Translation.
Pf. lieigho
am weary
to death of being
king with his hunting habits.
companion
to this
After wandering along tracks
in the jungle with hardly a tree to give shade, in the middle of
summer day, mind you, with
a
*
Here's a boar
streams warm,
'
of 'Here's a deer'
cries
then the water we drink
bitter,
or
from mountain
is
and with a nasty astringent flavour from

Meals at ungodl\' hours, and nothing
being mixed witli leaves.
to eat but meat, burning hot!
possible
get
to
elephants make.
me
At earhest dawn the
rascally
"^
my
this
it is
troubles are not ended, for

boil.
now
fowlers
And
with the earsplitting din of a forest drive.^
top of the
'
Even during the night
im-
proper sleep for the noise the horses and
wake
with
all
there's a pimple on
For (yesterday) after leaving us behind, His
The other version has hio yesterday S 58.

The anusvara is optional.
pavittha (pra + vi.s) adhnnnada 'misfortune,'
'
amhesum
'
loc. phir.
106.
2
ij
SaiintaliT. this is
48.
correct not Saiindala.

'
kadhani
kida
'
"
madda
vialo
'
(=
125,
13.
vissamain
Literally
'
{kathwti).
acchisiim
loc. plur. S 39.
aara {acara), parikammo " toilet."
'crushing,'
rikalo)
" whoreson"
"
mention'
pahada (pra + bha).
'
bruising
'
{mrd): the other version has l>hanca
lame.'
rest' {vi-.sram).
so frequent in
Reading -ggahana.
lalieam opt.
117,
(ii)
more abuse
Shakespearian comedy.
'sons of a slave
(girl),'
(Inhh).
like
the
mediaev.il
Highness
From
the
moment he saw
my eyes.
her, not a
was thinking
Well, what's to be done
when he has
and a garland
in his heart,
1 will
witli
my
pretend
stand up straight.
leaning on his
word does he say about

when night fell on
of this
bow
in
my good
go and see
1 will
(Steps round
round
of forest flowers
and
hand, his beloved fixed

his neck.
limbs are so knocked about
So perhaps
my
girl called Saiintala.
finished his usual toilet.
Here he comes
looks up).
Good,
some hermit
of
siglit
returning to town.
friend
deer entered a hermitage and, to
in pursuit of a
misfortune, caught
'^9
may
get
a rest.
can't
{Stands
staff)
Extract No.
S'auraseni.
4.
S'akuntala before the King, who has forgotten her (Act 5).'
avatthantaram ^ gade tadise anurae kim v^
(Aside) Imain
Adha va
sumaravidena.^
atta
(Aloud) Ajjaiitta!
vavasissam.
danim me sodhanio.*
(Breaks
pura assamepade sabbhav-uttanahiaani^
samaa-puvvam
paccacakkhiduni
'
=2
sambhavia sampadam
Changed
cf.
Monier Williams,
Past part. cans, of sumaredi.
sodhanio caus. gerundive (sudh).
fut. (vy
-ir
ava
-t
so)
I will decide.'
'
Perhaps " wiU make an
<>
"questionable" (sam-\-H).
=sa7nudacaro "address,"
is
The other version has soanio
'
to
for.'
vavasissam
this
p. :203.
condition.'
a secret.'
akkharehim
be sorrowed
janani tadha
iniani
Idlsehiin
Pischel's Edition, p. 104.

'
Adha va sam-
Porava! juttam' nama tuba
saido^ danim eso samudaaro.'
'"
off)
Bhodu,
i.e.
Coram, supplies
Ajjaiitta
effort."
'
to tell
2.
In the drama
the word 'Ajjaiitta.'
the regular form of address for a wife to her husband, but
t is
not limited to this relation.

8
juttarn
nama
'
It
is
forsooth
fitting
'
34.
Other version has na
juttam nama.
" Open-hearted through good nature."
**
10
With (preceded by) a contract (samaya).
sion has pataria

1
'
To
repulse
'
'
having seduced or misled.'

'
prati + 5
+ calc;).
'
sarpbhavia.
akkhara
'
The other
syllable.'
\^
verord.'
90
The King
shocked and indignant.'
is
S'akuntala continues
Paramatthado ^
Bhodu.
jai
para-pariggaha-sankina tae
ahinnanena^ kena
ta
paiittain,
vi
edam
tuha* samdeham avana-
issani.^
[The King mutters a legal phrase about the
Haddhi haddhi
me
anguliaa-sunna''
'
Primary Rule
Gauiami).
distress to
Gautami. JJida" nam de Sakkavadare Saoititthe

vandamanae pabbhattham angullaaip.
[The King smiles and reflects on female cunning].
S'ak
'J.
(Turns in
aiigul!
"
udaam
Ettha" diiva vihina damsidam pahuttanarri,"^ Avaram
de kadhaissam."
[The King is still willing to listen].
Xaiu ekkadiasam vedasa-lada-mandavae nalinl-vatta-bhaana-
udaam tuha
gadani'-
[The King
Takkhanani
Tado
mama
so
'^
aam
tae
hattlie sainnihidaiii asi.''
still listens].
dflva
putta-kidao
padhamam
'*
maa-savao uvatthido.
pivadu
tti
anukampina uva
Sanskrit coining between the âuraseni speeches has been omitted.
=.
'^
paramdrthafo
pauttam
^
jai 6.
'really.'
has also jadi
!?
I.
pariggaha 'wife.'
125 {yuj).
The name
'token.'
of the play in 6auraseni
would
Ahinnann
be
Saiintalam.
+
Pischel read
reading tuha.
'
tava.
cf.
in
Grammar
devoid of
Jada "
"i
âkravatare Sacitirthe.
ettha
'
my
'
I;
slipped off' (pra+bhrain-^).
goes bacU to
-Iranaiii
134.
lying in a lotus-leaf cup.'
asi 133.
puttakidan
=:tat ksaiiam.
maa-s5vao 'fawn'
">
pabbliattliain
S ^(^
= [prabhu-'vam) -ttanani
10
I*
other
son."
here.'
" kadhaissam
a
the
its ring.'
'
would have preferred
421.
{apa + nl).
<>
li
1900 he
!?
padhamam
'
The compound
fostoreliikl."
{"iahaka).
20.
u\ac(liaiidido
coaxed
'
{iipa -^-rhfind).
is
inverted.
Na una de
cchandido.
avaricidassa
91
hatthado udaaiii avagado
'
Paccha tassim jjevva udae mae gahide^ kado tena

Etthantare vihasia bhanidam tae. " Saccaip savvo
paduni.
panao.'
sagandhe visasadi,* jado duve

[The King
is
vi
tumlie arannakao
"
tti.
touched, but thinks that these are "false
honied words," and to Gautamis' protest replies with a verse
on the guile of female cuckoos much more
women
the
guile
of
S'akuntala
is
indignant.
Anajja! attano hiaanumanena kila savvam edani pekkhasi.
Ko
nama anno dhamma-kancua-vavadesino
tana-channa-
kiivovamassa tuha anukari bhavissadi.

[Dusyanta's acts are well known
says
the King.
This
is
nonsense].
Danim attacchandanuarini samvutta nihi ja imassa

paccaena''
muha-mahuno hiaa-pattharassa
Sutthu.
Puru-vamsassa
hattha-bbhasam uvagada.
{Hides her face in the end of her sari and weeps).
Translation.
S'ak
When
(Aside)
such love has so changed, what use
there in bringing
Nay
this address
the Purus
me
to
It is
Yet
(Aloud)
may now
it is
for
me
repulse
am
avaricida
'
be questioned.
meet forsooth
for thee after
is
to clear
{Breaks
Scion of
union with
solemn pledge
openhearted through good nature, now to
with such words as these.
If in real
it.
me
My sweet lord
at that time in the hermitage, after a
me, that
So be
mind
to
Well, I will try.
myself.
off)
it
stranger'
truth you think I
(a-^- pa7-i
'2
gahida
'^
panao 'confidence' (pra + ni).
am
another's wife and
+ ci).
12.5.
visasadi
vavadesi
= vissasadi
'
(vi
+ suas)
cf.
dhamma
63.
pretending' {vi-Yapa-\-dis).
48.
channa "hidden."
6 paccaa (= pra^^/af/a).
patthara (cf. H. patthar) (pro + .'?<r). ablihasam
(= ahhifaiam sometimes written ahhyasam) proximity,' etc.
'
92
hence your attitude, then

a token
Gautami
alas
Why,
there
j-ôur
is
ring
remove your doubts with
will
no ring on
my
finger.
must have slipped
were worshipping the water at Saci's tirtha

S'ak
In this indeed Fate shows
One
its
power
when you
off
in
Sakravatara.
will
you
tell
Cane Bower some

water lying in a lotus- leaf cup was resting in your hand
Then
at that moment my fosterling the fawn came up.
another thing.
you coaxed
it
day then
gently that
in
the
should drink
it
But
first.
it
would not come to drink the water from your hand, as

Afterwards when I took that very
you were a stranger.

water
it
gained confidence.
" Truly,
everything trusts
Then you langhed and

its
kin,
and both
of
said
you are
forest-born."
You
What
Caitiff!
science.
look at
all
this in the light of j'our ovrn con-
other could resemble you airing
virtue, but all the while like a
Verj^ well!
Now am
hidden well
garb of
?
become a wanton, who through
in this race of Puru sought refuge with a
and a heart
the
in the grass
man
trust
of honey-lips
of stone.
Extract No.
S'auraseni.
Karpiira-manjari.
5.
Act. IV.'
The Heroine " Camphor Blossom " has been shut up
room
in the
Queen's section of the palace, but there
in a
is
subterranean passage from this room to the palace-garden.

Tlie
Queen has had the garden end
of this passage closed
up.
Sarangika enters to the King and Jester with a message
from the Queen.
Harvard Oriental
Dr. Sten
Konow
Series,
No
4.
An
oxcellont edition
Laninan, with some touches of Western apabltratnsa

Truns. pp
L'S
(if
this play
by
with Vocabulary, and also a racy translation by Prof.
1-285.
Text pp. 102-110.
93
maharao raaragadaKaaligharam anuppavittho. Ta gadua devie

vinnavidam*nivedemi. {Approaches) Jaadu jaadu bhattS.
Devi vinnavedi jadha saanisamae^ tumhe mae parinai-
Sarangika.
punjado
davva*
Jester
{Looking before her)
Esc
'
tti.
Bhodi
kiin
edam akanda-kumbhanda-padanam
King: Sarangie sabbam
vitthavena'' kadhesu.
Sara: Edam vinnaviadi. Anantaradikkanta-caduddasi-divase'^

kadua
Devie pomma-raa-mal Gorl Bheravanandena
Aani
paditthavida.^
vinnatto'"
ca
dikkha-vihi-ppavitthae
Devie
Bhanidain
guru-dakkhina-nimittam.
joisaro
ca tena " Jai avassam dakkhina dadavva, ta esa diadu.""
Tado Devie vinnattam. "Jam adisadi Bhaavam " ti

" Atthi ettha Ladadese
tena.
Puno vi ullavidam
i'^
Candaseno nama
Sa devva-nnaehim
tti.
gharini bhavissadi
Tassa duhida Ghana-sara-manjari
raa.
maragada
12.
tti.
'^
nidittha jadha esa Cakkavatti-
Tado sa maharaenaparinedavva,'*
" emerald-heap" apparently the name
an arbour, whence the king watched
'
of a seat or
Camphor-cluster' on the swing.
anuppavittho {anji+pra+vii).
2
3
Past part. caus. (vi + jna).

saamsamae " in the evening."
4 Gerundive of causal {pari + n'i), Ht. " you are to be made to marry
by me."
5 akanda
'unexpected' kumbhanda 'white gourd.' 62. Lanman
renders " shower of water-melons from a clear sky."
6
'
Causal Passive.
On
the fourteenth
day
just past.'
'
Caus. p. part, {prati+stha).
dikkha
'consecration'
vihi
pomma
'observances'
36
'
made
of rubies.'
ppavittha
(pra-\-vi.^)
begun.'
10
vinnatto 'consulted'
dakkhina present,' fee.'

" diadu Pass. Imperative
'
(ut
13
devvanna soothsayer'
1^
'
Cakkavatti
joisaro 'sorcerer'
lord
of yoga,
'
let it
be given.'
+ lap).
12
of a
= vijiiapto),
'
'
Emperor.'
^lust be married.'
{daiva-jna), nidittha {ni->rdi8).
gharini
'
wife,
94
jenagurussa'
vi
dakkhina dinna bhodi
Bhaavain "
adisadi
Guiu-dakkhina
Jester: {Laughing)
vi
bhatta
Cakka-
vi
Tado devie vihasia bhanidam
vattr kido bhodi.
Ahanica
ti.
vinnavedutu
"Jam
pesida.
dinna.
Edam
sappo, desantare vejjo
sise
tarn
^
!
Idha ajja vivaho, Ladadese Ghanasaramanjari!

de Bheravanandassa pahavo parokkho
Kim
King.
"
Sara: DevIe karidam pamad-ujjanassa* majjha-tthida-vatatarum51e Camunda adanam.^ Bheravanando vi Devie

Tag-gade*' a tak-khana-vihide
samain tahim agamissadi.
(Steps about
kodua-ghare vivaho bhavissadi
exit).
Vaassa! savvam edara Bheravanandassa viambhidam''
King.
ti
and
takkemi.
Evam
Jester:
Xa hu maa-lanchanam*' antarena
nedam.*'
anno mianka-mani-puttaliaip
ukkaram va karedi.
pajjharavedi sehalia-kusum-
"^
[Enters the magician Bhairavdnanda],
lam sa vata-taramule nibbhinnassa^' suranga-duva{Stretches out his hand to her

raasa pidhanam Camunda.
Bhaira
in worship and recites a verse in Mdhdrdstri)

is
Kah,"
and
" Victorious
vi
na niggacc-
" Snake on the head, and doctor abroad.'"
\ejjo=t'a2V/*/o
etc.
{Enters
down) Ajja
sits
hadi suranga-duvarena Kappura-manjarl.

I
gurussa
Proverb.
dinna
90.
125.
vinnavedum
to inform.
61.
^
pahavo, power {pra-hhu), parokkha=paro"A\sa.

Pleasure-garden' (pra -^^ mad) raajjha
'
44, tthida
aadanam 'sanctuary' {ayatanam) tahim
tag-gade = Skt. tad-gate, \iod\ia,=kautuka.
viambhidam
nu+idani.
I''
moon
'
'
exploit, machination' (vi
'
-^ j
125.
'.\B.
27.
rmbh).
takkemi 45.
(mrga-l').
miankamaiii
ooze
I
cans, {pra
'
moon-gem,' puttalia
-^-kitar)
40.
.sohalia
nibbhinna (nir+bhid), duvSra
statue,' pajjharavedi
(=
door
,<cphalifc5),
'
57.
ukkara
'
'
causes to
inviltitude.'
INTRODUCTION TO
95
I'RAKRIT.
[Enters Karpura-manjari making an opening in the mouth of I he

passage'].
Karpa
Bhaira
Bhaavam panamiimi
'
Uidani* varam lahasu.
Idha jjevva uvavisa.
[Karpura-manjari
Bhaira
sits
down].
{Aside) Ajja vi na edi Devi.
[Enter the Queen].
[Stepping about and looking in front of her].
Queen.
Bhaavadi Camunda [Bows.
lani
Ta kim iiedam
lani Kappilra-manjarl.
nanda) Idaip
{To Bhairavd-
vinnavladi,^ nia-bhavane vivaha-samaggini
Ta genhia*
kadua aada mhi.
Bhaira
Then looking round].
agamissani.
Vacche evam kariadu.

[The Queen steps round as
Bhaira {Laughing to
annesidum gada.
:
lam
himself)
departing].
if
Kappura-manjari-thaiiaiii
{Aloud) Putti Kappura-manjari suranga-duvarena jjeva turida-
padam^ gadua
Devie agamane puno
sa-tthane cittha.
agantavvara.
[Karpuramanjarl does
Queen.
Idamrakkha-gharam'^.
Ae, iam Kappura-manjari!
Sa ka
around aside).
sarikkha^ dittha.
vi
Vacche Kappura-manjari kidisam*' de
{Aloud)
so].
(Enters, looks
sariraiii
ipra + nam).
lahasu
116, note
uvavisa {upa + vis).
:=ucitam.
vinnavladi Caus. Pass.
genhia Gerund of genhadi (grah), vaccha
ii
(?a6/i).
{vi-\-jna).
niabhavane 'in (my) own house."

'
girl'
(=vatsa)
cf.
H. baca =
vataako.
6
'
to search.'
'
at a quick pace
cf.
7
'
75.
20.
= raksa-grham.
sarikkha
kidisam
'
like
70.
'
66, 40.
gadua
122.
sa-tthane
'
in your
own room
'
96
(In
air)
the.
(To
tti.
Kini bhanasi
maha
Ta puno
herselfj
siro-veana
'
tahiin gamissam.
samuppanna
{Enters and
looks to every side)
Hala sahio vivahovaaranaini
genhia aacchadha.
{Steps about).
[Karpuramafijarl enters and
Bhaira
aharanaim*
:
Krm una
Ghana-sara-manjari-sarauidaini
Ta puno
visumaridaiTii.
gamissaip.
Evani bhodu.
[Queen acts in pantomime as
Bhaira
as before].
Vacche Vibbhamalehe anidaim^ vivahovaaranaim
Queen: Adha im!

Bhaira
just
lam Kappura-manjari
{Looking before her)
Queen.
down
sits
lahuni
"^
if
making an
exit],
Putti Kappura-manjari tain jeva karladu.^
[Exit Karpura-manjai'i]
Queen
{Pretends
enter
to
prison-room
the
seeing
Karpura-
manjari)
Sarikkhidae vinadida''
Ae
mhi.
[Aside)
Jhanavimanena nivviggham parisappina tarn anedi joisaro.
{Alo^ld) Sahio jam jaiii nivedidara tarn genhia aachadha.
!
{Pretends
to
return to
Camunda' s
shrine
and
sees
Karpura-
Abo sarikkhada
manjari)
Bhaira: Devi uvavisa.
Maharao
vi
aado jjeva vattadi.
Extract No.
S'auraseni.
Karpiira manjari.
Act
Specimen
punning
of decadent
6.
II. (pp. 40.
style
41 and 245-6).
The Vidusaka describes
his master's love-fever.
'
siro-veana
'
headache.'
upakarana
iivaarana
(a-ni).
aharana
Imperat. Pass.
vinadida " puzzled
'
S 17.
lahuni 'quickly' {=laghu).
ornament,' visumaridn
"
forgotten,'
(nad a Pkt. root).
sumaradi
of.
jhSna
'
57.
meditatioD. magic
'
'without hmdrance' 31). vattadi 45. In such

redundant verbs " to be " we have the beginnings of the
aado vattadi of. a gaya hai, dinna bhodi
later system of auxiliary verbs,
cf. divT hai, kido bhodi cf. kivii hai.
5 44.
niv-viggham
more or
less
97
Esc piavaasso hamso via mukkamanaso,' kari via maak-
munaladando ^ via ghanaghammamilano,* dinadinna-
kliamo,^
divo* via vialidacchao,*' pabhada-punnima-cando via panduraparikkhino citthadi.
Extract No,
S'auraseni.
Act
Little Clay Cart.
bay 1902].
7.
Maid: Kadham
ajja vi ajjaa'' na vivujjhadi.
padibodhaiasain.
Maid: Utthedu''
Maid
Vasa
{Waking)
up and
Hanje,'*'
Maid:
ratti
eso pabhado.
sleepy].
Pabliadam samvuttam.
iitthedu Ajjaa!
Kadham
Amhanara
Bhodu. Pavisia
{Steps around).
[Enter VasantasenM wrapped
Vasa
Bom-
[Edition Hiranand and Parab.
6.
Vasantasena and a maid.
pabhadam samvuttam
jjeva
Ajjaae una ratti jjeva.
kahim una tumhanam
jildiaro
Vaddhamanaam samadisia pupphakarandaam
Ajjae,
"
jinnujjanam gado ajja Carudatto.
Vasa
Kim
Maid:
samadisia
Joehi
''
rattie
pavahanam, Vasantasena gacchadu
(a)
'
out of
(o)
'
thin with love-fever' {ksama), (b)
munala
* (a)
uiilana
&
'
is lit
'
spirits,' (6)
having
(Lake) Manasa.'
thin as an elephant with rut.'
'
{b)
'
wilted in the intense heat.'
57.
a lamp given in day-time.'
Note the
"
alliteration
lamp that
like a
in daylight."
<>
vialida 'vanished' (iH+gal).
Ajjaa
my
'
utthedu
'
10
left
languishing from violent ardour,'
What,
'
let
it's
her get up
night,
'
how
puppha
12
joehi
38.
(ut+stha).
is it
is
colour,
(a)
awakes
morning
(vi
'
Pabhadam
?
'
morning.'
Sarnvuttarn
'
address by a lady to
of
b) light.
+ budh).
is
Neuter.
In
masculine.
karandaa
'
basket,' jinna
harness' imperat. caus. (yuj).
impossible.
'
'
her maid.
Judiaro
(dyutakaro).
11
'
chaa
vivujjhadi
Lady.'
Hanje regular form
gambler
is
'
tti.
60.
the next sentence pabhado
Bombay
edn. radio.
old
'
(jf),
ujjana
'
garden.'
rattie as in the edition
quoted
INTRODUCTION TO TRAKRIT.
98
Vasa
Hanje,
Maid:
kahiiii
mae gantavvara
Ajjae, jahim Carudatto.
Vasa: (Embracing the maid) Sutthu na uijjhaido rattle. Ti"*

ajja paccakkham^ pekkliissam.
Hanje, kini pavittha
'
aharn iha abbhantara-cadus-salaaip
Maid
Na kevalam abbhantara-cadus-salaam.
Savvajaiiassa
vi hiaara pavittha.
Vasa
Avi samtappadi
Maid
Vasa
Oarudattassa pariano.
Samtappissadi.
Kada ?
Maid Jado
ajjaa gamissadi.
Vasa
'
Tado mae padhamam samtappidavvam.
yenha edam raanavalim.'
Haiije,
Dhudae gadua samappehi
(Persuasively)
Mama
bahiniae^
Bhaiiidavvam ca
tada tumhanain
Carudattassa gunanijjida dasi,
ajjfi
'Aha.ni Siripi.
Ta
esa tuha jjeva kanthaharanam hodu raanavall.'
Maid
Vasa
Ajjae, kuppissadi^ Carudatto ajjae dava.
Maid
Na
Gaccha.
(Taking
kuppissadi.
the necklace)
Ajjae, bhanadi ajja
mama
aharana-viseso
[Enter
Rada
I
anavedi.
Dliiida 'ajjaiittena
Na juttam mama
dlkida.''
jjeva
Jam
tti
Radanika
Ehi vaccha, saadiae
"*
edani
{Exit
and
re-enter)
tumhanam
genhidum.
janadu bhodl.'
ôith
a child].
kilamha.
=nidhyato.
pratyakmrn.
'
raana
f>
bahinia
cadus-salaam
'
having four
halls.'
Is in distress.'
jewel
'
'
kuppissadi
saadia
presented
'
'
51.
sister.'
'
will
it
Saur. has also radann.
samappehi imperat. caus.
[nam-i-r).
be angry.'
to you,'
toycart'
i.e.
the necklace.
(rfafcattfca).
kilamha
'
let
us play
'
22,
pasil-
Ajjauttf
1(>.
Child
(Mournfully)
saadiae
Rada
Radanie
Tadassa puno
navavaharo.
samivam uvasappissam.*
edae
Vasa:
mattaa
kudo amhanani suvanriddhie''^
suvanna-saadiae
Ajjaa Vasantasenaae
(Approaches) Ajjae panamami.
Radanie, saadam de.
amkida
Rada
vi
Ta java vinodemi' nam.
kllissadi.
Vasa
Kim mama
Tarn jjeva sovanna-saadiam dehi.
(Sighing despondently) Jada,
99
sariro vi
Kassa una aani darao ?

Analcandamuho anandedi mama hiaara.
^
Eso kkhu ajja-Carudattassa putto Rohaseno nama.

Ehi
(Stretching out her arms)
him on her
me
puttaa alinga.
(Sets
Anukidara anena piduno^ riivam.
lap)
Rada: Xa kevalam
riivam, silam pi takkemi.
Edina
ajja-
Carudatto attanaam vinodedi.
Vasa
Adha kim nimittam
Rada: Edina
eso
roadi.''
padivesia-gahavai-daraa-keriae^ suvanna-saadiae
Tado una tarn maggantassa

mae iam mattiasaadia kadua dinna. Tado bhanadi " Ra
danie, kim mama edae mattia-saadiae. Tam jjeva sovannasaadiara dehi " tti.
Tena a
kilidam.
Vasa
Aam
Haddhl haddhl.
mattia
'
earth' 55
H.
(cf.
supposed to speak Magadhi
is
*"
nama
pi
Bhaavam Kaanta"'
ppadi.
'
sa nida.
para-sarapattie samta-
pokkhara-vatta-padida-jala-
Rohasena the son of Carudatta

but the text here gives him ordinary
mitti).
:
Saiu-aseni.
^
viddhi=rddhi
Caus. imperat. (vi + nud).
(upa+srp).
58.
'
piduiô
97.
roadi
weeps,'
padivesia 'neighbour,' gahavai
boy.'
'
cf.
Hence the Genitive

1*
in
roda, rodasi further down, and rodissam.
kerau
raagganta Pres. Part, of
= grhapati),
keria, belonging to.
Chand Bardai's Old Hindi).

maggadi demands,' vSkt. margati (H. malig(in
'
na).
'0
Kaanta
'
Fate.'
pokkhara
38,
71,
'
vatta
'
leaf.
100
tumam
bindu-sarisehim kilasi
fully)
Child
Vasa
roda
Radanie ka esa
'
Rada: Jada,
:
purisa-bhaadheehim.
sovaana-saadiae
{Tear-
kilissasi.
Piduno de guna-nijjida
Child
ma
Jada,
dasl.
ajjaa de janani bhodi.
tumam
Radanie, aliam'^
janani, ta kisa alamkida
bhanasi.
Jai
amhanain ajjaa
muddhena muhena adikarunam mantesi. {Putting off her jewels and weeping) Esa danim de janani
samvutta. Ta genha edam alamkaraani. Sovanna-saad-
Vasa
Jada,
iam ghadavehi.'"
Na
Child: Avehi.
Vasa: {Wiping away

{Fills
kila.
Rodasi
genhissara.
with
clay-cart
tumam.
Gaccha
na rodissam.
her tears) Jada,
the
'
Jada,
jewelry)
karehi
sovannasaadiam.
[Exit Radanika with the child].
There
is
an excellent translation
Oriental Series, Vol. 9, Dr. A.
maid
sai/s
to
8.
speeches in the Little Clay Cart to
of the Jesters'
illustrate the use of long
Harvard
R5-der.
Extract No.
S'auraseni.
Two
W.
of this play in the
compounds.
the Jester
(Act
Pekkhadu
4, p. 114).
ajjo
amha-keraani
geha-duaram.
The
Jester looks
and says with admiration
majjida-kida-haridovalevanassa*
ra-citta-lihida>bhilmi-bhaassa^
'
roadi 'weeps,'
aliam
viviha-suandhi-kusumovaha-
gaana-talaaloana-koduhala-dur-
roda, rodasi further down, and rodissarn.
Cans, from v^'Cât fashion,
'
Alio salila-sitta-
67.
sitta 'sprinkled' {sic),
levana
6
cf.
smearing
suandhi
'
(cf.
(with cowdung) (upa +
'fragrant.'
picture painted.'
mako
H. gharnS ghapana).
majjida 'swept' {mrj). harida 'green,' uvalip).
uvahara 'oblation-scattering,'
hhRa=bhaga.
citta-lihida
lit.,
KH
unnamida-sisassa
dolaamantvalambid-Eravana hattha-bbha-
'
samucchida-danti-danta-
maida-mallia-dama-gunalamkidassa ^
toranavabhasidassa''
andolanalalanta-cancal '-aggahatthena
tena
via
mam
pavana-bal-
maha-raanovaraovasohina
ido ehi
'
vaharan
tti
'
torana-
sohagga-pataa-nivahenovasohidassa*
dharana-tthambha-vedia-nikkhitta - samullasanta- harida- cuda-
pallava-lalama-phatiha-mangala- kalasabhiramohaa
pasassa
''
mahasura-vakkha-tthala-dubbhejja-vajja-nirantara-padibaddha-
Va-
duggada-jana-manorahaasa-karassa'^
kanaa-kavadassa''
santasena-bhavana-duarassa sassiriada
Jam saccam
'*
!
majjha-
tthassa vi janassa baladitthim aaredi.''
gaana='sky,' tala + a(v)aloana, unnamida 'raised
high,' sisa 'head,
top.'
avalambida
'
This should be
hanging
'
bbhamaida.
Comm.
Rather
-bbhamaada.
S.
rodavida, 'made to weep' in this play,
of.
gives
bhramdgata.
bbhama(v)ida
it is
'
agitated.'
mallia-dama-guna 'festoons
of jasmine.'
'
Shining with an elevated portal of ivory.'
'
uvasohida
'
made
auspicious' pataa
radi
{vi
'
brilliant
nivahena
'
vaharantena,
flags,'
+ a + hr)], uvasohina
'
brilliant
'
'
'
by a
niultitude
'
calling' [Pres. part,
with uvaraa
raana 'precious jewels' or {maharajana)
'
'
sohagga
from vaha-
of
colouring
safflower,'
'
of
maha-
agga-hatthena
'with finger' cancala 'quivering' alalanta, 'waving to and fro' with

the andolana
5
'
swing,' from the bala
'Having both (uhaa)
its
sides
force
'
(pasa,
pavana wind.'
of the
'
charming (abhirama)
44)
with auspicious pitchers (mahgala-kalaSa) made of crystal (phatiha 19,

phadiha or phaliha would be better vide Pischel, 206) placed (nik(vediS) of the columns (tthambha)
altar or balcony
supporting (dharana) the gateway (torana), and brilliant (samullasanta)
khitta) on the
'
with head-ornaments
pSkllava).'
6
'
[passa
'
'
is
'
(lalama)
of
green inango shoots
(harida-ciida-
impossible.]
With golden door-panels (kanaa-kavada)
studded
(padibaddha)
adamant (vajja)
a mighty demon (mahasura).
closely (nirantara) with impervious (dubbhejja) [dur -vhhid']
the breast-expanse (vakkha-tthala) of
like
T
'
Which causes (kara) trouble (aasa) to poor people {d\\g-g&da,=durgata).

sas8iriad5=sa^rJA;a<a
vowel had not been used.

y
Edition has
'
M., perhaps balado

different.'
'
beauty, loveliness,'
cf.
as
if
sakkunodi=:saA;no<i.
baladditthitn
is
-ss-
'
the svarahhahti
'
which
is
impossible,
better 6aur. aaredi causal {a
bala
is
found
+ hr), majjhattha.
'
in
in-
102
Imam padhamain paottham
The maid says: Edu edu.

pavisadu
The
'
ajjo.
Jester
padhamo
and
enters
looks
Hi
about:
lii
bho
sasi-sankha-munala-sacchahao'^
paotthe
('unna-mutthi-pandurao'
Idho
vi
vinihida-
viviha-raana-padibaddha-kancana-so-
vana *-sohidao pasada-pantio^ olarabida-mutta-damehim phatilia-vadaana^ -muhacandehini nijihaantl' via Ujjainaiii.
suhovavittho niddSadi dovario.
tic* via
danena palohida na bhakkanti vaasa
Sot-
Sadahina*' kamalo-
balira
sudha-savannadae.
Adisadu bhodi.
sentence of such enormous length as this "
santasena-bhavana-duarassa sassiriada
late into English.
Ryder breaks
Dr.
sentences, of which the eighth
door
is
a beautiful thing."
is
is
Aho
Va-
difficult to trans-
up into nine separate
it
" Yes
Vasantasena's house-
(H. 0. S. vol. 9, p. 67).
Extract No.
Maharastri.
Hala's Sattasai.
Verse
Amiam
2.
"
9.
paiia-kavvaip
padhium soum a je na ananti

Kamassa tatta-tantim
kunanti, te kaha na lajjanti ?
'
paottham courtyard' (=:prakostham).

'Ha\nng the same hue as' (sa-cchahao
'
M.6. chaa, 'beauty.'
'
mutthi
'
sovana
'
'
'
''
M. chaha 'shadow,' but

*chakha from
moon, conch, or lotus-stalks.'

handful,' cunna 'lime.' (Apa. eunnau H. cuna.)
*chayakha from *chai/aka)
cf.
Pischel (255) derives chaha from

'
stairs,' 17.
rows of palaces,'
35.
'window' "where the wind comes in"
word means " wind-eye

?
nijjhnanti
"*
sntt\o=)(rotriyo.
'
{vaidi/ana).
[The English
"]
look at' (nir+dhi/ai).
niddaati
-'slumbers"
(H.
nid),
duvario
door-
keeper.'
t*
sa-dahina
tumn
rice.'
[Rdn.
hni
instr.
'with sour milk' (dadhi
cf.
H. dahi). kamala 'au-
palohida (pm-ijt6/i), bhakkanti 'eat' {hhaks). vaasa 'crows.'
rayana which
is
Sanskrit not Saurasenil.
INTEODXJCTION TO PRAKRIT.
Amia = amrto.
hium,
to read,*
'
paiia Saur. paiida,
H. parh.
This
tatta-tantim.
131.
which represents
it
soujp
by
is
12.
"to
103
kavvain50.
the reading in
tittva-cintdm in the Sanskrit version,
accordance with Gangadhara Bhatta's commentary, which
in
adds however tantravdrtam
Weber
vd.
(1870) finding the read-
In his edition
ing tamttatarnttim conjectured tantratantrim.
(1881) he read on the authority of other

(
pad-
'know'
the Kavyamala,
ananti,
liear."
= taptim).
We may
translate
on the principles
kaham,
Verse
'
tattatattira
either' practise the mys-
thought on the principles
teries of love,' or 'take

i.e.
it
MSS.
laid
down
in
of love,'
kaha =
the KamaSastra.
how.'
Satta saaijp
3.
Halena
kai-vacchalena koclia majjhaarammi
'
vira'iaim
salankarana gahanamn
The Seven Centuries of embellished verses were arranged

crore by Hala devoted to the poets."
'
from among a
K.a,i
= kavi,
a crore,'
madhya
Verse
vacchala,
95,
i.
'devoted to poets.'
39.
kodia,
'
of
majjhaara JM. majjhayara de-H word for
ua niccala-nipphamda'^
4.
bhisini-vattammi^ rehai balaa*
nimmala-maragaa-bhaana-paritthia^ samkhasutti
ua
'
vedic
Lo
Weber explained
'
y/uh,
'
whence oppam, seen

'
Pali
of.
commoner,
for bisa.
Vedic rebhati, 'crackles,'
platter.'
aatpkhasutti,
BuVI.
sataim, ivrong.
KM.
nippanda.
patammi.
W. valaa following majority

KM. -tthida, wrong.
'
pph
is
= bisini, S. bisini.
rehai,
etc., rebhdyaii, 'shines.'
'mother
bhisi ni
commoner.
of
MSS-
*û'p
.Aspiration of a sonant
vattammi = pdtre,
6.
form from the
Pischel conjectured a
in Trivikrama.
and AMg. have bhisa
rare, of a surd
as a shortened
mark, observe.'
'
wall
of
pearl.'
This
'
is
shines
bhaana,
verse
is
104
quoted by the Kavyaprakaâ and other works on
vyangya
illustrate
jjoetics to
the suggestive.
" Lo there gleams a crane quite motionless on a lotus leaf,

like mother of pearl at the edge of a platter of pure emerald."
Verse
atta! taha ramanijjam
8.
amham gamassa mandam-huam

'
lua-tila-vadi-sariccham
sisirena
atta
kaam
bhisinl-sandam
attia in Mrcch. (p, 110)
cf.
Commentators "mother-inin
the household,
*luta
for luna) vadi.
law." Apparently used to any elder lady

mother, elder-sister,
'
garden
''
= vatt).
'
Oh mother!
'cut'
lua,
etc.
H. bara
cf.
ii
{vata + ka-).
so the mass of lotuses that was so dehghtful
and the ornament
of our
made
cold has
village, the
like a
garden of cut sesamum."
Thus the lady gives a hint

meaning the pandits
As to her
to a lover.
differed.
Some
precise
said the lotus-tank
was
to replace the sesamum garden as a meeting place, as people
would be going and coming to harvest the sesamum. The

would be deserted. Another view was.
frost-bitten lotuses
that neither place was suitable.
Verse
13.
andhana-kamma-niunie
ma
jhurasu, ratta-pad^'la-suandham
muha-maruam pianto
dhumai sihl, na pajjalai
II
"Skilled in the work of destruction,"

jhurasu,
'
be angry,' ^/jvar or jur,
does not burn),
becomes
-aa-, so
this -aa- often
{pra^jval).
'
i.e.
get hot
'
in love's magic,
(because the
fire
dhumsbi = dhumdyate. The denominative -a?/asido,\aa,di = iitaldyati

Mg. ciUia d'\ = cirdyati
,
contracts
While the
mouth, fragrant
as red
to
fire
-a-
S'.
in M., etc. pajjalai
piltalas
KM.
blazes
'
can drink in the breath of thy

he
will
only smoke and not
burst into flame, for then thou wouldst blow no more.
'
alimani, wrong.
Verse
10^
amaa-maa gaana-sehara
16.
raani-muha-tilaa canda de chivasu
piaamo
chitto jehi
mamam
pi
tehim cia karehira
amaamaa
Addressed to the moon,
= ê.
said to
II
consisting of amrit.
imperat. of chivai,
chivasu
chitto p. p. p. of the same,

particle
(KM. reads
cia
touch
'
de
{^ksif).
'
a restrictive
via)
with these very hands.'
'
arambhantassa dhuam
Verse 42.
Lacchi
Maranam va
hoi purisassa
tam Maranam anarambhe

vi hoi,
dhuam,
Lacchi una na hoi
Lacclii =Lafesmi.
certainly' {dhruvam).
'
thoam
Verse 49.
pi
na
ii
nisarei
majjhanhe ua sarira-tala-lukka
aava-bhaena chahi
vi, ta
thoaiu,
'
majjhanha,
-lukka
'
'
little
'
pahia kira na visamasi
{stokam).
ii
nisarei for nisarai
ua see
mid-day,' 52.
Una
sticking to,' as explained in Skt. by
=*lukna connected with ^/lunc
aava 'heat'
(dtapa).
pahia
*chaahi
'traveller.'
forms from
contracts
visamasi
^kram
iram M. JM. visamai,
'
:
torn loose
(Pischel, 466).
chahi 'shadow,' not derived directly
^*chayakhi
from chdya, but from ^chaydki

19).
= nihsaraU)
v. 4.
or torn out'
{vi
nikkamai,
etc., 8.
to
chahi.
+ &ram).
8.
(aspiration,
(Pischel,
255).
For short vowel
adikkamasi,
etc., so
cf.
from
visama, pass, visamiadu.
At midday the shadow does not move out, even a little way
or but clings to the body
from fear of the
from the bodj^

heat
so traveller stay by me.
KM.
adopted
nisarai.
niti
ima.
Weber
rejected this as against the metre.
Later he
106
na
Verse 76.
taha viesa-vaso
vi
doggaccam maha
santavam
janei
asaTpsiattha- vi muho
jaha panaiano niattanto
'abroad'
viesa
vimuho
(yam).
sia 'desired'
jano.
doggaccam
(videka).
+ mms).
(d
panai
returning
'
'
avei
Out
emea
vi
ave
avei
'
vi
i ii
mind and
emea = evawieca
of sight, out of
a.vei=apeti.
asani-
(m + vrt).
pisuna-jana-jampiena
'
{daurya-
'beloved' {pranayi), -ano
addamsanena pemnaam
avei, aidamsanena vi
Verse 81.
'poverty'
'indifferent to, without a thought of.'
niattanto
tempt.'
II
'
'
familiarity breeds con(Pischel, 149).
suano jam desam alam-
Verse 94.
-karei, tarn cia karei
pavasanto
gamasann' ummulia-maha-vada-tthana-sariccha
pavasanto (pra +
up.'
Verse 107.
f
vada
vas).
The rendezvous
'
fig-tree
'
nj
ii
ummilia
{vata).
'
roote
cancelled.
is
Gola-ada-tthiam pecchiiina
= KM. ii.7).
gaha-vai-suarp halia-sonha
adhatta uttarium
dukh'uttarae paav
Gola = Godavari, ada

vai
= grhapati).
bank
'
sonha
'
she began
adhatta).
ii.
'
cf.
Paiâci aunusa
'
of
gaha.
commoner sunha
= 57iusa.
{d
'
if
he
will help her.
savvattha disa-muha-pasariehi
Verse 115.
=KM.
ii
-suam the son
adhatta
+ dhd. caus. fidhavai with pass, adhappai p.p.

paavie by a path.'
halia ploughman.'
'
She wishes to see
(tola),
daughter-in-law,' for
contracted from *sunuha,

'
'
le
15
annonna kadaa-laQ;gehiini
va muai' Vimjho
challini
mehehi visamghadantehini
INTRODXJCTION TO PRAKRIT.
challim
(iaa
'
'
mantle, skin.'
slope,' etc. {kataka).
The end
sam + qhat
'cloud.'
ka-
dispersing.'
'
of the rains.
mahu-masa-maruahaa-
Verse 128.
{
meha
rauai (v/wwc).
vi +
107
= KM. ii. 28). -mahuara-jhamkara-nibbhare
ranne
gai virah'akkharavaddha-
-pahia-raana-mohanam govi
In a forest
II
the buzzing of bees carried
full of
traveller's heart, the
Verse 171.
(
maiden with the
by the
maddening
zephyr there sings of love in absence
vernal
the
to
kine.
Gola-nale kacche
= KM.ii. 71).
cakkhanto
raiai
pattaim
upphadai makkado khokkei

a pottham a pittei
On
'
bank
the
pres. p.
107 above,
river,' of.
cakkhai jaksati devours,
'mustard,' rdjika H.
dai
Gola
of the
î
cf.
makkado 'ape'
rai.
deSi
phudai phidai.
pottham 'belly'
word,
'crams'
pittei
cf.
Weber
den.
-prostJiam
suggests
Weber suggests
khokkhei
'
snarls
'bench or
connection
raia
uppha-
(markata).
KM. gives -utpatati which should = uppadai.
v/sphat related to sphut,
cakkhanto
Marathi v^cakh.
'
stool.'
with
v^lDind,
"On
the bank of the Goja river, devouring the leaves of
black mustard, there leaps the monkey, snarls and stuffs his
belly."
Extract No.
Maharastri.
10.
Verses from S'akuntala.

(a)
Spring song in Prologue.
bhamarehim suumara-kesara-sihaim
odamsaanti daamana pamadao sirisakusumaim
Islsi-cumbiaim
isisi =:l.iadl>ât.
ii
'^
{ava
-^
tarns).
INTRODLCTION TO PRAKRIT.
108
Grief at S'akuntala's departure.
{b)
Ullalia-dabbhakavala maipariccatta-naccana'^mora
'
osaria-pandu-vatta
Act
(c)
muanti atpsuim va*
'^
Sakuntala reads the verse she
III.
laaoll
composed
lias
at her friend's bidding.
mama
Tujjha na ane hiaam,
una niaano diva a
ca
rattiin
nikkiva dabai baliam tuha hutta-manorahai angainiii
na ane
do not know,'
'
Williams reads kamo.
of.
No.
9, verse 1.
nikkiva 'cruel' niskrpa.
maano Monierdabai comm.
Pischel (p. 154) says, not exactly tapayati but
gives tapayati.
Marathi dabne, Gujarati dabavu, Urdu dabna to press, compress.
(M.W.
hutta
'facing'
tabei,
= tapayati).
ta,vei
i.e.
Comm.
abhimukha.'
'
baliain
Derivation
With numerals M. huttaip AMg. khutta = krtvah.
(hallyah).
uncertain.
M.W.
reads
vutta = 'yr^to. -ai gen. sing.

" Thy heart I know not, cruel one, but day and night does
Love grievously
afflict
my
limbs, whose desires are fixed on
thee."
Hamsapadika
Act V.
(d)
is
overheard singing.
Ahinava-mahu-loluvo
tumam
taha paricumbia ciia-mailjarini
kamala-vasai-metta-nivvuo
mahuara
'
loluvo
'greedy,'
mango.'
metta
Ullalia,
'
visario
Bengal
nivvuo
69.
deH word
(cf.
H.
mai doe
'
'
as-
cca.tta.^tyak(a.
'^
morl
*
'
osaria (ava+sr).
Pischel, Bengali
vrt),
M.W.
iidgalita
,
is
p. 191.)
cua
reads nivvudo
an explanation,
-kavala
Devanagari MSS. have miio.
'
mouthBoeht-
deer.'
naccana,
of.
vatta
loaf.'
mora
H. nScna.
'
version reads
peacocks.' Pischel
muanti (muc).
angaim
Boehtlingk conjectured amsu-.
Maha.
and meaning,
oaur. not
naetre
a peahen.'
jissuni via.
is
'
(nir
loha-bhavio.
has
(Pischel'.s edn.
in Pischol's edn.
lingk conjectured raia
nam kaham
iiltna, ulalna).
hence the Pkt. reading uggaHa.

ful.'
'si
version
va.
'
DevanSgari MSS. have
assiini (for
assuim) via ladsu
The reading above amsuiin va laao

amsu,
40, G4.
aa.
12.
suits
"
dialect,
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKIUT.
which
is
mahuara
Saur.
He
vimharido.
vimhaa,
S'.
vimharia),
visario
supports this
But
etc., cf. 47.
visaria.
bee.'
'
sumarida
-ido
JM.
by which
32,
M. has
visaria,
vissariya,
The past
Hindi bisarna.
cf.
iii.
not M.
is
(JS. visarida,
M.W. has
forgotten.'
'
Vararuci
bj'
109
part,
dialectic
active
is
in
meaning.
Act VI.
(6)
Arihasi
(MW. p. 230, P. p 120).

me cuahkura dinno Kamassa
gahiacavassa
saccavia-juai-lakkho paiicabbhahio saro
gahia = Saur. gahida, cava 'bow.'

ssbccava,!
= satydpayati
yuvati.
pa>nca,
'make
+ abhy-adhika.
arihasi houip he has hohi

" Thou art offered by me
jana,
'
cf.
Oh
Megh.
8.
'
saccavia, past part, of
true, verify, contract.'
houm
M.W.
to be.'
'
"
juai
differs, for
and begins with turn
be,'
to
houm.
mae
si
for saccavia the easier pahia-
pathika-vanitdh.
mango-sprout, given by
me
do thou become the best arrow
to
Kama
grasping his bow,
of his five,
with contracted
maidens as thy mark."
Maharastri.
Extract No.
11.
Mrcchakatikam.
(a)
(Verse 19).
Vicalai neurajualam, chijjanti a mehala mani-kkhaia
valaa a sundaraara raanankura-jala-padibaddha.
neura, regular Pkt. for Skt. nupura; from a form *nepura

Pkt.
keyura,
cf.
k\xdbidi
(6)
(khac).
Act
II.
keiira.
(P. 126).
Karnapiiraka (verse
pass.
chijjanti,
sundaraara =Saur. sundaradara.
(chid).
raana51.
20).
Ahaniilna sarosam tam hatthim Viipjha-sela-siharabham
moavio mae so dantantara-samthio parivvajao.

ahaniiina gerund (a -i-^w).
edition reads " saila "
gr.
60].
moavio past
rivvajao 'mendicant.'
which
part,
Virajha, 35.
is
sela
= iat7a
not Prakrit, vide
causal
(muc).
thio
[H. P.
Pischel,
38.
pa-
INTRODUCTION TO l^RAKRIT.
110
(c)
Act IV (verse
The Vidusaka mocks
30).
at Vasantasena's
mother.
sihu-surasava-mattia
eavattham gaa
hi attia,
marai ettha attia,
jai
hoi siala-sahassa-pajjattia.
sihu
drink
'rum'
sura
{sldhu).
made from uncooked
'
wine, etc'
asava
intoxicating
'
vegetables and water,'
toddy.'
'
eavattham = eâ + auas^âm. attia 'mother,' vide M.W. Die.

sub atta, apparently a non-aryan word, pajjattia sufficiency
'
'
{parydptikd).
" She would
make
good meal
for a
thousand
Texts read gada and bhodi, these are Saur. forms.
jackals."
Extract No.
Maharastri.
12.
Karpuramaiijari.
(a)
Act
11.
Verse
10.
nisasa hara-latthi-sarisa-pasarana candan-uccodakari,
muhammi
cando dehassa daho, sumarana-sarana hasa-soha

anganain pandu-bhavo diaha-sasi-kala-koraalo
kiiii
ca
tie
niccani baha-ppavaha tuha, suhaa, kae honti kullahi tuUa.

['* eslatthi a lathi, also a necklace string
nisasa sigh.'
cape Hke pearls from off their string " Lanman.] uccoda' wither'
ing.'
or
'
cut
grow
meaning not certain
na-sarana " has
= subhaga.
kulla
'
'
throws out
cando
of the sighs,
memory
mean
cut is said to
Perhaps the sandal
small.'
owing to the moist heat
fi\iha,a.
as its refuge."
river-canal.'
'
'
split off'
fragrance
'
sumara-
fierce.'
tuha kae 'for
tulla
'
equal
to.'
tiiee."
bJiha
(vide p. 84).
(6)
The Jester's rejoinder. (Verse 11.)

Param j6nha nnha, garalasariso candana-raso,
kliaa-kkharo hilro, raani-pavana deha-tavana,
raunair banali,
varittha
jonha 'moonlight.'
wound.'
khara
jalai'
a jala-dda tanu-laa
jam dittha kamala-vaana sa su-naana.
'
unha 47.
alkali,'
^5am.
garala
khaa
'poison.'
-tavanil (top),
jalai
'
'
blazes.
INTROnUCTION TO PRAKIUT.
jala-dda 'running with water.'
varittha
'
Ill
tanu-laa 'body-creeper,' 12.
the choicest maid.'
Note the internal rhymes.

Verse
(c)
25.
Nisagga-cangassa
manina jaccana
vi
nisagga 'nature'
jabi
canga
'
manusassasohasamummilaibhiisanehirn
hiraehim vihGsane laggai ka vi lacchi.
vi
manlua
good.'
{d)
cf.
manlnani, gen plur.
for
gen. plur. 'genuine' (jdtya).
" liandsome,"
caiiga
(ni + srj).
Pan-
jaccana,
lacehi laksml.
Describes the swinging of the Heroine.
(Verse 32.)
Rananta-mani-neuram jhana-jhananta-hara-cchadam
kanakkania-kinkini-muhala-mehala-dambaram
vilola-valaavali-jania-manju-sinja-ravam
na kassa mana-mohanara sasi-muhia hindolanani.

ran to
kana-kkan
jhanajhan
tinkle.'
'
to ring
'
'mass-noise.'
Lanman
-muhi 'moon-faced maiden.'

as " a
'
tour de force
Even the
(e)
'
chada mass-lustre.'
to jingle.'
'
muhala 'noisy'
kinkini 'bell.'
(kvan).
'
dambara
26 mukhara.
'
sinja
describes
sasi
this stanza
words,"
in the use of imitative
Jester waxes eloquent,
'jingle.'
p. 255.
and describes the swing-
ing in eight verses concluding
(Verse 40),
la eai vilas-ujjalaim dola-pavanca-cariaini
kassa na lihai va citte niuno kandappa-cittaaro

ia
thus
'
related to
play,' prapanca.
(/)
Act
citta
iti.
'
eai
heart.'
= Saur.
edaim,
citta-aro
'
pavafica
'
dis-
picture- maker.'
III, Verse 2.
Maragaa-mani-guttha hara-latthi vva tara

bhamara-kavalianta malal-malia vva
rahasa-valia-kantham
tia ditthi varitthi
savana-paha-nivittha
guttha
'strung'
(gumph).
sucked.'
anta 'end.'
round.'
savana'ear'
manasam me
tara
pavitthaii
bright.'
rahasa 'impetuously.'
{iru).
pskha,
= patha.
kavalia
'eaten,
valia 'turned
112
(g)
The Heroine's
Verse 31.
cotuposifcion.
Mandale sasaharassa gorle danta-panjara-vilasa-corae

bhai lanchana-mao phurautao keli-koila-tulam dharantao.
sasa-hara
'
hare-bearer
["appears
bright'
in
= moon."
phurantao 'manifest' (sphur.)

(h)
danta 'ivory.'
bhai
'is
-mao 'antelope.'
beauty"],
its
all
-tulam 'likeness.'
" Bharata-vdkyam.'^
Act IV, Conclusion.
Anudiahain viphuranto manlsi-jana-saala-guna -vinasa-aro

rittattana-davaggi viramau kamala-katakkha-varisena.
manisi
'
rittattana 'emptiness
clever, learned.'
davaggi 'forest
fire.'
Kamala = Laksm!.
Poverty.'
katakkha side-long
'
varisa 'rain' 57.
glances.'
Extract No.
Maharastri.
13.
Ratnavali
(a) Act I.
Madanika sings.
Kusumauha-piya-duao maiilaia-bahu-cuao
sidhilia-mana-ggahanao vaai dahina-pavanao.

viraha-vivaddhia-soao kankhia pia-ana-melao
padivalanasamatthao tammai juvai-satthao.

iha
padhamam mahumaso janassa liiaaim kunai mauaim

vijjhai kamo laddha-ppasarehim kusuma-banehim.
paccha
vaai
dahina
blows.'
'
'
south,'
dakkhina becomes *dakbina
by lengthening the vowel, hence dahina by

kankhia 'longed
and H. ddhinii
riuht.
valana
asamatthao
(pal),
'makes,'
ti)
35.
'
paccha 38.
maiia' tender' (wrrfM).

latldha-ppasara
'
'
Deccan'
pia-ana 'lovers,'
for.'
satthao
unable.'
Cf.
13.
'
troop.'
kunai
vijjhai (vtrfAt/o
unimpeded.'
''The south wnid blows, sweet messenger of Love, making
many a mango
With pangs
blossom, and dissolving
increast-d
their lovers, a troop of ladies
defence.
mortals'
First
is
of sulky temper.
for
union with
fauit with love, incapable of
comes the month
hearts, then
lits
by separation, longing
of
sweetness and softens
Love wounds them with
his
flowery
arrows unimpeded."
The Magician.
Act IV.
(fe)
113
Panamaha
calane indassa indaalammi laddhanamassa,
taha ajja-Sambarassa vi maa-supadi tthia-jasassa.
(Deva) kini dharanle miaiiko
mahiharo
tiase
jale jalano,
niajjhanhamini paoso, davijjaii dehi anattim.
panamaha,
for
Skt
jasa
iraperat,
neut.
indrajala
aasa
'renown.'
+ nam).
{pra
jalano
'sky.'
" Revere
'
nom.
ace. plur.
padi-tthia {prati + stha)
'illusion.'
davijjau, imperat. pass. cans, {da)
demanded.'
calane,
{jval)
let it
majjhanha
52.
be caused to be given-
anattiin (a + ;na).
who takes his name from

sorcery, so also those of worthy 8ambara whose renown is well
Wliat shall it be? moon on the
established by his masic.
the deeds
of
Indra,
ground, earth in the sky, or flames in water

give your
(c)
Kim jappiena bahuna

Uhum,
jain
tarn tain dainsemi ahain
mahasi
(d)
or dusk at noon
commauds."
'
jam
liiaena
mahasi sanda-
guru no manta-ppahavena.
desirest.'
Hari-Hara-Bamha ppamuhe deve damseini devaraain
gaanammi
Bamha,
cf.
ca-
Siddha-Vijjahara-bahu-satthain ca naccantam.
deve. ace. plur.
52.
very little Maharastri in tliis play. Note its

and the great contrast with the decadent Camphor
Cluster which uses the same motif of the magician producing
[There
is
simplicity,
a vision of the Heroine,
Bk.
I.
bringing on the lady herself],
Extract No.
Maharastri
Setubandha
b}'
or
Verse 57.
14.
Ravanavaho.
How
the
monkeys
crossed
the
mountain
streams.
Bolanti a pecchanta padima-sanikanta-dhavala-
ghana-sainghae
phuda-phadiha-sila-saiiikula-khaliovari-patthie via
naippavahe
i;
114
^bol
pass, cross,'
'
= S'. pekkhadi
ma-sa)iikanta
S*.
khalida.
cf.
satngliae, ace. plur.
'reflected.'
M. pecchai
passes (the time).'
'
pecchanta, nom. plur. pies. part,
40.
bolei
patthia=
S'.
patthida (pra-stha).
86.
padi
khalia
-ppavahe
= pra-
vdhdn.
" And they cross the streams

ing masses of white clouds, as
that they see
ol rivers
if
trickling through
reflect-
and run-
ning over a welter of clear crystal rocks."
The waves splash on high
Bk. VII. Verse 56.
drop
in the
as
tlie
monkeys
mountains.
Uttlianghia-duma-nivaha giri-gha'-uvvatta-mucchia-
maha-maccha,
vela-sela-kkhalia
M. uttambia,
(ut
56.
This
is
uvvatta (ud +
vrt).
+ stambh).
uttambida.
S'.
mucchia 'stunned,' maccha

pass of hhid.
bhijjanti uahi-jala-kallola.
Co mm. = uttamhhita
utthahghia.
regularly in
uddham
kkhalia (skhal).
bhijjanti
uahi 'ocean.'
" Supporting a multitude
of trees, with
might}' fish turned
over stunned by the impact of the mountains, the ocean billows
break on high checked by the rocks of the shore."
Bk. VIII. Verse
The sea
3.
subsides.
Giri-sainkhoha-vimukka jhina appatta-padhama-gaman-oasa
mand-andolana-maiia gaagaa ccia samudda-salila-upplda.
samkhoh a = samfcso6/ia. vimukka(w + mwc). jhina

oasa = ayoââ.
(a + pra-i-ap) padhama 20.
patta
mrduka.
"The
ccia
'
like.'
uppida
jets of sea-water
'
40.
ap
maiia^
bursts'.
when
freed from the shock of the
mountains do not mount so high as before, but subside, and

oscillate in a slow
Verse
6.
and gentle swing."
Mingled spoil of land and sea.
Motta-gl'adanta-kusuinaiii
saraa-maragaa-vattft-bhanga-
bhariavattatn
vidduma-milia-kisalaarn
sammai
salilam.
sa-sankha-dhavala-kamalarn
pa-
INTRODCCTION TO PRAKRIT.
motta
ghadanta, pres. part,
'pearl.'
115
(ghaf)
'being joined
vatta
avattain
emerald
leaf.'
maragaa
12.
vidduma coral.' pasaramai (pra + iam).
(d + vrt).
"Quiet grows the water, blossoms united with pearls, the
whirlpool filled with fragments of leaves and emeralds, buds
witli.'
'
'
'
'
mingled with coral, white lotuses with the Triton's shells."
Weariness
Verse 14.
workers
the
of
(Sugriva
speaks
to
Nala).
Khavio vanaraloo duratthia-virala-pavvaam mahi-vedhain

na a disai seu-vaho, ma hu namejja guruarn puno Ramadhanuni.
Khavio exhausted {ksap caus. of ksi). pavvaa mountain.'

earth.' vedha = vesta enclosure 38, cf, M. vedhia, S'aur.
vedhida, Comm. gives the meaning a,s mahi-prstham. disai =
'
mahi
'
'
'
'
-va,ho
dr^yaie.
= patho.
namejja, opt. 3rd person sing, or plur.
The Comm. is uncertain whether -dhanum is nom. or ace.

may Rama's bow not bend,'
(a) Nom. then neuter,
{b) Ace. Met not him (i.e. Rama) bend Rama's bow.
Comm.
'
suggests naynayata but namejja is not 2nd person plural.

" The monkey-people are exhausted, the surface of the earth
has mountains
Bridge
the
is
left,
but few and far between, yet the mole
not in sight,
of
Rama's bow bend
so let not
'
heavily again.
Verse 20.
Nala's reply.
Khavio pawaa-nivaho
samuddo.
dalia
va rasa alam dhuo vva
va sambhavana tuham
jiam va pariccattam ajja

nivviidha.
pariccattam {pari +
ajja
"
one
Comm. would
Comm.
va
is
affirmative.
After
prefer to read vi.
multitude of mountains has been exhausted, the surface
of the earth
despaired
'
tyaj).
may
Comm.
of,
but
be torn up, the sea
now must your
says samudra-tidanaya,
chastise the
monkevs.
'
may
be agitated, and
life
design be carried out."

to
chastise
the
sea
"
rather
to
116
The Raksasas show

Bk. XI, Verse 61,
Rama's severed head.
Sita a vision of
p. 345.
Pecchai a sarahas-oharia-mandalaggahighaa-visama-cchinnani
dura-dhanu-samghiaiicia-sara-punkhaliddha-samahaavarigam,
mandaldgra scimitar.'
oharia, past part, (ava + hr).

(abhi
'
+ han).
sa,mghiai,hcia,
shaft of arrow.'
corner
'
17.
'
= samhita
aliighaa
sara-punkha
aiicita ^ 65.
ahddha (a + lip) =*aligdha. avamga 'eyeThe object of pecchai comes in verse 69.
" Rama-sirara."
"And
human head)
Sita saw (a
rudely lopped, hacked
off
with a scimitar's stroke, the corners of the eyes darkened by
bow and drawn
the shaft of the arrow set to the
Verse 62.
far
back."
nivvudha-ruhira-pandura-maiilanta-ccheamasa-pelHa- vi varani
bhajjanta-padia-paharana-kantha-cchea-
dara-lagga-dhara-cunnam,
niv-vvid\iSb {iiirvyudha).
chea
71.
Comm.
part,
'
the cut.'
gives the
"The
'
is
'budding
lit.
'
{muhula)
through *pelia *peria =prerita.
pellia
meaning
from bhajjai
maiilanta
as mudritam, 'sealed up.'
dara
broken.'
'
bhajjanta
cleft.'
dust of the sword-edge clung to the cleft hewn in
neck where the weapon

bloodless flesh at
tlie
fell
its
breaking in pieces, while the pale
wound had
shrivelled
and sealed the hollow
thereof"
niddaa-samdatthahara-miil-ukkhitta-dara-
Verse 63.
dittha-dadha-hiram
samkhaa - sonia paiika - padala

-
purenta-
kasana-kantha-ccheaiii
saindattha (sam + dam^).
niddaa 'ruthless.'
adhara.
ukk-
dadha 'tusk,' 65. samkhaa Comm. = sawhitta (m<

yfcMp).
slyana 'coagulated' from the rare root styai. Rather from a
+
past part, sam-styata through *sarnskydta.

'
'
tooth of
adamant
base of the lower
neck-wound
lip,
is filled
is
knaa,nii
ruthlessly bitten through,
with a
= krs)m.
seen through the gaping rent at the
muddy
iilm of blood
and the dark

congealed."
117
nisiara-kaa-ggahama-nilada-ada-nattha-
Verse 04.
bhiudi-bhumaa-bhangam,
galia-ruhir-addha-lahuam anahia-uinmillataraani
Ramasiram
kaaggaha 'hair-seizing'
n\s\-a.rsi=*niiicara.
{kaca-).
ania =
ania nilada 'forehead' also nalada, Pali nalata or lalata and

with metathesis M. nadala or M.
260).
AMg.
occurs.
really
(P.
an.Simi\ia.
"The frown
which
The forms bhuudi huudi Pischel says

anahiaa means
124). bhumaa 'brow.'
amilita.
a,na,d\h.Sir a,
that furrowed
adirgha.
brows had faded from
its
broad forehead, for the demons brought
it
hair lighter by half with the blood poured

open but devoid
of soul
its
with a grip of the
forth, with its orbs
the liead of Rama."

Sita's
Verse 75
= bhr-kufi,
bhigudi.
are incorrect.
ahr daya cL
Apa. nidala (Pischel
nidala.
Comm. =b7irukuH
bhiudi
lata,
S'.
Lament.
(p. 350).
Avaa-bhaaaram cia na hoi dukkhassa darunam nivvahananimahila-vihatthamditthamsahiamcatuhamaeavasanaip.
jaip
Avaa, = apata.
{caiva
also cea.
hiam
'
'
cia
ci,
(AMg.
means
eva:
vlhattham = 6t6/ia^sam.
sa-
ciya), ccia after vowels
ney a, z=7iaiva).
endured.'
Though
terrible,
if
end of sorrow is not so

can view a sight loathsome to women and endure
frightful in its onset the

I
thy death.'
Sita not
knowing that the
should continue to exist.
vlhattham to mean
Verse 7(\
'
vision
The
is
unreal, marvels that she
commentary takes mahilaamong women.'
a cause of reproach
valiunbani tujjha ure jani mocchihirai
sainthiam
maha
tti
hiae,
ghara-niggamana-paattam sahasu tani
vaha
or
incorrect,
ko
it
kammi nivvavijjau dukkham ?

baha = "tear." unham 'hot.' Text
has uhnani,
tujjha this oblique base of tuaiii survives in H. tujh
comes from ^tuhyam analogous
to
mahyam.
ure
loc. of
118
uro
'
breast/
loc.
imperat. 'let
"It was
S'aur.
Fut.
kassim.
my
Now
my
imperat. ids.
+ vap)
(nir
pass,
tumain
my
"
?
dacchami
jiviam kaha vi mae,
mae
tarn esa
leaving
of
grief be out-poured
dhariam
tujjha
tti
moment
the
sorrow with hot tears on thy
me, where shall
tell
virahammi
Verse 77.
moccham.
also
'tell'
niv-vavijjau
heart from
would dissolve
muc,
of
sahasu
be poured out.'
it
fixed in
home, that
breast.
mocchihimi.
paattam = prat;rf<am.
thia 12.
kammi
'
manoraha
dittho phalia vi
na piirenti mahatp.
dacchami
and dacchani
'I shall see,' also dacchirai
kaha
uses pekkhissam.
= A:ai/iam
vi
apt, kahaiii
Saur.
commonef.
is
Final anusvara in pronouns and adverbs tends to be optional.
So
maham = maha,
Hemacandra,
= eso.
esa
esa
sa on the other hand
for all genders,
"In separation from thee my
Now
thought of seeing thee.
though bearing
fruit bring
used freely, according to
is
life
see
is
rare.
was barely stayed by the

thee thus,
my
desires
no satisfaction."
Puhaviahohii pal bahu-purisa-visesa-cancala Raasiri,
Verse 78.
kaha ta maliain
cia
imam nlsamannain
uatthiani
vehavvani.
Puhavl
common
in
Saur. Pudhavi,
Earth,'
M.
pal
= pa/i7i.
vehavvam
uatthia (iipa + sthd).
"Of
fickle
the Earth there
with
many
me
widowliood on
hohii "
will
will
be."
'ta
in
Ta
= Vedic
are
tat.
widowhood.'
Royal Fortune
be a Lord.
distinguished
alone?
'
forms
oblique
men, so
why
falls
is
absolute
"
[Earth and Royal Fortune are regarded as the other wives

of
Rama.
'
Absolute,'
lit.
having nothing
in
common
(witli
those other two).|
Verse 79.
Kim
ea
tti
visa-ummillehi
loanehi
mae phudam Naiia tuha muham
ti
palattani
ditthaiti,
vialia-lajjae
paruniiain.
INTRODUCTION TO PKAKPaT.
earn
ti
(Saur.
edam
ti) is
meaning visama
visa
ummilP.
vialia (vi
more usual,
119
= *pralaptam.
palattam
reading should apparently be visani-
phuda
gal),
38.
parunnam
(pra + rud)
by analogy with bhid hhinna: chid, chinna,
jjast. part,
etc.,
Saur. rudida.
"
'
What
is
this
'
thy face,
my
cried,
and looked with obliquely opened
modesty aside
eyes, then casting
shrieked.
Sahio tujjha vioo raani-arihi
Verse 80.
Clearly
it
is
lord."
vuttham
datthum tumani
hottam
ti
samaam
jai
va
sahihi
ettahe
vi
jiviam
vialantam.
vioo 'separation'
vuttha,m
9.
= *vyustam
'
thum =c^ra5/Mm. hottam = hontam pres. part,

(Comm, = iddnlm) cf ettio so much ? *ettadrse
,
of.
dawned.'
of hoi.
ettahe
*ettaise *ettahe
Apa. taisa for tarisa and M. divaha for divasa.
and vialantam are used
dat-
Hottam
in the sense of the conditional, cf. the
Hindi usage, agar hota.

" Separation from thee
friends
it
onlj' to see thee,
Verse 81.
endured with female demons as
dawned with the
Jae
stars
my
then would
life
as
it
melt away."
tumammi
paraloagae
companions were
vavasaa-matta-suha-
daddhavve
mahara dajjhai adittha Dahamuha
-vaham hiaam.
liarisa-chane vi
matta = ma/ra commonly metta

vya.
-chane
Comm. sthdne
this
we should read harisa-cchane.

rally
means
'festival,'
69.
daddhavva = c?ras/a-
should be (t)thane, or perhaps
chana = ^saa, but
'moment'
being
khana
this gene-
(Pischel,
322).
"Now
that thou hast gone to the other world, and I
see thee with joy
that joy
my
though only through tribulation,
may
in place of
heart burns, not to have seen the slaying of the
Ten-Headed demon."
INTRODICTION TO PRAKRIT.
120
Vaham na
Verse 82.
rumbhai
dharei
muham
asabandlio
vi
me
na
hiaatp.
navari a cintijjante na vinajjai kena jiviam sam-
ruddhajp.
rumbhai means runaddhi {rudh forms rundhai)
this is
from
a root *ruhh, analogous to Wbhhai = lihyate from a root *libh

(Pischel 266, 507).
navari " tliereupon," some say from
na pare, Pischel disputes
this (P. 184)
cintijjante pres. part. pass,
"My
my
what my
heart,
and when
life is
restrained."
cf.
iiavarani
it is
only."
bond
of
hope does not
considered,
it
is
not seen by
maranam
Bolino maara-liaro majjha kaena
Verse 83.
vinajjai pass, (vi + jna).
face bears no tear, even the
stay
pi
de
padivannam
nivvudham Naha tume
ajja vi dharai akaannuaip
maha hiaam.
Bolino 'passed.'
from melai
vannam
(mil),
'
akaannua
{prati + pad),
"For my
cf.
savvannu
sake thou didst cross the
Thou
death.
Form appears to be pres. part., cf. melina

home of sea-monsters.* padi-
maara-hara
hast gone
my
lord,
G9.
ocean and incur thy
and yet
my
ungrateful heart
survives."
Uggahihi
Verse 84.
tti
Rama tumam
gune ganeiina purisa-maio
jano.
galia-maliila-sah avail! sanibhariiina a

liii
uggahihi
'
Fut. caus.
mamain
niatti-
kaham.
will sing.'
(ni-^-vrl).
ganeuna counting, gerund, niattiliii

bhariuna 'remembering' gerund from
bharai; *mbharai *mhiirixi =smnrati Saur. sumaredi, sumaria.
kaham
'
" Folk
story.'
will sing of thee,
Rama, counting thy virtues as of on*me that missed a woman's
nuvde of valour, and remembering
nature they
will
change the story."
121
Tuha banaukkhaa-nihaam dacehimmi Daha-kantha-
Verse 85.
muha-nihaam
kaa,
ti
bhaadhea-valia vivara-hutta manoraha
maha
pal-
hattha.
ukkhaa for ukkhaa destroyed.' nihaa {ni + han). dacchimi

nihaa
or dacchami have better authority (see v. 77 above),
- nighata. vivara = vi + pardn hutta Comm. = mukhd, this has
the same meaning, but the form is like AMg. khutta for krtva
'
as with numerals (Pischel
times, endless-ly
ess
pallattha
lasta
(r
206)
cf.
AMg. ananta-khutta
k becomes kh becomes h,
'
;
Comm. =paryasta
palhattha,
5519.
assimilates y and
'
end-
cf. iiihasa
'upset,' but that would be
becomes
palhattha = *praA-
I),
from root hlas hras to diminish.

see Ten-necks with
I might
" Those wishes of mine, that
smashed, destroyed and struck down by thy arrow,

have gone awry reversed by destiny and come to nought.'-'
his faces
Jam tanuammi
Verse 86,
virahe pema-bandhena sankai
vi
janassa jano.
tarn jaaip navara iraaru peccliantie a tarisam maj-
jha phalam.
tanua
navara,
'
short.'
pema- =premd',
pemma
Comm. =kevalam, means "only,"
above, Pischel's objection
param 'no more,'
i.e.
is
commoner
cf.
68.
navari v. 82
184) to the derivation from
na
that the anusvara appears to be secon-
dary, is not conclusive.

" What a body dreads through love of another, even in a
tiny separation, such a dread result has
me
Bk.
come
to pass for to
only gazing at this sight."
XV. Verse
14.
Happy
return to Ayodhya.
Ghettuna Janaatanaam kaiicana-latthim va hua-vahammi
visuddham
patto purim Raghuvai
kaum Bharahassa sapphalam
anu-
raam.
Ghettuna taking
'
equation
with
yasti
'
cf
is
ghettuin
curious.
136.
latthi (Hindi latlii) the
kaum = S'. Mg. kadum
Saur.
122
sapphalam, Comm. =saphalam, but
has karidum.
also
would be saphalam 5) rather = sai-phalam.

" Taking Janaka's daughter, purified in the
Raghupati arrived at the
of gold,
this
Bharata's loving kindness
Extract No.
Jain Maharastri.]
fire like
good
city, to give
a staff
fruits to
15.
Mandiya.
[Jacobi's Selected Stories, No. IX.]
Vennayade nay are

na-pasatto
c^si.
Maiulio
'
ya
so
janu-desena niccam
nama
tunnao'^ para-davva-hara-
duttha-gando mi-tti jane pagasento

adda'valeva
eva
baddha-vana-
littena
patto' raya-magge tunnaga-sippam uvajlvai.
cakkamanto
vi
ya danda-dharienam paenam kilimmanto kahamci cakkamai.*
davvajayam ghettuna nagara-
rattim ca khattam khaniilna
sannihie ujjan'ega-dese bhumi-gharain tattha nikkiiivai.^
tba ya se bhagini
Vennayada
The
Bennayada {Bernatada) a town
tat-
bhilmi-gharassa
in
Western India.
y in this section represents the laghuprayalnayakara y not th

{vide p. 9) nayara, hence in many modern names -nair, -net.
tunnao or tunnago appears
tiirna
a.s
" shows"
in
turna-ga a
'
mean a beggar with an

'
'
implication
pagasento pres. part, of pagasei
swift goer.'
For k
(pra-^kaii).
duttha
to
Exact derivation uncertain, but evidently connected with
of rascality-.
g compare AMg. Asoga
duHa.
gando has a variety

ing "cheek," "pimple," "rhinoceros";
s
tassa
citthai.
letter
strong
2
or
kannagil
meanings
of
( 11).
in Sanskrit includ
for Prakrit Hemacandra

vanam ('abundance'?) danda-pasiko M.W. 'policeman,' Jacobi.
this
passage)
'
nightwatchman.'
(Probably
'beggar'.
slang).
gives
(for
laghu-
mrgo (?) and napitah barber.' adda damp (ardra). avaleva ointment
(ava + lip). litta 'smeared.'
vana 'wound' (vrana). -patta 'bandage'
whence pattika modern patti. This context suggests that dutthagando
is bahuvrihi ami means
one with a bad boil.' Tho trick is still familiar
'
'
'
'
enough.
*
goos in
cakivamai
circles,'
manto pres. part, kilimmai

khattam hole.' -jaya
f>
'
ity' (sam-^nidha).
'
'wanders.'
gets weary
(;5/a)
'
pacna
"quantity."
egadesa "portion,"
witli his foot.'
Kiliui
(klam).
cf.
11.
-sannihie
'in
tlie
vicin-
INTRODUCTION TO TKAKRIT.
majjhe kuvo.
jain ca so coro
davva-vodharam
123
davvena palobheuin sahayain

bhagim agada-sanaive puvva'
anei, tain sa se
natth'-asane nivesium paya-soya-lakkbena pile genhiuna tainmi
kuvae pakkhivai.^
ram
cora-ggaha tam
ipusantassa.
nayare bahu-ravo
Muladevo
kahio ya tassa
jao.''
paurehitn
tao
puvva-
raya
takkara-
ettha nayare pabhuya-kalo musantassa vattai
takkarassa,
kassai
sakkenti genhiuiii
iia
tattha ya
jao.^
bhaniya-vilifinena
vaiyaro, jaha
evani kalo vaccai* naya-
tao so vivajjai.^
na ya
tahe so
kirppi uvayani.
kenai
tirai
genhium.''
kareu
ta
annam nagar'arakkhiyam
tbavei, so
Miiladevo sayam nilaMuladevo anajjanto egae

sabhae nivanno acchai Java, so Mandiya-coro agantum bhanai
Muladevena bhaniyam aham kappadio
ko ettha acchai ?
na sakkai coram genliiuni.
vi
padam pauniuna
tahe
rettim niggato.**
**
bhannai
tena
manusam
ehi,
Muladevo
karemi.'"
egammi isara-ghare khattam khayain."
nineuna Muladevassa uvariin cadaviyam.''^
payatta nayara-
palobheum from palobhei "entices, allures" causal (pra
'
form
=^
infin.
agada Pkt. word "well," 'spring."

"perishes"
(ni-k-vis).
soya
nattha
'placed'
washing'
'
lubh)
(nyasta).
{-âuca).
vivajjaii
vaccai "goes, passes," generally referred to vraj (a case of c for
{vi->rpad).
but Pischel thinks possibly from vratya so = " tramps "

be a simpler explanation,
6
Sakkenti.
-vihana
-vaiyaro
From
manner
'
'
story
'
(cf.
Pischel, Gr.
*vrtyate
j).
would
202) H. bacna.
sak either sakkei or sakkai.

"
{vi dha).
[vyatikara).
kassai (kasya +api).
tirai pass,
from
tf.
accomplished.'
is
pauniuna
anajjanto 'unknown' pres. part, of najjai
niv&nno
-\-
used as gerund.
nivesium gerund of causal
utthio.
su-vahum davva-jayaiu
480.
''^
'
'
'*'
'
putting on
{m+ pad),
He
(pra+v?) paunomi, p.p

'stays'
60.
quotes the other theories),
kappadio
isara
acchai
'
'
rich
pilgrim,' karpatika.
'
p.
is
paunia.
known
pass.
'
Pischel refers to
_rcc/ia<i
Una),
(Gr
aganturn gerund.
bhannai pass,
of bhanai.
man.
cadavia past part. cans, from cadai which Hemacandra represents by
a + rw/i.
(cf.
H. cafh-na).
suvahum
subahum.
124
Muladevo purao, coro asimi kaddhiena'^ pitthao

coro tarn davvam nihanium
vahiriyam.'
sampatta bhumi-gharam.
ei.
ya
bhaniya
araddho.
paya-soyaiii dehi
nena bhagini
tae kuva-tada-
eyassa pahunayassa
-sannivitthe asane nivesien
kuve chuhami-tti.^ Java

sukumara paya, tae nayam, jah' esa koi anubhuya-
tae paya-soya lakkhena pao gahio,

ativa
puvvâ-rajjo vihaliy'ango.''
sannio
tale
olaggo
ma
nassa-tti
tae volo kao:
tie
anukampa
paccha
marijjihisi-tti.
so palao.
so-y-asim kaddhiuna magge
nattho nattho-tti.
tao tae paya-
jaya.
Muladevo raya-pahe aisannikittham nauna caccara-
siv'antario
coro tain siva-lingam, esa puriso-tti kauin
thio.''^
kankamaena asina duha-kaum" padiniyatto gao bhumi-gliaram. tattha vasluna pahayae rayanle tao niggantuna gao
bahim.
antar'avane
saddavio.'^
tunnagattaiii
cintiyam, jalia
teiia
avassani ca esa raya

raina abbhuttlianena
raina
karei.
puio asane
mario,
purisehini
tehini
bhavissai-tti.
purisehini
nunam na
so puriso
anio.
su-vahum ca
nivesavio,''^
vahiriya=bahiriya " outside."
'
payatta =pravrltah.
kaddhia 'drawn' from kaddhai (H.
4.
lS7=krs)
krsta could give
*kattha thence *kaddha.

'^
nihanium
pahunaya 'guest' (praghurna).
tada
chuhai or chiibhai
'
'
to bury' {ni kJian).
edge.'
Heraacahdra = A.->//j
-'throws."
from
ratlier
ksubh cognate with EngHsh " shove."

"^
vihaliya {vihvalita)
'
trembling.'
sannio (samjhitah)
'
made
palao 'fled' past part,

bolo
"^
'
speech
so-y-a.sim
'
cf.
'flees.'
"
volo=bolo a cry'
kills."
in
M.
modern bolna.
'and he' (drawing
olaggo
con.sonant.
marijjai pass, of marei
a sign.'
of palayai
'
followed
'
his)
'sword' or y
is
merely a sandhi
means anulagna, but the form
is
ava or apci
*-lagna.
'0 ai-sannikittham=a<t-sam-nifc/-.;'(a?n.
chel.
II
antario
299.
'
squaro
like a
herons
beak.'
dnhS
kiiiun
{dvidha krtva).
saddSvio (sahdupitah).
1*
avana
\^
nivesavio past part, of nivesavei fuUor form of nivosei.
'
market.'
(catvara)
"
Ti-s-
hidden.'
kankamaa shaped
*
eaccara
'
luiving split
125
piyam abhasio samlatto: mama bhaginim dehi-tti. tena

kaisuvi'^
bhoga ya se sarnpadatta.
raina
Mandio
bhanio
davvena
kajjam-ti.
tena
dinesu gaesu
dinna, vivahiya raina.
'
dinnam.
sarapujio.
annaya
ya corassa ativa sakkara
sammanam paiinjai.'' eena pagarena savvam davvam davavîo.*
bhaginim se pucchai
tie bhannati
ettiya mceva
vittarn.
tao puvv'aveiya-lekkhanusarena^ savvam davvam
davaveuna Mandio siilae arovio.
davva-jayani
su-vahuin
puno maggio
puno
vi
dinnam.
raina
tassa
Mandio.
In the town Bernatada there lived a beggar
He
addicted to taking other people's property.

the beggar's art on
tlie
named Mandio
used to practise
high-road, tied up in bandages, with
show
Mouching wearily
around with his foot supported on a crutch he wandered at
random. And at night he would dig a hole (in a walli and
a smear of grease, kept always wet, about his knee, to
that he suffered from
virulent
sore.
taking a lot of property -to a baoli in a corner of a garden
near the town
unmarried
well.
would
sister.
bury
there.
it
And
there
lived
his
In the middle of that baoli, there was a
Anybody the
thief
brought with him to
having allured him therewith, the
sister
Ccxrry his loot,
would have
on a seat previously arranged at the edge
sit
down
of the spring,
and
then, taking hold of his feet on the pretence of washing them,
she would tip him into the well.
And
so he perished.
time went on while he robbed the town.
The
Thus
thief-catchers
were unable to catch him, and a great noise about
it
arose in
the town.
Now
Miiladeva had become king there in the manner
lated above.
'
The
sarnpadatta (sam+pra+da).
kaisuvi {katisu
sakkara
pagara
^
citizens told
'
'
se
'
him about the
thief;
on her.'
+ api).
favour."
paunjai
manner' {prakara).
'
employs' (pra+yui).
davavio past. part. eaus. da.
aveia past part, of aveei causal (a + vid) lekkha
'
'
list
re-
that a
126
had been
certain thief
for
some time robbing the town, and
him so
that nobody had succeeded in catching

devise some remedy.
tendent of the town police.
He
also
Miiladeva goes and
out one night.
unable to catch the
is
Then Muladeva himself put on
thief.
he should
Thereupon he appoints another superina dark cloak and went
lies
down
incognito in a
Mandio comes and

said, 'I ani a
Muladeva
here?'
it
stopping
is
says, 'Who
I
will
make
a man of 3'ou
The other said, 'Come
pilgrim.'
A hole was cut in a certain rich man's
Muladeva got up
and stays
certain hall
He
house.
They
Muladeva goes
town.
work
to
bury the
it,
of the well,
meaning
to
plunder and piled
of
for
the outskirts of the
comes up behind
in front, the thief
loot,
the feet of this guest
edge
set out
They came
with a drawn sword.

to
thief
00k out a great quantity
up on Muladeva.
it
The
there.
'
;
and he said
she set
and took hold
The
to the baoli.
his
to
him on the
well.
As
'
Wash
seat placed on the
of one of his feet as
shove him into the
thief set
sister,
if
to
wash
were very
his feet
deUcate she perceived that this was some one who had enjoyed
royalty and had sensitive limbs. She took pity on him, and
made
a sign on the surface of his foot.
slain."
"He's
After that he
fled,
made
he's fled,"
his escape.
"Flee,
Muladeva
you be
She raised a cry
and the other drew
pursued him down the road.
lest
his
sword and
was very
him on the highway, stood hidden behind a lingam in
a square. The thief mistook this Siva's lingam for a man,
split it in two with his heron-bill sword, and went back to his
He stayed there till the night grew light and then he
baoli.
came out and went abroad. He plays the beggar in the market-place.
The king sent men to summon him. He thought
to himself, "so that fellow was not killed, and no doubt he
finding
lie
close to
will
turn out to be the king."
The king
rose to greet
him, and made him take a seat.
After several friendly remarks the king said to him,
your
sister.'
He gave
was bestowed upon
her,
her.
and the king married
her.
'
Give
me
Wealtli
When
127
a few days liad passed, the king said to Mandio,
need some treasure.'
So he gave him a good quantity.
'
The
was
Then again he asked, and again it

given.
He lavishes the greatest favour and consideration on
the thief.
In this way he made him give all his wealth. He
asks his sister. She said, he had just so much property.
Then he caused all this wealth to be given away according to a
list previously announced, and Mandio he had impaled.
king honoured him.
Jain Maharastri.]
Extract No.
16.
Domuha.
[Jacobi's No. V.]
Sampai Dummuha-cariyam.' atthi ih' eva Bliarahe vase

nama puram. tattha Hari-kula-vamsa-sambhavo
Jao nama raya, tassa Gunamala nama bhariya. so ya raya
annaya atthanatie saha rajja-sirim anuhavanto gamei kalam.
Kampillani
mandava-tthiena pucchio diio:^ kim n'althi mama, jam annarainam atthi
diiena
bhaniyam
deva, citta-sabha tumha
tao raina anatta thavaino,^ jaha
n'atthi.
kareha! aesananantarara samadhatta.*
namanie kammagarehira
ano-vva
teyasa
puvvayam
bhumi-vivarao.
Sampai " now"

atthana
'
anatta
commanded
'
audience hall'
'
piiiya
theva-kalena^ vi
(samprati).
jal-
sa-harisehim
parituttha-manenam nandl-rava-
vi
jaha'riha-vattha-m-aihim.
'
tattha dharanie khan-
maha-maudo,
dittho
tena
uttario
citta-sabhain
pancama-dine savva-rayanamao
jalanto
sittho^ Jaya-raino.
lahum
Dummuha=Do-muha
dQo
{a-\-stha).
(a+jfia)
125.
'
thavai-m-aino''
nimmaya
'
uttunga-
two-faces.'
envoy.'
thavai
'
architect
'
(sthapati).
samadhatta begun' past pass. part. {sam-\-a-dha) for dha becomes

dha, compare 7. The derivation from arabdha is quite impossible.
6 dharanie
kammagara
during the excavations.'
khannamanie
'
'
'
workman,'
cf.
Asoga.
told' p. p. p. of sahai
sittho
thavai-m-aino
theva
'
*sasati)
(b'ista
the architects, etc'
'little' (Pali
theva) ^stip
'
-m-
drop.'
is
125.
a sandhi consonant.
128
kao
sohana-dine
sihara
citta-sabha.
Arovio
mansfala-tura-saddena'
appano
citta-sabliae
paveso.
uttim'ange
maudo.
loena^ tassa Domuho-
tap-pabhaveiia do-vayano so raya jao.

naraaiii kayani.
tti
aikkanto koi kalo.
tassa
ya raino satta tanaya jaya.
duhiya
Gunamala addhiim' karei. Mayana'bhihanassa

jakkhassa icchai uvaiyaip.* annaya ya pariyaya-manjariuvalambha-suvina-suiya tise duhiya jaya. kayam ca vaddhavanayam.* dinnam jakkhassa uvaiyatp. kayani ca tie namain
Mayanamanjarl. kamena ya jaya jovvan'attha.
me
n'atthi-tti
io
Ujjeiile
3'a
domuho
bhaniyam
tassa eriso
tassa
Pajjoena bhaniyam
jao.
maudo
maudass' uvarim
havanti.
duena sahiyani,
kaham ? duena
tammi arovie do muhani
Candapajjoya-raya.
jaha: raya
atthi
Pajjoyassa
lobho
duj'ani
jao.
eyam mauda-rayanam mama pesehi

Domuha-raina duo bhanio
Pajjoya-santio jai mama jam maggiyam deha, to aham avi
maudam demi. duena. bhaniyam: kim maggaha? raina
Domuha-raino pesei
aha na
pesesi, jujjha-sajjo'' hohi
bhaniyam
deha: Nalagiri hatthi
Aggibhirii taha raha-varo
Jaya ya Siva devi
leh'ariya
Lohajangho ya
ya
il
pacligao duo Ujjenini. sae5''am Pajjoyassa rajja-siram.

hiyam Pajjoyassa Domuha-santiyaiii padivayanam. kuddho^
donni lakkhii mayagaaiva Pajjoo, calio caurariga-balena
lanam," donni sahassa rahanam, panca ajuyani hayanam,
:
musical instrument.'
tura
loena
addhii " care, anxiety."
'
by the people
'
0.
{adhrti.)
jakkhassa 'to a demon.'
icchai
'promises.'
uvaiyam
'offering'
{wpa-ira-irkr).
^
suiya 'revealed'
parijata
" coral
pesei
jujjha-sajjo
"
{sue).
Satir.
suida.
vaddhavanayam
he sends.'
'
tree."
ready for battle.'
knddho " wroth."

mayagala 'elephant' {madakala).
'
suvina 'dream.'
l)irth
leremonj-
"
pHriyaya=
iârdhapana.
satta koflio payai
jananam.
'
Pancala-janavaya-sandhim.
bala-samaggo
sagara-vuho Domuhena.
Domuha-raya cauranga
gao padisammuham Pajjoy-
garuda-vuho *
tao sampalaggam donha
Paficala-visaya-sandhie
assa.
2i)
anavaraya^ -payanaeliiin patto

iyaro vi
nihario nayarao.
''
raio
mauda-rayana-pahavena
Pajjoena,
balana
vi
Domuharaya.
jujjhain.
so
bhaggam*'
Pajjoyassa balam.
bandhiuna Pajjoo pavesio
dinnam calane kadayam.'^ suhena tattha Pajjoya-
nayaram.
-rairio
ajeo
vaccai kalo.
annaya dittha tena Mayanamanjari.

kam'aggina
kahavi
dajjhamanassa
puochio sarira-pauttim,
jampiyam
Pajjoena
**
vahi-vighatthassa
mattassa
kuviyassa marantassa ya
tao
lajja
kusalam
niya-dhuyam
me
'^
tao
na dei
diham
Mayana-vasa-gasaa, nara-vara
ta jai icchasi
tao
voliya*
parimilana-
dittho
s'asankena yagadhayaram puttho.
padivayanam.
nisasiuna
jao gadha'nurao.
cinta-samtava-gayassa
paccuse ya gao atthanarp.
rai.
muha-sariro Domuha-raina
hutte
taha
'
ya
durujjhiya hoi
'
ti
'
[eyam
payaccha to JVlayanamanjarim
na desi pavisami jalanammi
nara-vara
II
Domuhena nicchayam nauna dinna. sohana-dina- mukayam paniggahanam. kaivaya-dinehim dhario,^^
puiiina visajjio, gao Ujjenim Pajjoo.

'
payai
anavaraya
footsoldier
'
'
samaggo
v&io=zracito.
'
ajeo
bhaggam
'
(padati).
incessant.'
complete.'
'
vuha
'
order of battle' {vyuha).
invincible.'
'
'
broken.'
kadaya fetter (kataka).

dajjhamana 'being consumed.'
nisasivina
'7
'
'
'
sighing.'
jampiyam
voliya 'passed,'
{jalpitam)
vighattha
cf.
bolei.
37.
consumed'
+ ghas).
'0
vahi
'I
kuvia
'2
dhOyarn 'daughter,' dhuya=:I\l. dhiaa S.Mg. dhuda =*dhuta from
'
illness
'
*dhukta (Pischel,
'3
dhario
(vyadhi).
'
dur-ujjhiya
angry.'
'
waited
65).
'
{dhr).
'
left far
(vi
behind.'
130
annaya agao Inda-mahusavo. Domuha-raina aittha nayara-jana: ubbheha indakeum ' tao mangala-nandi-maharavena
dhavala-dhaya-vadaho doya-khiukliinl-jala'lamkio^ avalam
'
biya-vara-malla-damo mani-rayana-mala-bhusio nanaviha-palambamana-phala-nivaha-ciiicaio
ya
dayalino''
dijjanti
indayalfiiip,
khippanti
in-
kappura-kun-
maha-danaim, vajjanti muiiigaigaya satta vasara.

agaya
puio maha-vicchaddena
punnima.
raaha-moena
evara
aojjaim.^
tamboraira
dijjanti
tao nac-
kavva-bandha, naccanti
ditthi-raohanaim
disanti
kuma-jala-chada,
ubbhio indakeu.
sukai-raiya
canti nattiyao, gijjanti^
nara-samghaya,
muha-raina indakeu.
"^
kusuma-vatth'alhiip Do-
maha-tiira-ravena
annammi dine padio
dittho raina amejjha-mutta-duggandhe nivadio janena
meinle.
pariluppamano
datthiina cintiyam
ya.*
dhir-atthu vijju-'"
reha-vva cancalanara parinama-virasanam riddhinam. eyain

cintayanto saqabuddho, patteyabuddho " jao. paiica-rautthi-
uktam ca
yara loyam kaiina pavvaio."^
'
aittha
commanded
'
'
{a-^-dis).
ubbheha 'erect' imperat. from ubbhei 'erects' from ubbha =

urdhva (also uddha uddha). For dhv becomes bbh compare dv l>ecomes
bb. barasa twelve '^(dvadasa). -keum banner.'
3 dhaya=dftva;'Gt.
vadaho {-pataka). doya " daruhasta"
'clapper.'
2
'
':
adorned,' Pkt. root.
cincaio
f"
gijjanti
indayalino
khippanti pass, of khivai
vajjanti
'
'
are sung'
'
135.
magicians.'
"are sounded"
'
throws
(vadyante).
'
chada abundance (chata).

135.
muihga 'drum.' aojja "musical
'
instrument " atodya.

8
w
vicchadda 'liberality' (vi-^chrd).

* impurity' (amedAj/a), mutta=mMtra, pariluppamana
araejjha
'
being
destroyed.'
'0
vijju "lightning."
patteya-buddho=pratyeka-buddho one who obtains enlightenment

By analogy with pacciisa, etc., one might expect *pa(oeya (cf.
alone.
'I
all
Pali pacceko).
= " pra(Civ. 28 1 ) explains patteâ in this phrase, patteyam

tyekam") and patti in M. pattiaT AMg. pattij'ai 6. IMg. pattiaadi =
" pratiyaW as being derived not from prati but from *parn'i
*parti, and compares Greek porti beside the ordinary proti.
mutthiya handful.' pavvaio lie entered the Order {pra-^vraj).
Pischel
'*
'
'
INTRODUCTION TO PKAKKIT.
)31
indakeu suyalamkiyam tain datthum padantani pavi-
jo
luppamanaip
riddhim ariddhiin samupehiyanani Pancala-raya
kha
dhammatn
'
vi saraik-
Domuha.
[Now comes
In
this land of
the story of Double-face.]
Bharata there
There was a raja named Jaya born

wife was Gunamala.
And
town
is
Kampilla.
called
His
of the lineage of Hari.
he passed the time together with her
One day
enjoying his royal fortune.
audience hall he asked an envoy.
in the
"What
of the
pavilion
do
I lack,
that
The envoy said, " Your Highness has no

other kings have? "
picture-gallery."
Then the raja commanded his architects,
They started work
saying, Quickly build a picture-gallery.'
immediately on the command. While the excavations for this
work were going on, the workmen found on the fifth day a
'
great diadem of
and
fire,
all
sorts of
gems
flashing with brilliance like
in great glee reported this to
very pleased, and had
it
Raja Jaya.
after the recitation of a blessing.
The
architects
were honoured with appropriate robes and the
and the
like.
rest
In a very
time a picture gallery with lofty pinnacles was com-
short
pleted.
To
He was
taken out of the hole in the ground,
On an
auspicious day
came the opening ceremony.
the sound of happy music the raja placed the diadem on
and so shone with the light of a double countenance.

So the people dubbed him " Double- face."
Some time passed, and there were born to the raja seven
sons.
Gunamala grieved that she had no daughter, and
his head,
promised an offering to a
demon named Mayana.
was born a daughter revealed

a cluster of the Coral Tree.
1
The
birth
dream
ceremony was
samupehiyanam gerund (am +!<-- prefes) shortened
scan.
This verse
is
in
AMg. quoted from Sva^yaka
for
per-
to
samuppe
niryukti
17.
44.
samikkhai which is regularly contracted

AMg. verse to samikkhe, but this would not scan here.
samikkha " aamlksate"

in
to her in a
And then
of conceiving
i.e.
for
132
formed, and the offering given to the demon.

the baby
Mayana
maid's estate.
Now
iiing
They named
Manjarl, and in course of time she grew to
Candra-Pradyota
was told by an envoy
of Ujjain
had become double-faced. "How?" asked

Pradyota. The envoy said, "He has such a diadem, on
Pradyota was filled with
putting it on he has two faces."
that
the
raja
desire for that diadem.
" Send
me
He
King Domuha,
you don't send it, pre-
sent a messenger to
that jewel of a diadem
If
King Domuha said to Pradyota's messenger,

The
'If you give me what I ask, I will give the diadem."
messenger said, "What are you asking? " The raja said,
pare for battle."
" Give
me there's
the elephant Nalagirl, and the excellent
chariot Agnibhiru, and the consort
Queen
S'iva,
and the writer
LohaSâhgho."
The messenger
Domuha's answer.
out with an army
This was the cream of Pradyota's kingdom.

returned to Ujjain, and told
Pradyota
Pradyota was exceedingly angry and set

of the four
fifty
arms
two lakhs
of elephants,
two thousand chariots,
thousand horse, and seven krores
of
footsoldiers.
He
reached the frontier of the Paiicala country by forced marches.
King Domuha on the other side came out of the city with all
his army, and went to meet Pradyota.
On the Paiicala frontier
Pradyota took up the " Garuda " formation, and Doubleface
the " Ocean " order.
Then both forces joined issue. Through
the puissance of that jewel of a diadem Doubleface was invincible.
Pradyota's force was broken. Pradyota was bound and
brought into the
city.
ring
was
And
fixed on his foot.
there king Pradyota quietly passed his days.
One day he saw Mayana-maiijari.

amoured. Then consumed with the
He became deeply
fire
of
love,
and
en-
fallen
into a fever of thought he passed the night as best he could.
King-
Domuha
noticed his pale face and emaciated form, and
asked what ailed him.
He gave no
questioned more closely.
quoted
Then
answer.
witli
He was anxiously
a deep
sigh
Pradyota
133
" The man
in the power of Love, good sir, the man that

drunk or consumed by disease, he that's wroth, and he that
on the point
wish your
me
give
of
own
death
has left modesty
good, vouchsafe
me
this
sir,
is
if
you
if
you
shall enter
the
So
far behind.
Mayanamafijari
own daughter, good
not your
is
fire."
So Domuha, perceiving
gave her to him.
his determination,
The wedding was celebrated on an auspicious day and hour.

After staying some days Pradyota, having paid his respects
and taken his departure, went to Ujjain.
One day
there
came the Great Indra
instructed the citizens to
raise
Banner was erected with a great roar

with white pennons and
their clappers,
flags,
hung with
fine
Festival.
an Indra Banner.
Domuha
Then the
of auspicious blessings,
adorned with a chain
and
of bells
festoons, decorated with strings
and gems, and laden with an abundant variety

Then the dancers danced poems composed
of pendent fruits.
by good poets were sung, crowds of people danced, dazzling
of
jewels
illusions are
shown, and the magicians are given betel and the
Quantities of camphor, saffron and
like.
water are thrown
in the air, masses of alms are given away, the bands crash with
drums and the rest. Thus in great delight pass seven days.
The full-moon came. King Domuha honoured the Indra-Banner
with great liberality, with flowers, robes and the like. On
another day with a great roar of music down it fell on the
ground. The king saw it fallen in a place foul with dung and
dirty
plundered by the people.
water, and
reflected
" Out
Seeing this he
on the pomps of this world fleeting as a
flash
of lightning, ending in disgust! " As he thought thus he was

enlightened, and became a Pratyeka-Buddha. Regarding the
world as but
five fist-fulls
he entered the Order.
" What was an Indra-Banner,
'Tis said
that he saw adorned, but fallen
and plundered.
*'
And
perceiving the
discovered the
pomp
Law."
that was no pomp, Pancala's king
134
Jain Maharastri]
From an
Extract No.
17.
inscription found near Ghatayala, a village situated
about twenty miles north of the city

translation
Society
1895,
Sarnvat 918.
is
Vol.
27,
The
p. 513.
inscription
Asiatic
dated
is
This probably refers to the Vikrama era, and
equivalent to about 861 a.d.
Kakkuka
Text and
Jodhpur.
of
published in the Journal of the Royal
named
It records that a chief
founded a Jain temple, estabhshed a market, and
erected two pillars.

0(11.
padhamani
Saggapavagga-maggara
devaiii
karanain
sayalana
namaha Jina-nahain
Rahu-tilao padiharo asT Siri-Lakkhano tti Ramassa
tena Padihara-vanso samunnaim ettha sampatton 2.
vippo Hariando bhajja asi tti khattia Bhadda
nisesa-duria-dalanam parama-gurum
ii
1.
tana suo uppanno viro Siri-Rajjilo ettha

assa vi
Narahada namo
jao Siri-Nahado
3.
ii
tti
eassa
Jasa-vaddhano jao.
Candua-namo uppanno Silluo vi eassa
assa vi tanao Tao, tassa vi

assa vi
Jhoto
4.
ii
tti
tassa tanuo, assa vi Siri-Bhilluo cain
5.
Siri-Bhilluassa tanuo Siri-Kakko guru-gunehi garavio

assa vi
Kakkua-namo Dullahadevie uppanno
ii
6.
Isiviasaiii
hasiam, raahuram bhaniam, paloiam sommaiii
namayam
jassa na dinara ro[so] theo, thira metti
7.
li
no jampiam, na hasiam, na kayaip, nu paloiam, na sambliariarn
na
thiani,
na paribbhamiam, jena jane kajja-parihlnani
ahama taha uttima
suttha duttha vi paya
vi
janani vva jena dharia niccam niya-mandale
uaroha-raa-macchara-lohehim
sokkhena
sawa
naya-vajjiam jena
na kao donha viseso vavahare kavi
'
manayam
pi
Read
vi
9.
10.
pi
danda-nitthavanani
kori or kahai'i.
8.
diavara-dinnanujjam jena janam ranjiuna sayalam
nimmaccharena Janiam dutthana
ii
II
ii
11.
dhaiia-riddha-samiddhana
vi
135
pauranam niakarassaabbhahiani
lakkhani sayanca sarisantananca taha jena ditthaim
nava-jovvana-ri3a-pasahiena singara-guna-garukkena
12.
ii
<
iana-vaya-nijja-malajjani jena jane neya sancariamii 13.
balana guru tarunana taha sahi gayavayana tanao vva
iya-sucariehi niccaip jena jano palio savvoll 14.
jena
namantena saya saiumanam gunathuim kunantena

laliani dinnam panaina dhana-nivahamll
jampantena ya
15.
Marumada-Valla-Tamani-panawM-a^Ya-Gujjarattasu
janio jena jananam sac caria-gunehim anuraoii 16.
gahiuna gohanaira, girimrai jalau[la]o
pallio
Vadananaya-mandale payadamil 17.

niluppula-dala-gandlia ratnma mayanda mahua-vindehim
vara-icchu-panna-cchanna esa bhumi kaya jena 18.
varisa-saesu a navasum attharasam'aggalesu Cettammi
janiao jena visame
II
nakkhatte vihu-hatthe Buliavare dhavala-blae
19.
il
siri-Kakkuena hattain mahajanam vippa-payai-vani-bahulaip
Rohinsakua-game nivesiam kitti-viddhiell 20.

Maddoarammi ekko, bio Rohinsakua-gamammi
21.
Jena jasassa va punja ee tthambha samutthavia
tena siri-Kakkuenam Jinassa devassa duria-niddalanam
karaviam acalam imam bhavanam bhattie suha-janayaraii 22,
appiam earn bhavanam siddhassa Dhanesarassa gacchammii
i
||
taha santa-Jamba Ambaya-vani-Bhauda-pamuha-gotthieii 23.

Notes.
Verse
sesa
V.
2.
Apavagga
1.
'
all
-padiharo
'
'
'
beatitude
final
durita
{nihissa) 63.
doorkeeper.' or
name
'
'
(apa +
vrj).
ni-
sin.'
vanso, better
of clan,
spelling vamso,
V.
3.
bhajja 'wife'
V.
5.
Inscription has -nama a mistake for

cai 'generous'
verse,
tyakta.
'
7.
44.
highly esteemed
gorava
V.
50.
garavio
119.
'
= gaurava)
cf
:
M.
AMg
Pali garu
namayam perhaps corrected

theo = thevo little.'
'
-namo
tydgt)
to
cf.
as in the next
AMg.
means
catta =
gauravitah
J.M. garava for M.

;
S*.
Skt. gariyas.
namiyam
'
meekness.'
INTRODUCTION TO PHAKRIT.
136
V.
= prajdh,
ipsiya
9.
V. 10.
'
ti
im pi
more
paura
instead of
42.
1 5.
V. 16.
In
nitthavanam
cf.
'infliction'
thavei
= .s^M-
ca
61.
sarisattananca.
-ttana = vedic
= abhyadhi= *sais
common
ahhha,hia,rn
suggested
-ivana
(His translation of this verse
-tva.
is
ten-
of the original
be wrong.)
'full
of =*garukya
Pali
cf.
janavaya = yana-
Skt. guruka (Pischel 299).
= wedya to be blamed.' neya = waii"a.

gaya-vaya 'aged
= gata-vayas) iysb, JM. AMg. =iti.
saya = sadd. panai = pranayin.
pada.
V. 14.
In AMg.
(Pischel 93).
short vowel
for
garukka 'heavy with,'

garu
= iti.
and he notes that the wording
tative
V. 13.
becomes
pora (=paura)
Kielhorn
drsatvanam
may
39.
67.
S'.
kam.
'
vaccha
usual.
+ sthdpanam)
payati.
cf
'
'twice-born,'
dia
{nih
is
obstructiveness {upa + rudh).
ill-will,
envy
'
after a long vowel
JM.
V. 12.
'
'
macchara
V. 11.
niya = m?o.
uaroa favour or
nijja
'
'
Marumadaprob. =Marwar. Gujjara = (zwr^'ara Gujar.'

Here we have an older form of the modern Gujerat.'
'
'
-parianka ajja has not been explained.

V.
gohana 'herd,'
17.
ô-c?)^wa.
palli
'
hamlet.'
jalaula
= ;va-
V. 18.
payadam =prakatam, M. paada AMg. pagada.

ma\'anda mango tree {mdkanda).
V. 19.
aggala
Idkula,
'
'
= argala)
used technically in dates, see Indian
Antiquary, vol. xix, p. 61, note 52.
hattha = Hasta
V.20.
'for
bia
'
moon.'
'second,'
merchants.'
payai
foot soldier,' also payai (padati).
appiam
(arpi7a).
gotthi
Translation.^
constellation,
AMg. JM. biya biiya.

mahajanam as an adjective
'
V. 23.
the
vihu
'
'
series,' 'lineage,' i.e. 'school.'
society.'
Om
Follows what
gaccha
is
Bow
to the lord of
apparently Kielhorn's.
tlie
Jinas. wlio
is
J.R.A.S. quoted above.
tlie
INTRODUOTJON TO PRAKRIT.
path to
first
and beatitude, the god who
Ilea veil
cause of
137
the
is
things, the destroyer of every sin,
all
the supreme preceptor.

V.
2.
The
Laksmana, the ornament oftheRaghus,
glorious
was Rama's doorkeeper hence the Pratihara clan has

;
attained here to eminence.

V.
3.
There was a Brahman named Haricandra
Bhadrd
V.
4.
son was born, named Rajjila.

To him, again, Narabhata was born, and
{=Ndgabkata)
his son
to
was Tata, and
was
his wife
To them
Kshatriya caste.
of the
a valiant
him Nahada
his son, Yaio-
vardhana.
V.
5.
To him Canduka was
V.
6.
Bhilluka^ s son was
him
born, and to
S'ilhika
his
son was Jhoto, and his, the generous Bhilluka.
qualities;
Kakko
highly esteemed for his noble
and to him was born from Durlabhadem,
Kakkuka.
V.
7.
His smile
is
[like a] slightly
opening [flower-bud], his
speech sweet, his glance benign, his meekness not

timid, his anger slight, his friendship firm.
V.
V.
8.
He never
9.
remembered a thing, without benefiting mankind.

Like a mother he constantly has kept in comfort all
the people in his dominion, the poor and the pros-
has spoken, or smiled, or acted, or looked, or
perous, the lowest as well as the highest.
V.
10.
And
never has he, departing from what was right,
through favour, affection, envy, or greed, made the

slightest difference
V. 11.
between the parties
in
suit.'
Following the advice given by the best of the twice-born,
he has pleased everybody, and free from passion has

also caused
V. 12.
Even
punishment to be
to citizens possessed of
inflicted
has assigned more than his revenue
hundred and the
'
K. " transaction."
on the wicked.
abundance
(?),
of wealth
like (?)*
"As much
as
he
a lakh and a
was suitable
"
(?)
138
V. 13.
Though adorned with the freshness of youth and

beauty, and full of the sentiment of love, he never
has behaved
people
to
so
men's
to incur
as
re-
proaches, or witliout modesty.

V. 14.
To
children like a guru, to
and to the aged
like
young men
like a friend,
a son, by such good conduct has
he constantly cherished everyone.

V. 15.
Always showing respect with politeness, praising virtues,

and speaking pleasantly he has given an abundance
wealth to those attached to him.
of
V.
16.
By
his
good behaviour and virtues he has won the
affection of the people in
He
Tamani,
has taken away the herds of cattle and has

of the
villages
rugged Vatananaka
district.
a conspicuous illumination
mountain
V. 18.
Valla,
and Gujarat.
....(?)
V. 17.
Marumada,
in the
This land he has
made
'
fragrant with the leaves of blue
lotuses, and"pleasant with groups of
dhuka
trees
made
on the
and has covered
it
mango and ma-
with the leaves of
excellent sugar-cane.
Vv. 19 and
And when
20.
by
the
nine hundred years were increased
eighteenth,
in
Caitra,
when
the
moon's
nakshatra was Hasta, on Wednesday, the second

lunar day of the bright half, the illustrious
for the increase of his fame,
Kakkuka,
founded a market,
fit
for traders, crowded with Brahmans, soldiers, and
merchants at the
V.21.
He
has
erected like
pillars,
of
V. 22.
village of
Rohinsakupa.
heaps of his renown these two
one at Maddoara, and another at the village
Rohinsakupa
This illustrious Kakkuka piously has caused to be built

this imperishable
temple of the god Jina, which des-
troys sin and creates happiness.
Iv.
" has boldly destroyed by Hre."
And he
V. 23.
l39
has entrusted this temple to the community
Jamba and Arabaya
presided over by the ascetics
and the merchant Bhakuta
(?)
the gaccha of the
(?) in
holy Dhane&vara.
Extract No.
Jain Maharastri.
From
story
Kalakacarya.
of
18.
Jacobi
Z.D.M.G.
Vol.
34
(1880), p. 262.
Failing to influence Gandabhilla the wicked
who had
King
of Ujjain,
the nun Sarasvati conveyed into his harem, and then
refused to give her up, Kalakacarya, the saintly brother of
the nun, went abroad to contrive Gandabhilla's overthrow.
kuo
tara ca
vi
nauna niggao nayario
nama
gacchanto patto Saga-ktilam
manta,
te
Sahino bhannanti
anavarayam ca
silri,
killam.i
tattha je sa-
samanta-'hivai sayala narin-
jo
da-vanda-cudamani so Sahanusahi bhannai.^
tao Kalaga-siiri
samive, avajjio^ ya so manta-tantalhim.
thio egassa sahino
ya annaya kayai* tassa Sahino siiri-samanniyassa harisabhara-nibbharassa nanaviha-vinoehira cetthamanassa^ samagao
io
vinnattam ca tena, jaha: " sami
padiharo,
Sahanusahi-duo
" lahum pavesehi."

pavesio ya vayanena antaram eva nisanno ya dinnasane. tao
duena samappiyam uvayanam^ tam ca datthiiria nava-pausa^-
duvare
kala-nahayalam
'
kuo
va
'
the shore (land) of the Sakas
also mhan'âhi='PevR. sahansah
Gupta
(Fleet,
tion with the Sakas.
avajjio a + vrj.
* itas
6
'
ca-anyada kadacit.
busying himself
'gift'
pausa
'
rains
'
'
'
i.e.
(cest).
(pravrm).
'
for the
Sahina.
King
tao
cerebi-alise initial
form
Pers. sah or Sahi.
Inscriptions,
there indicates the use of these
vayanam
andhariyam
ahivai "overlord" Sahi-,9a/ii,
prasasti.
nauna ^jna, JM. usually does not
vi ^=kuto'pi.
Saga-kula
n.
bhaniyara
Sahina
citthai."
cf.
Asoga.
This word, and
of Kings,' occur in the Allahabad
No.
two terms
I,
in the
Samudra).
West
The context
of India in connec-
140
cintiyani
" hanti
kamam apuvva-karanam
uvalakkhijjai,' jao
sami-pasayani agayam datthuna jalaya-darasanenam va sihino

sevaya, so sama-vayano
harisa-bhara-nibbhara jayanti
karanam
pucchami
ta
'
antarammi
etth'
ti.
'
Sahi-purisar
tao pucchiyain surina
damsiya-vidahare^ gao duo.
disai.
" hanta,
'
tena
sami-pasae samagae kim uvviggo viva lakkhiyasi ?
"
samagao
pasao,
kim
tu
kovo
bhayavam,
na
bhaniyam
'
amha pahu
jao
churiyam
jassa
rusiuna pesiya esa churiya.
ugga-dando
sira pi
"
varini*
'
ya appa amhehim ghaiyavvo
^
:
na tav-vayane viyarana kayavva."

"Kim tujjha ceva ruttho, uyahu ^ annassa
kaiina
tti
surina btianiyam
vi kassa vi
eie
amho
karanena
kenai
tao
nam'ankiyam muddiyaiu
tassa
rilsai,
patthavei.^
sahina bhaniyam
*'
:
mama
vajjiyanam anne-
pancanauf-rainam, jao disai chan-nauimi imie satthiyae
anko "
surina jampiyara: "jai evara, ta
tti.''
bhaniyam
tena
vinasehi."
kkhayam antarena
khemam
bhavai."
vaharesu
chuttijjai';
" na
pahuna
ma
rutthena
mae puna maena
surina bhaniyam: "
appanain
jai vi
kula-
sesakulassa
evani, taha vi
niya-dilya-pesanena pancanauyam pi rayaiio
jena
tao tena pucchio duo, jaha

Hinduga-desam vaccamo."
" bhadda ke te anne paiicanaui rayano, jesini kuvio devo ? "
'"
tena vi savve niveiya.

pesiya patteyain"
samive,
ma
aham savvattha bhah-
nvalakkhijjai pass, of uvalakkhei (wpa +
hanti=:hanta.
pi
mama
//>>').
-vidahara apparently "rogues' hall" {*vita-ghara).

sends' cans, {pra stha).
patthavei
uvarim=uvari.
f>
eie ins.
uyahu
niya-diiya,
" samagacchaha
jaha:
niya-jiviyaim pariccayaha,
this
tao diiyam visajjiiina savvesim
'
fem.
'
or
'
with
this.'
ghaiyavva
chan-nauinil 96th.
weapon appears as
satthiB
'weapon'
chuttijjai pass, chut cut off, leave off
vaharesvi
summon
'
(vi-â
I"
Hinduga=Fers. Hinduk.
"
'
severally
'
from caus. of han.
{.sastrika) .
'
for the
9Gth.'
'
fut. part,
{utaho).
pro/i/eiom.
+ hr).
vaccimo
cf.
H. chutnti,
"we
oluitti.
are going."
numher
of
141
tao te dupariccay-anlyattanao^ pananam savvasamaggim kauna agaya jhadatti^ tassa samivam, te ya samagae datthuna tenavi pucchiyii surino " bhayavarii kiiii
" saamhehiin sampayani kayavvam?" surihim bhaniyain
ssami."
'
bala-vabana
uttariuna
samaruhiuna
tao
raagga
samagaya
samagao
ya
antarammi
ettli'
Sindhum vaccaha Hinduga-desam.
janavattesu
Surattha-visae.
pausa-samao;
duggama
tao
kauni Surattha-visao channaui-vibhagehim vibhan-
tti
jiuna thiya tatth' eva.
[Then came the Autumn elaborately described.]

evamviham ca saraya^-kala-sirim avaloiiina niya-samihiyasiddhi-kamena bhaniya te Kalaya-surina, jaha: "bho, kim
evam nirujjama citthaha ? " tehim bhaniyam '* aisaha kim
puno karemo " surina bhaniyam " ginhaha Ujjenim, jao tie
padibaddho pabhuo Malava-deso tattha pajjattfe tumhanam
nivvaho
bhavissai."
tehim bhaniyam: "evam karemo:
parain n'atthi sambalayam, jamha eyammi dese amhanam
bhoyana mettam ceva jayara." tao surina joga-cunna-ca/mw/zz/a-metta-pakkhevena suvanni-kaiina savvam kumbhakara
-vaham bhaniya:- " eyam sambalara ginhaha" tao te tarn
vibhanjiuna savva-samaggie patthiya Ujjenim pai.** antare
:
"^
''
ya
je
ke
vi
Ladaya-visaya-rayano, te sahetta
tao
visayasandhira.
bhalissami
of
or
'
fut.
of
Gaddabhillo
"^
patta Ujjeni-
parabalam
agacchantam
bhalai=bharai., either from ,yhhr
take care
from smr through *mharai.
:=duhparityajanlyatvat.
jhat
janapavatta " vessel" {yanapatra)
&
saraya
nivvaho
iti.
'
autumn
'
92.
{sarad).
'
abundance, liveUhood
'
(nirvuha).
pajjatti
'
sufficiency
{paryapti).
sambalayam
"^
'stores, supplies' (sambalam).
mat) used adverbially
cunna
Tpa,i=prati.
if>
i.e.
cahuntiya
sahetta gerund of sahei=sahai (âsati)
Lata=S. Gujerat.
jamha
abl. sing,
{yas
since.'
powder' H. cun.
'
'
(?)
'
Unexplained.
telling,
summoning.'
Ladaya,
142
SO una
tao
patto ya visaya-sandhim.
raahabala-samaggle niggao
donham
pi
dapp'-uddhara -sennanam laggam aohanam,'

Translation.
When
the sage by
some channel came
to
know
of this,
he
departed from the city, and travelling without stopping he
came
to the land called the
Land
Those who
of the S'akas.
are chiefs there, are called Shahis, and he that
is
overlord of
the chiefs, the crest-jewel of the whole bevy of princes,
is
Then the Kalaka sage abode with one of

the Shahis, and won his favour by charm and spell. Now once
upon a time when this Shahi was with the sage and full of
styled ShahanshahT.
great delight was passing the time with various amusements,

the porter entered and
made
this
announcement, "
messenger from the Shahanshahl
is
My
lord, a
standing at the door."
The Shahi said: "Bring him in at once." At the word he

entered and sat down on the seat given him. Then the messenger handed over a present. At the sight of this the Shahi's
face grew black as the sky at the beginning of the rains.
Then
thought (the sage), "Well, surely this seems an extraordinary
when they
thing; for servants

their master
become
filled
see a
mark
with great joy
of favour sent
but his face
is
by
black
ask him the reason."
Meanwhile the messhown him by the Shahi's

Then the sage asked " Come now, why do you seem
people.
He
distressed at the coming of a favour from your lord? "
replied: "Your Reverence, this is no favour, but a mark of
For with whomever our king is
his anger that has come.
wroth, to him he sends a dagger marked with his name, so for
some reason or other being wroth with us, he has sent this
dagger; and with this same must I slay myself. His word
The
may not be gainsaid under pain of dreadful punishment.'
other
with
some
or
only,
you
with
he
wroth
"Is
said:
sage
as thunder.
I will
senger went
to
the quarters
(?)
"
The Shahi said: "With ninety-five other kings bemyself for the weapon is marked with the number 96."
also?'"
sides
'
\\ddhavi\=uddhura.
acihana
'
l)attlo
'
(5
+ j/wdA).
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIl".
143
Quoth the sage " If that is so, do not do away with yourself."
The other said " When the king is enraged, he does not stop
short of destroying a family, but when I am dead, the rest of
my family will be left in peace." The sage said: " If that is
so, send the word to all the ninety-five kings by your own
messenger, that you are going to the Hinduk country." Then
he questioned the messenger thus, " Good sir, who are the other
"
five and ninety kings with whom His Majesty is angry ?
He gave all their names. Then dispatching a messenger lie
sent his own message to them all severally, saying, "Come
to me, do not abandon your lives, I will take thought for
everything." Then they came to him straightway with all
their gear, for it is hard for a man to abandon his life, and
seeing they had arrived, he asked the sage: " Your Reverence,
what are we to do now ? " The sage replied " Cross the
Indus with troops and transport and go to the Hinduk country." Then they embarked on vessels and reached the district
of Surat, and in the meanwhile the rainy season arrived.
Then finding the roads were difficult, they divided the district
:
of Surat into ninety-six parts
Observing the glory
of
the
and stayed there.
autumn season
as described above,
the Kalaka sage, with the desire of fulfilling his
own
wish, said
them: "Ho, why are you idling here?" Said they:

" Direct us what we should do."
The sage said: "Capture Ujjain, for that is the key to the
there you will find subsistence in abunMalava country
dance." They said " We will do so but we have no supplies,
for in this country we have obtained barely enough to eat."
Then the sage turned all the potters' stuff into gold by
simply sprinkling it with magic powder and said to them
to
" Take this as supplies."
So they divided
it
and with
And meantime all

summoned and arrived
all
their gear set out for Ujjain.
the kings of the Lata region, these they

at the frontier of the Ujjain country.
Then Gandabhilla, hearing
of the
approach of a hostile army.
144
went out with a great army
Then began a
battle
all complete and reached the frontier.

between the two armies swelling with pride,
Extract No.
Ardha-Magadhi.]
19.
Udayana.
[Jacobi No. Ill, Portions.]
(p.
28
tenam kalenain tenam samaenam Sindhu-Soviresu
namam
jaiiavaesu Viyabhae
raya, Pabhaval devi.
nagare hottha
tise jetthe
hottha; niyae bhainejje'^ Kesi
putte Abhii
nama
hottha.
'
Udayane nama
nama juvva-raya
se nam Udayane
raya Sindhu-Sovira-pamokkhanam^ solasanham janavayanam
Viyabhava-pamokkhanam tinham tevatthinara nayara-sayanam* Mahasena-pamokkhanam dasanham rayanam baddha-
maudanam
viinna
seya-camara-vaya-viyananam annesini ca
*****
raisara-talavara-pabhilnam
ahevaccam
kunamane
viharai.^
evam ca tava eyam.
The tale then switches into Jain Maharastri and tells of

Kumaranandi the uxorious (' itthilolo ') goldsmith who collected 500 wives at 500 of gold apiece, and was chosen as their
by the demi-goddesses of Five-Rock Island.
lord
Eventually
the story comes round to Udayana, and we are told in Ardha-
Magadhl
(i.e.
salae
I
scripture language), of his conversion.
Udayane raya annaya kayai posahaposaham sammam padijapakkhiyam

posahie ege abie
tae nani se
(p. 32.)
Viyabhae=F*to6Aa2/o, iiom.
Prakrit,
hottha 3rd
per.sons
and numbers.
sing.
son
bhainejja
pamokkho (pramukha).
tevatthi
'
sister's
'sixty-three'
Apparently means " of

6
viinna
[vlj).
(rajeSvara).
A-a."
'
bestowed'
annesim gen.
pi.
.30.3
'
{bhagineya).
being a characteristic of this
niyaya=niya
tosatthi)
(also
'
own
saya 'hundred'
'
(nija).
/âta
112,
towns."
(vi-^tr).
'
sing, in e
atm. of ho=bhava, used also of other
aor.
seya
of other
'
'
white'
(.weta).
(M. has annanarn).
vlyana
rSisara
fanning
'
'
princes
talavara " chief " talaro in Dei-nama-mala=" na<;ardraA".*a
ahevaccani
part, of kunai.
'
overlordship
'
(ad/iipatyam).
kunamane atm.
pres,
garamane
tao
viharai.'
145
puvvaratta'varatta-kala-sa-
tassa
mayanisi jagariyam karemanassa eyaruve ajjhattliie samuppajjittha
dhanna nam
dhammam
Vire viharai,
nam samane
te crama-nagara, jattha
kahei
dhanna
nain te ralsara-pabhiio,
samanassa Mahaviraasa antie kevali-pannattani dhammaia
je
nisamenti,-'
evam panea'nuvvayam sattasikkhavaiyam savaga-
dhammam
duvalasa-viham* padivajjanti, evam munda bha-
anagariyam pavvayanti.^
vitta agarao
hhagavam
tarn jai
puvvanupuvvim
Mahavire
nam samane
diiijjamane
ih'
eva
Viyabhae agacchejja,'' ta nam aham avi bhagavao antie munde

bhavitta Java pavvaejja.
eyaruvam ajjhatthiyam
tae
janitta
nain bhagavam Udayanassa

Campao padinikkhamitta, jen'
eva Viyabhae nayare, jen' eva Miyavane ujjane, ten' eva
Udayane
taoparisa'' niggaya
viharai.
dhammam
Mahavirassa antie
ya.
Udayane
tae natii
3occa liattha-tutthe
evam
vaya--
jam navaram jettha-puttam rajje ahisiilcami, tao nam

tubbham antie pavvayami. sami bhanai ahasuham, ma padibandham karehi tao nam Udayane abhiogiyam hatthi-rayanam
si:*
duruhitta** sae gihe agae.

I
kayai
pakkhiyam
jagaramane
^
posaha 'fast' (upavasatha)
kadaoit.'
'
a second.'
'
keeping
puvvaratta
cf.
'
hear
'
'
from
pres. part,
(adhyatmika).
a-bie 'without
(samyak).
padi-
karei.
'
second half of the
eyaruva
samuppajjittha.
'
of this form.'
aorist
(sam+ud
was.'
(ni
-pannattarn (prajnaptam).
+ sam).
aauvvayam 'ordinance'
technicality,
ajjhatthie
'performing religious duty.'
'supreme or absolute knowledge.'
kevali
nisamenti
+
hottha
^ 74.
sammam
part of the night, avaratta
ajjhatthie 'thought'
-^pad)
lasting a fortnight.'
vigil.'
first
'
'
karsmana atm.
night.'
Udayanassa eyaruve
tao
{anuvrata)
commands
for laymen. Jain

duvalasa twelve."
sikkhavaiya 'precept' {*siksapadika).
bhavitta gerund
puvvanupuvvim
112.
'
in
agara
'
'
house.'
succession.'
diiijjamane
'
wandering
'
{du)
agacchejja, opt.
"J
parisa
'
community (parimd).
'
socca 'having heard' (srutva). cf. caccara = ca< vara.

hrnta.
vayasi spoke.' aorist {vad).
^
J.M. hattha =
'
abhiogiyam (abhiyogika) sometimes a kind of deity " belonging to

Here Jacobi suggests a state elephant, duruliitta
having mounted' (*uduruh for ud + ruh). mucchie greedy (murch).
'^
the heavenly service."

'
'
10
146
jae
nam
jai
Abhiiip kumararn rajje thavitta pavvayami, to
Abhii rajje ya ratthe ya Java janavae ya manussaesu ya kama-
bhogesu
mucchie
tarn
Kesim kumarani
rajje
hetta
sobhane
saddavetta
samsara-kantaram
seyam khalu me niyagam bhainejjara

thavitta
pavvaittae.'^
vayasi
evam sampe-
kodumbiya-purise
tihi-karana-muhutte
evam
anavayaggani
anaiyani
anupariyattissai.'
ya
khippam eva Kesissa kumarassa
raya'bhiseyam uvatthaveha!
tao mahiddhle^ abhisitte Kesi
kumare raya jae Java pasasemane viharai. tao Udayane

ray a Kesim rayam apucchai ahan-nam, devanuppiya,^ sam:
sara-bha'uvviggo pavvayami.
evam vayaai
tao Kesi raya kodumbiya-purise
khippam eva Udayanassa ranno

mah'atthani mah'ariham nikkhamana'bhiseyam uvatthaveha!
tao mahaya vibhuie abhisitte siviy'ariidhe^ bhagavao samive
saddavetta
gantuna pavvaie Java bahiini eauttha-chatth'-atthama-dasama-duvalasamas'addhamas'aini tavo-kammani kuvvamane*

viharai.
tao
(p. 34).
se
Udayane anagare bahOni vasani samanna-
pariyagam paunitta satthim bhattaiin anasanae cheetta
'"
jass'
anaiyam
without beginning.' anavayaggani
without end,' lit.
having the point not bent.' anupariyattissai will wander through
(anu + pari + vrt).
'
'
'
'
'
seyam
'
better
sampehetta
ment
pavvaittae,
(sreyas).
'
infin.
having pondered over' (sam-^pra-k-iks).
'
of ks especially in the root iks
hantiânupreksante.
is
common
in
This treat-
AMg. JM.
* kodumbiya
belonging to the family.' saddavettS,
saddavei caus. of saddei nominal from sadda (âbda).
gerund
'
''
khippam eva (ksipram
before enclitic eva
of
AMg. regularly lengthens a of final am

=yuktam eva (Pischel 28). uvatthaveha
eva)
juttani eva
anuppe-
dsih\na=daksitia occurs also in M. and Saur.
caus. (upa-^8tha).
= rddhi.
fi
iddhi
devanuppiya, voc.
siviya
**
kuvvamSne
'0
'
palki
'
cf.
sing,
deva+anuppiya.
{Hbika).
karemanas.sa and kunamane above.
saiiianna abstract of
8amana (iframano). pariyaga wandering' means

'
paryaya another form is pariyaya.

paryayaka, suggests *pariyava with ga
Pischel
^'o
also
AMg. JM. pajjava=pan/a!/((
for
.j6.
va
doubts derivation from
(cf.
pajjaya.
-AMg. juvala
paunitta
= J/i<(/o/a).
havinu
fnl-
atthae'
147
nagga-bhave mundabhave, tain atthani patte
kirai
javâ dukkha-pahine-tti.
nam Abhil-kumarassa puvvarattavaiatta-kala-samayevam ajjhatthie jae: ahani Udayanassa jetthaputte

Pabhavaie attae mam rajje atthavetta Kesim rajje thavetta*
pavvaie. imenam manusenam dukkhenam abhibhue samane^
Viyabhayao niggacchitta Campae Koniyara uvasampajjittanam
viula-bhoga-samannagae yavi hottha.* se nam Abhil kumare
samano'vasae* abhigaya-jivajive Udayanenam ranna samanubaddha-vere yavi hottha. tao Abhii kumare bahuim vasaim
tae
anisi
samanoVasaga-pariyagatn paunitta addhamasiyae samlehanae

bhattaim cheetta tassa thanassa'naloiya-padikkante
tisam''
kalam
thii'^
egara paliovamam
Asurakumarattae uvavanno.
kicca''
tassa; Maharidehe
sijjhihi-tti.''
Translation.
Udayana.
at that very time there was a city Vita-
At that period and
bhaya by name in the countries of Sindh and Sauvira. Udayana was the king thereof, and PrabhavatI his queen. Her
eldest son was crown prince, Abhijit by name, and she had a
nephew named Keî. Now that Udayana the king was wielding
the overlordship of sixteen countries whereof Sindh and
anasana
filled' {pra-ap).
M. JM. chettiana
attae
thavetta, gerund cans.
samSne
<>
<>
'
'
on account
chettum
cf.
of.'
(stha).
being.'
gerund
samanovasaya
sarnlehana
'
'
samannagaya
{upa + sam-\-pad).
(sam-ânu + a + gmn).
'
atthae
{atmajah).
'
uvasampajjittanam
vided with
son
'
'
cheetta 'having cut'
'fasting.'
(*chtittetta chetetta).
'pro-
yavi (ca+api).
lay believer.'
final
mortification
'
(before death) samlekhana).
tisam
thirty."
^
anSloiya
gerund
'
unrepented
'
(analocita)
padikkante
'
confe.s.sed.'
kicca
(A\r).
paliovama =palyopama, a very high number,
"
sijjhihi
will
be
fulfilled,' fut. of sijjhai.
thii
durance
'
^ 12.
148
Sauvira were the chief, of three hundreds
of
of
townships and
with Vitabhaya as the chief, of ten crowned rajas
sîxty-three,
whom Mahasena was
the chief, granted the right of fanning
with white chauris, and of other princes, chiefs, and the
And even
Now
so
once upon a time that king Udayana fasted
of fasting,
Now
in the middle of the night there

rich are those villages
in the hall
alone, a fast that lasted for a fortnight, duly
all
performing his sacred duty.
as this
like.
was.
it
while he was keeping vigil
came to him such a thought

and towns, wherein the ascetic
Vfra dwells, and declares the law; rich are those princes and
the like,
who
in the presence of
the
ascetic
the law perceived by absolute knowledge,
Maliavira
hear
who accept the Five
Ordinances, the Seven Precepts and the Twelvefold Disciples'
Law, and stripped

into the Order.
of all leave their
now the
If
homes, and homeless enter
holy ascetic Mahavira wandering
from place to place should come here to Vitabhaya, then

would I before the holy one strip me and enter the Order. Now
the holy one knowing this thought of Udayana's departed from
Campa and took up
his
abode near that very town
of Vita-
bhaya, where the Deer-park was, and the community came out,
Then Udayana having heard the law in the

and spake
and also Udayana.
presence of Mahavira was pleased and delighted

as follows:
"
I will
even now consecrate
kingship, and then will
master said: "Please
my
eldest son in the
The
Then Udayana
enter the Order before thee."
make no obstacle!"
mounted a splendid state elephant and went within his house.

Then there came to Udayana such a thought as this: 'If
now I put Prince Abhijit on the throne, and enter the Order,
then Abhijit on the throne, in the kingdom and the country,
lusting
among
the.
human
through the wilderness

end, 80
is it
throne before
joys of
of rebirth
better to place
I
passion will wander along
without beginning, without
my nephew
enter the Order."
Prince Keiî on the
Having pondered
this over,
on an auspicious lunar day, half-day and moment he summoned

the men of his household and spake thus: "Quickly prepare
,
INTRODUCriON TO PRAKRIT.
the coronation of Prince Kesi."
Tlien with trreat
of
King Kesi
"
pomp
now, oh beloved
of the
"Quickly prepare a
household and said
his
of
and sumptuous ceremony
rich
King Udayana.
Then was he consecrated with great
gods,
Then
disquieted by the fear of rebirth, will enter the Order."
King KeÎ summoned the men
Prince
Then king Uda-
Kesi became king, and continued reigning.
yana took leave
149
of initia-
tion for
eclat,
and getting into a
palanquin went into the presence of the holy one and entered
the Order, and continued to perform
many an
act of penance,
those of the fourth, sixth, eighth, tenth and twelfth months,

those of the half-months and the
Then that Udayana having
vow
ascetic's
cut
a
off
of homeless
like.
for
many
years fulfilled the
wandering, and in his fasting having
sixty meals, he attained that end, for the sake of which
man becomes naked and shorn release from
Now
in
middle
the
Abhijit as follows
Prabhavatl.
of
of
the night a thought occurred to
am the eldest
Setting me aside,
:
"
pain.
son of Udayana, the son
he has set Kesi on the
Overwhelmed by this human

Vitabhaya and found his way to Konia in
throne, and entered the Order.

trouble, he left
Campa where
Now
he
was provided with plentiful enjoyments.
that Prince Abhijit was a lay believer with a knowledge
of the
Uving and the dead, and he retained an enmity against
the King Udayana.
Then Prince Abhijit having
for
many
years fulfilled the wandering of a lay adherent, having cut
off
thirty meals in the half- monthly final mortification, confessed

his
unrepented deeds of that stage and met his
Demon
be
prince.
fulfilled in
(180).
thereof
is
become
one myriad;
it
will
great Videha.
Ardha-Magadhi.
From
The duration
fate, to
Extract No.
20.
the Seventh Lecture of the
Polasapure
namam
Jiya-sattii raya.
nayare
Uvasagadasao.
Sahassambavane
ujjaiie.
150
Tattha nam Polasapure nayare Saddala-putte
(181).
namam
Ajiviya-saparivasai.
kumbhakare Ajiviovasae
pucchiy'atthe
mayamsi^ laddh'atthe gahiy'atthe
'
vinicchiy'atthe abhigay'atthe atthi-mimja-pemanuraga-ratte"*
ya " ayara auso,* Ajiviya-samae
ayam param'atthe, sese anatthe " tti

enain appanam bhavemane viharai.
nam Saddalaputtassa
Tassa
(182).
hiranna-kodi
atthe
Ajiviya-sama-
Ajiviyovasagassa ekka
ekka
nihana-pautta,
vaddhi-pautta,
ekka pavitthara-pautta, ekke vae dasa-go-sahassie-
nam vaenam.^
Tassa nain Saddalaputtassa Ajiviyovasagassa Aggimitta
(183).
namam
nam
Tassa
(184).
bhariya hottha.
Saddalaputtassa Ajiviyovasagassa Polasa-
purassa nayarassa bahiya panca kumbhakaravanahottha.
saya
Tattha
bhai-bhatta-vejana
nam bahave
purisa
dinna-
vahave karae
kallakallim*
ya
varae ya pihadae ya ghadae ya addha-ghadae ya

'
Ajiviovasae,
'
an adherent, follower (upasaka) of the Ajivikas.'
The
Ajivika sect was founded by GosaJa, the son of Mankhali, a contemporary

of
Mahavira.
Gosala's doctrine was " that there
tion or labour or
is no such thing as exerpower or vigour or manly strength, but all things are
Uvasaga-d, VI.
unalterably fixed."
^
"
in the doctrine," loc. sing.
160.
(Vide Hoernle's note. 253.)
92. v.
3 mimja, 'marrow': Panjabi minjh, mijjh

SindhI miju
Guj. mij.
H, migi (Skt. majja). Hoernles translates " being filled with a passionate
:
them as tor the most excellent thing," i.e. as in his note '*
marrow of bones." The marrow is rather the physical basis
love towards
as
for the
of
passion, not its object.

* auso
longlived voc. (Skt. base ayusmat) used as a title of respect.
Hoernle, following the commentary on another passage, takes ayamauso
'
'
together, this being the form of address used
it
herd
by a teacher
vae
bhai 'hire' (bhrti) veyana 'wages, salary' (vetana).
'
'
to his pupil.
(vratah).
"received food
in
lieu
of wage.*;."
Hoernle takes
Compare however bhrtyannam
board and wages.' It would appear that their salary comprised food
every morning.' For
and wages. Kallakallirn (Skt. kabjam knlyam)
ending, compare puvvini (=punnm).
'
151
ya uttiyao ya
ya alinjarae ya jambulae
kalasae
karenti,'
anne ya
se
bahave purisa dinna-bhai-bhatta-
veyana kallakallim tehim bahuhim karaehira ya

uttiyahi ya raya-magwamsi vittitn
kappemana
jd'va
viha-
ranti.
Tae nam
(185).
Saddalaputta Ajiviovasae annaya kayai
se
puvvavar'anha-kala-samayarasi jeneva Asoga-vaniya

teneva uvagacchai,
gosalassa Matikhaliputtassa
-ttd'''
dhamma-pannattim
antiyam
uvasampajjittanam'^
viharai
Tae nam tassa Saddalaputtassa Ajiviovasagassa ege

deve antiyam paubbhavittha.*
(186),
(1
Tae nam
S7).
se
deve antalikkha-padivanne sakhihk hiniyaim
Saddalaputtam Ajiviovasayam evam

" Ehii nam, devanuppiya, kallani iham
maha-mahane uppanna-nana-damsana-dhare 'tlyaparihie
Java
vayasl.
paocuppanna-m-anagaya-janae^ Araha
Jine
Kevall
savvannu savva-darisi te-lokka-vahiya-mahiya-piiie,

sa-deva-manuyasurassa logassa accanijje vandanijje
devayam
1
'
''
M.W.
("small earthen water jar" M.W.), jambulaka and
alinjara
Hoernle.
three very large kinds of jars.'
-tta after a
gacchai, -tta
verb stands for the corresponding gerund,
gacchai. gacchitta
3
tacca-^'
kind of vessel,' pitharaka 'pot. pan.' ghataka H. gharS, kalasa
'pitcher'
uttiya
pajjuvasanijje,^
karaka " water- vessel, esp. one used by students or ascetics."
varaka
eeiyam''
jdva
mangalam
kallanam
sammananijje
sakkaranijje
'
he goes, and having gone.'
Gerund from uvasampajjai (upa -^ sam + pad).

atm. aor. of paubhavai {pradur -^bhii) appeared.'
'
'past' (atlva), paccurpanna.
'tiya-
sandhi consonant, anagaya
panna,
i.e.
padi
'
future.'
'Worshipful' (prati-ûpa+as).
tacca
'
lit.
meritorious."
but Pali has taccha.

*tattva
-^-
pad)
for
-m-
padup-
=:caitya sacred shrine.
ceiya
'
+ ut
Text has padupanna
+ uppanna.
sacred
'present' {prati
through *taUya.
Comm.
sa,y=tatlvja so also
Otherwise irom
Cf.
tattva.
Romani tatcho='
Heraacandra
Pischel
true.'
II. 21
281) says rather
lNTROI)UCTION TO PRAKRIT.
152
kamma-sampaya-sampautte
jdva
dejjahi
nam tumam
tarn
padiharienagi
pajjuvasejjahi,
dha-phalaga-sijja-samtharaenarp
Doccaiii pi taccam pi
evam
van'
pi-
uvanimantejjahi."
vayai,
jam eva disam
-tta
paubbhile tarn eva disani padigae.
Hearing of the arrival
of
Mahavira
Tae nam
se Saddalaputte Ajlviovasae imise'^ kahae

laddhatthe samane " evam khalu samane bhagavam
(190).
Mahavire jdva viharai, tani gacchami nam samanam
bhagavam Mahavlram vandami

-ttd
nhae
evam sampehei
padi-nikkhamai,
majjhenaTp niggacchai,
-ttd
vandal naraamsai
ttd
jeneva Sahassambavane
bhagavam Mahavi'ro teneva

ayahinam
tikkhutto''
-ttd
gihao
sao''
Polasapuram nayarani majjham
-ttd
ujjane jeneva samane

uvagiicchai
"*
jdva appa-mahagghabharanalari-
manussa-vaggura''-parigae
kiya-sarire
karei
payacchitte
jdva
saddhappavesaim
pajjuvasami,"
;a?;a
'
-ttd
payahinain
jdva pajjuvasai.
Mahavira addressed the company and accepted

Saddulaputta's hospitahty.
Tae nani se Saddala-putte Ajlviovasae annaya kayai
(195)
pratiharika "a Jain technical term, meaning

ready for the use of some one.' " Hoernle.
I
imi8e=M.
imie, imia J.M. imie,
sampehei
'reflects'
change occurs
*
is
'
or Auddha-pravcyf/mii
vaggura
''
sao
'
touched
expiation,'
\)y
'
'
from
tikkhutto
dukkhutto
'
i'\'nhinnin
is
always kept
imae.
kkh
kh
'
clean and
crowd' (vugura "

his
own
'
'thrice'
i.e.
prpcautionary
the feet,' chitta from chivai
Comm. Auddhdtma-vaimkani
6.
what
h.
This
both AMg. and JM.
in
Comm. z=praya.icitta
interpretation
imae
(sam-^pra + lk/f).
'
'
(clothes)
touch
Another
'
(ksip).
to adorn a purified person
'
'
(*trii^krtrnh
").
house' (so also JM. commoner geha).

or trikrtvah).
twice.'
\^f\y n\<'\<nH.\n
'
for entering a king's court.'
fit
toils
(sra), giha
fit
rites.
= u-d(tkKina-pradakiiiuam.
Cf.
AMg. dukhutto,
INTRODUCTION TO PICAKUIT.
vayahayayam kolala-bhandani anto

ninei, -itd
l-'^S
salahinito bahiya
ayavamsi dalayai.'
Tae nam samane bbagavam MahavTre Saddalaputtani

Ajlviovasayaip evam vayasi. " Saddalaputta, esa
^
nain kolala-bhande kao "
(196).
Tae nam se Saddalaputte Ajiviovasaye samanam bbagavam Mahavlram evam vayasi. " Esa nam bhante
(197).
puvvim mattiya
ttd
asl,
udaenam
tao paccha
charena ya karisena ya egayao misijjai
arohijjai
cakke
bahave karaga ya jdva uttiyao ya
tao
nimijjai;
-ttn
kajjanti."
Tae nam samane bhagavam Mabaviro Saddalaputtam

Ajiviovasayam evam vayasi. "Saddalaputta, esa
nam kolalabbande kim uttbanenam jdva purisakk<\ra-
(198).
-parakkamenam kajjanti, udahu anuttbanenam jdva

"
apurisakkara- parakkamenam kajjanti ?
Saddalaputta maintains tbat they are made without
effort,
etc.
because
does not exist, but he
effort
is
refuted and convinced.

Translation.
There was a town called Polasapura.
(180).
the garden Sabassambavana.
There
(ISl).
in the
town
Near
Jiya-sattii
it
there
was king.
of Polasapura lived a potter
of,
and acquired a knowledge
of
named
Having
Saddalaputta, a follower of the Ajiviyas.
heard
mas
the tenets
of the Ajiviyas, and having questioned, determined
and mastered the meaning thereof, he became enamoured of these with a passionate love suffusing
the verv marrow of hir^ bones and continued to
'
ayavanisi 'in the heat of the sun
also dalai (dalami) usual
from what'
form
kao
''
p\ivisakkaTa=punisat kara
'
=balat-kara.
in
AMg.
'
(atape).
foi*
'
(ktttah,i.e. *ka-tah), S.
'
as can be
dalayai. coram. =dadati,
gives.'
kado.
made by
a man."
cf.
balakkara
Ordinary Skt. word purum-kara. Pali puri.sa-kara.
154
conduct himself
in
accordance with the doctrine of
the Ajiviyas, considering this to be the truth, the

highest truth, and
(182).
all
the rest to be false.
That Saddalaputta, the follower
of the Ajiviyas,
had
one kror of gold placed in deposit, one kror put out

at interest, one kror invested in estate,
and one herd
with ten thousand head of cattle.

(18S).
That Saddalaputta, the follower

a wife
(184).
of the Ajiviyas,
had
had
five
named Aggimitta.
That Saddalaputta,
tlie
follower of the Ajiviyas,
hundred potter shops outside the town
men
Therein a large number of
of Polasapura.
receiving
the form of food and goods, used to
wages
in
make from day
day numerous bowls, pots, pans, pitchers of three

sizes and three sizes of water- jars
and another large
number of men, receiving wages in the form of food
to
and goods, used
to carry
on a trade on the king's
highway with those numerous bowls, pots, pans,

pitchers of three sizes and three sizes of water-jars.
(185).
Then that Saddalaputta, the follower
of the Ajiviyas,
at one time or another at the time of the
hour used to betake

little
himself
grove of a&oka trees
living in
Then
this he did
and he was
conformity with the law which he had
received in the presence o

(186).
midday
where there was a
Gosala Mankhaliputta.
in the presence of Saddalaputta. the follower of
the Ajiviyas, there appeared a certain deva.

(187).
Then that deva standing

described above,
down
in raid -air
and decked out
(ow
"with small bells") spoke
to
thus to Saddalaputta, the follower of the Ajiviysw
" There
will
come
here to-morrow,
<)
beloved of the
who possesses fully formed

who knows the past, present,
devas, a great Maliaiia,
knowledge and
insight,
and future, who
is
an Arhat, and Jina. aKevalin,
155
who knows
at,
adored
all
and sees
all,
who
is
rapturously gazed
and worshipped by the
three worlds,
dwellers in the
for the world with devas,
who
men and
asuras is an object of worship, praise, lionour, respect

and service as something excellent, auspicious, divine
and sacred [and
abundance
who
on),
of meritorious
(and as
praise
so
furnished with an
works, him shouldst thou
down
above,
is
to
"wait upon") and
hospitably invite to a standing provision of stool,

plank and bedding." A second and a third time he
*****
and having done so he returned

direction whence he had appeared.
in
said this,
(190).
Then
that Saddalaputta
that
the follower of the Ajiviyas,
" So
being informed of this news thinks to himself:
then the Ascetic, the blessed Mahavira {and so on,
down to) is paying a visit here I will go and praise
;
the Ascetic, the blessed Mahavira, and
dovm
to)
wait upon him."
{so on,
will
Thinking thus he bathed
and (as before) performed precautionary rites, put on

clean robes, adorned his person with a few costly
and surrounded by a crowd of men-servants

Having come out, he passed
of the town of Polasapura.
midst
the
right through
Having passed through he approached the place,
where there was the Sahassambavana Garden where
jewels,
came out of his house.
the blessed Mahavira was, and having approached,

he circumambulated him three times from left to
Having done so he praises him, and worships him and (having praised him, and worshipped
him, and so on, down to) he stands in waiting upon
right.
him.
(195).
Then that Suddalaputta, the follower of the

at some time or other brought out his
potter's ware from within his workshops
done so placed
it
in the heat of the sun.
Ajiviyas,
air-dried
and having
156
(196).
Then the
Ascetic, the blessed Mahavira, spoke thus unto

Saddalaputta, the follower of the Ajivias, " Saddala-
putta, what
(197).
is
ware made
this potter's
Then that Saddalaputta,
of
"
the follower of the Ajiviyas,
spake unto the Ascetic, the blessed Mahavira, as
"This ware was at first clay, and after

kneaded with water; and then it is
thoroughly mixed with potash and dung and then it
is placed upon the wheel and thence are made many
follows:
that
it
is
bowls {and the

(198).
rest
as before).^
Then the
Ascebic, the blessed Mahavira, spake thus

unto Saddalaputta, the follower of the Ajiviyas:
" Saddalaputta, is tliis potter's ware made with
exertion and (so on, down
made without
to)
manly strength,
exertion and {so on,
down
to)
or
is it
manly
strength?"
Ardha-Magadhi,
Extract No.
21.
Jinacaritra
being
part
the
of
Kalpastitra
ascribed
to
Bhadrabahu.
Edited by Jacobi.
Tae
(56).
nam Siddhatthe
'
khattie pacci5sa-kala-samayamsi
kodumbiya-purise saddavei,
(57).
"khippam'^ eva,
-tta
evam vayas!
bho Devanuppiya
ajja
'
savisesam
bahiriyam uvatthana-salam-^ gandhodaya-sittam suiyasammajjiovalittam
sugandha- vara- paiica- vanna-
pupphovayara^-kaliyam kalaguru-pavara-kundurukkaturukka- dajjhanta-dhuva- maghamaghanta-gandh-ud-
'
J.
reads tate
Vide page
in this
and some other
places.
assembly-room, pavilion.'
'
cleaned
'
uvayara 'decorations, festoons' (upa + kr).
'
Other MSS. have
fil.
{ûc)
'
swept (aavi+mri) and

'
'
smeared
'
{upa +
lip).
tae.
INTRODUCTION TO PKAKRIT.
dhuyabhiramam
157
sugandha-vara-gandhiyaii) gandha-
'
vatti '^-bhuyani kareha karaveha, karitta
ya sihasanam rayaveha,''
khippam eva paccappinaha.*

(58).
Tae nam
karayala-
'
kodumbiya-purisa
te
evam vutta samana,
Siddhatthenam ranna
hattha-tuttha-/ava -haya-hiyaya,
"evam sami!"
kattu:^
jdva
ya karavitta
main eyam anattiyam
-tta
vinaenam vayanam padisunanti.
-tta
khattiyassa antiao padinikkhamanti,
Siddhatthassa
-i/a
jen'eva bahi-
riya uvatthana-sala, ten'eva uvagacohanti,
pam eva
anae
tti
-tta
khip-
savisesara bahiriyam uvatthana-salam gan-
dhodaya-sittam sum-jdva sihasanam
rayavinti,
jen'eva
uvagacchanti,
Siddhatthe khattie, ten'eva
-tta
karayala- pariggahiy am dasa-naham sirasa vattam
-tta
anjalim kattu Siddhatthassa khattiyassa
tam
anat-
tiyam paccapjiinanti.
(59).
Tae riam Siddhatthe khattie

nle,
kallain
pau-ppabhayae raya-
phull'uppala kamala- komal'ummilliyammi aha-
pandure pabhae. rattasoga-ppagasa-kimsuya-suya-muha-gunj 'addha
raga-sarise
''
(bandhujivaga
"^
parava
na-calana - nayana -parahu3'a-suratta-loyana-jasuyana-
kusuma
'
aguru
'
maghar.ta
aloe.'
dhQva
xiddh'ita.
'^
vatti (varti).
'^
rayaveha
'
kundurukka olibanum.' turukka incense.' maghamaghna burn,' H. maghan redolent.' uddhu\-a=
'
'
'
'
incense.'
have prepared
'
caus. {rac).
plur. imperat. of paccappinai
2nd
kattu (kartu) originalh'
ppagasa (prakasa).
"parrot"
nijjao
himgulaya - niyaraireya -rehanta - sarise)
'
Pb.
cf.
rasi
abbhutthei
with
returns
'
denom. from pratyarpana
kimsua " Butea frondoaa
gunjaddha.
{suka).
'
used as gerund krtva.
infin.
The
eonstrucfcion
absolutes
locative
is
(kitnsuka).
'
Siddhatthe.
rayanie,
..
pabhae.
suya
.sayasiare,
dinayare, andhayare, jlvaloe.

"^
handhujlvaka " Pentapetes Phoenicia."
parahuya 'cuckoo' (parahhrta).

*
cinnabar.'
nikara
'
mass.'
paravana
'
pigeon
jasuyana 'Chinese
alireka
'
excess."
rehanta
rose.'
'
"
(paravata).
hingulaa,
shining.'
158
kamalayara-sanda-bohae
utthiyammi sure, sahassa-
'
rassimmi dinayare teyasa jalante, (ahakkamena uie

divayare, tassa ya kara-paharaparaddhammi andhaya-
vva
khaciya
balayava-kunkumenam
re,
jlva-loe)^
sayanijjao abbhutthei.
paya-pidhao paccoruhai,* -Ud jen' eva attana-sala,*
-ltd
(60).
uvagacchai,
ten'eva
anupavisai,
attana-salam
-ttd
anega-vayama jogga-vaggana-vamaddana-malla-
-ltd
juddha-karanehim,^
saya-paga-sa-
parissante
sante
sugandha-tilla-m-aiehim
hassa-pagehim "
pinanijje-
him divanijjehim mayanijjehim vimhanijjehiin dappaabbhari-
savv'indiya-gaya-palhayanijjehijii
niijehira
tilla-cammamsi niunehim padipunna-pani-paya-
gie,"
sukumala-komala-talehim purisehim abbhangana-pari-
maddan-uvvalana-karanaguna-nimmaehini
dakkhehim patthehim
kusalehini
cheehitn
"
mehavihim"
jiya-
"'
parissamehim atthi-suhae manisa-suhae taya suhae
roma-suhae cauvvihae suha-parikammanae samva-
hanae samvahie samane avagaya-parissame attanasalao padinikkhamai.
bohae
uvagacchai,
majjana-ghare, ten'eva
jen'eva
-ttd
(61).
-ttd
awakening' (bodhakab).
'
aha-kkamena
aparaddha
hara).
i
in
'
'
due time
'
paliaia
{yatha-krameua).
driven away' (apa
+ radh).
'
blows' (pra-
balayava 'young
.sun."
khaciye, text has khaciya.

"^
descends (prati-âva + ruh).

attana-sala
'
gymnasium
meaning shown by context.
'
Kadambaii
has vyaySma-6ala.
vamaddana (ui-t-a+mordona).
vaggana 'jumping.'
mallajuddha,
wrestling.
<
saya-paga-
abbhaiigie
oldgf.
ing.*
'
anointed
hundred times
'
(Skt. abhyakta vân/).
brmhanlya
nirmata
"
cheka
10
refined a
'
'
'
tayS 'skin'
praHha
{*ii:aca
(âta-pakor),
'
'
-prahladaniya refreshing.
nourishing.'
experienced.'
clever.'
'
Mg. abbhahgide JM. abbhahgio retain the

prlnaniya soothing.' madanlya invigoratudvalana
'
'
stretching.'
pre-eminent.'
= tvak).
medhavi
'
intelligent.'
159
INTBODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
majjana-gharam anupavisai,
sa-mutta-]alakula-
-tta
vicitta-mani-rayana-kottima-tale* ramabhirame'
nhana-mandavaipsi, nana-mani-rayana-hhattinijje
cittamsi'^ nhana-piclhamsi suha-nisanne pupphodaehi
ya gandhodaehi ya usinodaehi ya suddhodaehi ya

tattha
majjie,
kallana-karana-pavara-majjana-vihie
kouya-saehim* bahu-vihehiin kallanaga-pavara-majjapamhala-sukumala-gandha-kasaiya-luhiy'navasane

ange
ahaya-sumah'aggha-dusa-rayana-susamvude
sarasa-surabhi-gosisa-candananulitta-gatte
aviddha-mani-suvanne
vannaga-vilevane"*
kappiya-
har'-addhahara ^ -tisaraya-palamba-palambamane
di-suttaya-kaya-sobhe
''
laliya-kayabharane
"^
sui-mala-
''
ka-
piniddha-gevijje " angulijjaga-
vara-kadaga-tudiya-thambhiya-
bhue'âhiya-ruva-sassirie kundala-ujjoviyanane'* mauda-ditta-sirae har'otthaya-sukaya-raiya-vacche
'^
mud-
palamba-palambamaria-sukaya-
diya-pingal'-angulie
pada-uttarijjenana-mani-kanaga-rayana-vimala-mah'ariha-niunoviya-misimisinta- viraiya-susilittha- visittha-
naddha-aviddha-vlra-valae;
jala
lattice
windows
kottima
'^
bhatti (hhakti),
*
5>
hiya
'
'
'
dried'
ahaya 'new'
gosisa
'0
(ahata).
cow's-head
vannaga
sandal
hara " necklace

kadi
'
dma
'robe'
a rich sandal
kaya
'
pair
'
lii-
15
kadaga bracelet'
ujjoviya
16
otthaya
'
(cf.
dusya
suttaya,
belt
'
tent, cotton').
tisaraya ' of three strings."
(sutraka).
graiveya
'
collar.'
(kataka).
tudiya
'
bangle'
lighted up' (nd-^dyut but Pischel

'
'
{kaca).
'*
16
red.'
(varnaka).
" piniddha 'put on' (pinaddha).

12
dyed
'
of eighteen strings."
hip' (kati).
'
'
(luifita ?).
'
kasaiya
(paksmala).
'
'
**
{kuttima).
'
variegated decoration, arabesques.'
'
kouya pleasure (kautuka).

pamhala long-haired -downy
'
kappa-
of stone work.
mosaic pavement
kim bahuna:
"^
covered with'
oviya 'decorated.'
(ava->r8tr), cf.
(trutika).
243 refers to ^dyu).
M. otthaia (ava + sthoe).
mieimisinta 'shining brightly,'
denominative, taken into Sanskrit as mifjamisayate.
onomatopceif
Pischel
588.
160
rukkhae ceva alamkiya-vibhiisie nar'inde sa-korinta-
malla-damenam
chattenam
vara-camarahim
uddhuvvamanihim
sadda-kayaloe
dharijjatnanenam
seya-
raangala-jaya-
'
anega-gananayaga-dandanayaga-raisa
ra-talavara-madambiya-kodurabiya-manti -mahamauti-ganaga-dovariya-amacca-ceda-pidhamadda - nagaranigama-sitthi-senavai-aatthavaha-duya-sandhipala
^-
saddliim samparivude dhavala-mahameha-niggae iva

gaha-gana-dippanta-rikkha-tara-ganana majjhe sasi
vva piya damsane nara-vai nar'inde nara-vasahe naradippamane majjana-
sihe abbhahiya-raya-teya-lacchie
gliarao padinikkhamai.
(62).
a jen'eva
(63).
bahiriyauvatthana-sala, ten'eva uvagacchai,
slhasanamsi puratthabhimuhe
-ttd
nisiyati.
appano uttara purattbime disi-bhae attha bhadda-
-ttd
sanaim
siddh'atthaya-
seya-vattha-paccutthuyaim*
kaya-maugalovayaraiin rayavei,
-ttd
appano a-dura-
samante nana-mani-rayana-mandiyain ahiya-pecchainah'aggha - vara -pattan'
nijjara
patta-bhatti-saya-citta
uggayarp
sanha-
tanam ^ iharaiya - usabha
tu-
raya nara magara-vihaga-valaga-kininara -ruru-sara-
bha -camara kunjara vanalaya paiima -laya - bhatticittam'* abhintariyam javaniyam aiichavei,^ -ttd na-
attharaya-miu-masu-
na-raani-rayana-bhatti-cittani
'
uddhuvvaraana 'shaken" {ud + dhu), dhuvvai

This
of
list
personages
Comm. z=ijuvaraid.
(raje^vara)
nayaka 'judges.'
madambiya
be
l.'i.").
!;
interpreted
Jacobi S.B.E.
variously,
'kings,
ptthamanda
'
ralsvara
princes'
Jacobi 'satraps,' talavara 'bodyguards,'
sheriffs.'
'
may
danda-
J. 'knights.'
parasites, companions,' J.
'
dancinsi;
masters.'
^
purattha
pacciitthuya=paecutthaya 'covered
sanha
ihamrna
amchavei
'
'
ea.st
smooth
wolf.'
'
(purastat).
'
"
(alaksna).
i'i/ala(ka)
tana
'
'snake
'
(prati
thread
'
'
+ava+str).
(tana).
-lava laya
= /a/a.
has drawn.'
-otthayam
rag'
mauyam
seya - vattha - paccutthuyarp
'
anga-suha-pharisagam"'^
khattiyanie bhaddasanain
purise saddavei
"khippam
(64).
161
-ttd
evam
visittham
rayavei,
su-
Tisalae
kodumbiya-
-tin
vayasi.
eva, bho Devanuppiya! atth'atiga-mahani-
mitta-sutt-attha-dharae
viviha-sattha-kusale suvina-
-lakkhana-padhae saddaveha.
Translation.^
(56).
Then the Kshatriya Siddhartha

called his family servants
at the
time of daybreak
and spoke thus
" Now, beloved of the gods, quickly to-day
(57).
or
have made ready in
audience,
(see
that
all
be)
it
make ready
particulars the outer hall of
with scented
sprinkled
water, cleaned, swept and newly smeared, furnished
with
offerings
five colours,
fragrant,
of
made
excellent
flowers
of all
highly delightful through curling,
scented fumes of black aloe, the finest kundurukka
and
and
turushka,
burning
exquisitely
incense,
and turned
and having done all
scented with fine perfumes,

into
my
a scent-box
as
it
were
this arrange
throne, and having done this report to
me
quickly
the execution of these orders."

(58).
Then the family servants, on being thus addressed by

the King Siddhartha, with glad, pleased and {so on
down to) enraptured hearts, saluted (as before down to
'
on their heads
command
the
'
and
saying
.politely
'
accepted the words of
Yes master
'
Then they
left
the presence of the Kshatriya Siddhartha, and went
'
attharaka
mauya
'
coverlet.'
{a-^str).
masi?ra{fca)
'
pillow.'
'soft' (mrduka), pharisaga (sparsaka).
The Kalpasutra was translated by Dr. J. Stevenson, 1848. That

however is not accurate. The standard translation is that of
Hermann Jacobi's Sacred Books of the East Series, vol. XXII, p. 241ff.
^
translation
This has been modified here only to
11
make
the text clearer to the student.
162
to the outer hall of audience and quickly they
ready) in
all
(made
particulars the outer hall of audience,
sprinkled with scented water, cleared {and so on) and
Having done
prepared the throne.
this they repaired
to the place where the Kshatriya Siddhartha was,
and
joining the palms of their hands so as to bring the ten

nails together, laid the folded
hands on their heads
and
of
the
reported
execution
that
order to the
Kshatriya Siddhartha.
Then on the morrow wlien the night was growing light,

when the pale morning disclosed the soft flowers of the
(59).
full-blown lotuses, and the sun arose
in
hue
like the
red a&oJai, the open rottlesia kimsuka, a parrot's

or the
jlvaka, like the eyes

.
bill
gufijdrdha, intensely bright like the bandhu-
and
feet of a turtle-dove, the
cuckoo's scarlet eyes, a mass of China roses or a lump

of vermilion, the
maker
of the
of the lotus pools
and the
when
in his
due time the maker of the day had

the
blows
and by
of his hands the darkness was
radiance
risen
waker
day thousand-rayed was shining
in
driven away, and while the inhabited world was, as

it
were, dipped in saffron by the morning sun,
Kshatriya Siddhartha rose from
and having
(60).
risen he
descended from the footstool, went
to the hall for gymnastic exercises
And
with
many
fragrant
lie
and
entei'ed
it.
strenuous exercises such as leaping,
massage and wrestling
and then
the
his bed,
'
he became thoroughly tired,
was anointed with various kinds
oil, distilled
of
a hundred or a thousand times,
which nourished, beautified, invigorated, exhilarated,

strengthened and increased
all
senses and limbs.
On
an oiled hide he was shampooed with soft and tender
palms
of the
who were
1
hand and
soles of the feet,
by clever men
well acquainted with the best qualities of
Jacobi renders: "jumped, wrestled, fenced and fought."
anointing, kneading and stretching
expert,
excellent,
ful,
When by
intelligent
this fourfold agreeable
163
well trained, skil-
and never
tiring.
treatment of the body
the kino's bones, flesh, skin and hair had been bene-
and
fited,
his
fatigues banished he left the hall for
gymnastic exercises and
(61).
having taken his way towards the

entered therein.
with
ful
floor
In
pleasant
bathing house, he
bath-room delight-
many windows adorned with
pearls,
decorated with a mosaic of jewels and
he sat
its
gems,
comfortably on a bathing-stool inlaid with
arabesques of various jewels and precious stones, and
bathed himself with water scented with flowers and

perfumes, with tepid water and pure water, according
to
an excellent metliod
healthy exercises.
of
When
bathing, combined with
this healthy excellent bath-
many hundredfold pleasures was over, his

body was dried with a long-haired soft scented and
coloured towel, he was clad in a new and costly excellent robe, his limbs rubbed with fresh and fragrant
ing with
go&irsha
and sandal and adorned
and sandal-ointment.
hung (round
He
witii
line garlands
put on jewels and gold,
his neck) necklaces of eighteen, nine
and
and one with a pendant and adorned
himself with a zone.
He put on a necklet, rings and
ciiarming ornaments for the hair, and encumbered his
arms with splendid bracelets and bangles. He was
three strings
His face was illuminated by

head with a diadem. His breast was
covered, decked and adorned vîth necklaces, his fingers
of
exceeding beauty.
earrings,
his
were gilded with his rings.

swinging with pearl
emblem
of his
His
pendants.
fine cloth
toga was
He put on
as
an
undefeated knighthood, glittering, well-
made, strong, excellent, beautiful armlets, made by

clever artists of flawless
precious stones of
many
and costly jewels, gold and

kinds.
In short, the kin
164
was
like a
An
Wishing Tree, decorated and adorned.
umbrella, hung with wreaths and garlands of korinia
He was
was held above him.
flowers,
fanned with
white chauries, while his appearance was
excellent
greeted with auspicious shouts of victory.
by many
chiefs, judges, princes,
Surrounded
bodyguards,
sheriffs,
heads of famiUes, ministers, chief ministers, astrodoorkeepers,
logers,
dancing
servants,
counsellors,
masters, citizens, traders, merchants, heads of guilds,
and
generals, leaders of caravans, messengers
guards, he
the lord and chief of men,
among men,
frontier-
a bull and lion
shining with excellent lustre and glory,
lovely to behold like the
moon emerging from
a great
white cloud in the midst of the flock of the planets
and
of brilliant asterisms
and
stars
left
the bathing
house,
(62).
entered the outer hall of audience and sat
down on
his
throne with his face towards the east.

(63).
On
the north-eastern side he ordered eight state chairs,
covered with cloth and auspiciously decorated with
white mustard to be set down.

,
Not too
far
from and
not too near to himself, towards the interior

palace he had a curtain
drawn
It
of the
was adorned with
various jewels and precious stones, extremely worth
very costly and manufactured
seeing,
town
its
soft cloth
was covered
all
in
a famous
over with hun-
dreds of devices and decorated with pictures of wolves,

bulls, horses,
men, crocodiles,
birds, snakes, kinnaras,
deer, ârabhas, yaks, elephants, shrubs and
Behind
it
Trisala,
plants.
he ordered to be placed for the K.shatriyani
an excellent chair of state decorated
arabesques of various jewels and precious stones,
witli
fur-
nished with a coverlet and a soft pillow, covered with
a white cloth, very soft and agreeable to the touch.
Then he
called the family servants
and spoke thus
INTKODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
"Quickly,
(64).
beloved of the gods,
165
call the interpreters
dreams who know well the science
of
with
its
of prognostics
eight branches, and are well versed in
Extract No.
Magadhi.]
many
'
sciences besides
22.
S'akuntala.
Interlude at the beginning of Act VI.
(Pischel p. 113
M.W.
City -superintendent, two policemen and a fisherman.
p. 216).
Hande kurabhilaa kadhehi
Pohcemen.
kahini tae eê
maha-
ladana-bhaûle ukkinna-nam'-akkhale laakie anguliae sa-
masadide
'
(Nervously) Pasidantu bhavamiSa! na hage idi-
Fisherman.
sasa akayyas4a kalake."^
Kiin nu kkhu ôhane bamhane
First Policeman.
laiina
de paliggahe dinne
kadua
Hage kkhu S'akkavadala-vaî
S'unudha dava.
Fisher.
si tti
dhl-
vale.*
Hande padaccala
Sec. Pol.
sadim ca puScide
Suaa
[Superintendent.
kini
tumam amhehirn yadim
va-
Ma nam
kadhedu savvam kamena.
padibandhedha].*'
hande
orig.
'
cf.
hanta
crocodile.'
be
rians should
'
go to
'
:
ukkmna,=:utklrna.
bhasura.
laakiye
'
royal.'
only used to inferiors,
ladana=6aur. radana (M. raana)

a6kala
or
kumbhilaa
Pischel thought
we should read
thief
'
Gramma-
akkhh\a=âksara, according to
(Hemacandra) ahkala.
-bhaûla=
57.
[h=jihvamuliya].
samasSdide
laa-kelake.
(sam-â-^sad).
^ akayya [akdrya)
crime.'
MSS. akajjassa which is Saur.
^ lanna
by the king.'
'
Pischel's text has akajja^â,

kei]ake
most
of his
= karakah.
'
Sakravatara, dhlvarah.
'
pataccara or pataccara
Pischel Gr.
'
thief.'
236 shows that
yadim
text has jadirn like the
MSS.
pucide=
should be read in every case.
=laur. pucchido.
The Superintendent does not speak Magadhi.
Suaa
'
spy
'
(sue).
INTRODUCTION lO PRAKRIT.
166
Yam
Both.
Fisher.
Lavehi,
lautte anavedi.
yala-badiâ-ppahudihim
hage
S'e
lavehi.!
le
'
raa^ca-bandhano
vaehim kudumba-bhalanani kalemi.^

[Supdt.
(Laughinq) Visuddho danim de ajlvo
Fisher.
Bhattake
Sahaye
ye
kila
!]
ma evam bhana
nindide na hu ê
vi
kamma
paûmali kaledi kalana chakkamma-vidule

[Supdt.
Tado, tado
Fisher.
Adha
vi Lottie.
?]
mae
ekkadiaiâni
khandaSo
lohida-inascake
yava tasâ udala-bbhantale edam maha-ladana-
kappide.*
pa4ca idha vikkaa'ttham
bhaûlam aiigullaam peskami.
nam damâante yyeva

dava edaSâ agame.
[Supdt.
vivajjaniake
Adhuna maledha kuttedha
{Sniffing the ring)
natthi
saradeho.
danini
edassa
bhavami^Sehim.
gahide
Ettike
va.^
Janua, macchodara-samthidam
Tadha aam
se
vissagandho.
Ta edha
vimarisidawo.
ti
Agamo
raaiilani
jjeva
gacchamha].''
Policemen.
[Supdt.
{To
idha
Siiaa!
mam
Fisherman) Ga^ca
the
ganthi-chedaa ga4ca.
appamatta
Go-ura-duare
padivaledha
Java raaiilam pavisia nikkamarai].
Pavisadu lautte 4ami-ppaâd'attham.
Both.
Tadha].
[Supdt.
{Exit),
lautte contracted from laautte
le
= Saur.
raautto (rajapufrah). or = Apa.
raauttu, Bihari raut (rajaduta). vide Grierson, Phonology.

^
ySla
'
net.'
âhaya
baliâ
kainma long
hook.'
raaica
'
fish.'
kalemi=Saur.
for
metre, vidule
'
skilled
'
(in
the
karerai.
kalana = A*arar!a/
rivarjanlya mB.\\ = '^maraiiam.^'
(so/!a;a).
six
occupations).
Lottie =irotriy ah
*
lohida-
'
Roh
Saur. rohido,
'
M. rohio
khandaô kappide (kalp)
'
candra and others this
the correct form.
is
(?),
Apa. rohiu, Hindi rohu.
peskami, according to Hema-
cut into pieces."
(Pischel Gr.
!j
324).
.According
and the Lalitavicraharaja-natakani it should be

pe4kami. Text has pekkhami.
vikkaattham in order to sell' maledha imperat. of m8ledi = marf-
to another authority
'
''
yati.
kuttedha imperat. of kuttedi (kartayati).
Januka
'
raw
''
flesh.'
Policeman's
name.
ganthi-chedaB
cut-purse.'
'musty'; Comm. amisa

must be investigated.'
vissa=tnsra
vimarisid&yvo=i^marstavyah
'
Janua
Spy.
cilaadi lautte.'
Nam
Januka.
avaiSalovasappania khu laane honti.^
Janua! sphulanti me agscahasta.
Spy.
IB?
(Pointing
to the fisher-
man) imam ganthichedaam vavadedum.'^

Nalihadi bhave akalana-malake bhodum.*
Fisher.
(Looking round) FAe amhanaip
Jan.
patte genhia laa-
i4ale
(To the fisherman) S'aiilanam muharn peskasi,
saSanam.
adhava giddha-sialanam
ball bhavii^âsî.^
Siggham siggham edain (drops
[Supdt.
(Entering)
Fisher.
He hade mhi
(in distress).
Muiioedha
muficedha jalovayivanatn, uvavanno se
[Supdt.
kila
Spy.
re
anguhaassa agamo.. amha-samina jjeva
his voice)].
me kadhidam].
Yadha anavedi lautte. Yama-va4adim gadua padiniutte

khu eie. (Releases the fisherman).
(Saluting the Supdt.)
Fisher.
ylvide!
his
(falls at
Utthehi, utthehi
[Supdt.
Bhattake tava
Eso bhattina aiiguliaa-mulia
(Gives
fisherman a bracelet).
Fisher.
(Receiving
Eê khu
Jan.
sam-
Ta genha edam]
mido paridosio de pasadikido.

the
mama
kelake
feet).'^
it
lanfia
Anugahide mhi.
with delight)
tadha name anugahide
yam 6ulado,
odalia
hasti-skandham âmalovide.^
Lautte! paHdoîe kadhedi mahahha-Iadanena teni ahgu-
Spy.
liaena Samino
*i
cilaadi
'
is
bahumadena hodavvam
ti."^
a long time.
Kings must be approached as occasion
'
sphulanti 'quiver.'
310 for -hasta (text hattha).

*
na+alihadi
âiila
offers
"
(upa+srp).
Text phulanti but see Pischel31l.
vavadedura
infin. caus.
Similarly
(vi-\-a+pad).
(arhati).
(" sakula")
kind of
fish.
Thet-e
are
various readings here.
Pischel aays=^svakulanafp,.
6
kelake = kerako the prototype of genitival affixes like -kero -ker- er.
yivide
^
'
life."
odalia
(of.
(aam+a+ruh).
tion to
S
odara
75)=avatarya.
âmalovide
past
part.
Mounted on the withers of an elephant denotes

high dignity (M W.). Text has hatthi-kkhandham.
'
mahaliha=ma^dr?/a.
'
caus.
eleva-
168
Nain tassim bhattino mahariha-radanani
[Supdt.
Ettikam una
ti
na paridoso.
].
Kim nam a 1
Both.
Takkemi
[Supdt.
gambhiro
vi
damsanena ko
tassa
bhattina sumarido
ti,
vi
jano
hiaa-tthido
jado tain pekkhia rauhuttaain paidi-
pajjussua-niano
asi].'
Toîde danim bhatta lauttena.
Spy.
Nain bhanami ima^â ma^cali-sattuno kide
Jan.
{looks
tti
jealously at the fisherman).'^
Fisher.
Bhattaka
ido
addham
tumhanam
sula-mullain
pi
bhodu.
Dhlvala
Jan.
vutte'î
me piavaas^âke 4ampadhamam amhanam
mahattale âmpadam
kadambali-saddhike kkhu
Ta
6ohide i^cladi.
yyeva ga^camha.^
4unclikagalain
{Exeunt omnes).
Extract No.
Magadhi.
Sthavaraka
23.
(Mrcch. Act X).
Enters along the roof and in chains.

{Listens to the proclamation in distress).
Kadhani apave Caludatte vavadiadi
Hage
nialena ;amina
Bhodu! akkandami. S'unadha, ayyasunadha. Asti

danim mae pavena pavahana-padivattena Puspa-kalandaayinnuyyanaiii Vasantasena nida. Tado mama isamina main
na kameî' tti kadua, bahu-pasâ-balakkalena malida, na una
edina ay yena.
Kadham ? Viduladae na ko vi sunadi. Ta kirn
kalemi ? Attanaatp paclemi. (Reflecting) Yai evvam kalemi,
tada ayya-Caludatte na vavadiadi. Bhodu. Imado panada
bandliide.
'
balagga-padoli kado edina yinna-gavakkhena attanaain nikkhi-
'
p&i(ii=.prakrti.
ma^cali
'fish,"
pajjussiia (paryutsuka)
cf.
Hindi machli
from a popular diminutive

3
'feast
enjoyment'
dundikagala 'grog-shop.'
cf.
Sindhi
of maccha=matjj/a
mahattale t-ompar. of mahat-.
dhike
41.
raachdi
kadainbali, kadamba
(sagdhi).
MarSthi masli
56.
ôhide z=sauhrdam
'
toddy.'
or
dad-
sauhityani.
vami.
Balani hage uvalade, na una eie kula-putta-vihaganaiii
vAâpadave
mae
169
Evvara yai vivayyami laddhe
ayya-Caludatte.
(Throws himself down) Hi
hi
na uvalade rahi.
Bhagge me danda-niale. Ta candala-ghosam ilamanneSami.
apave sinless.' vavadiadi, pass. caus. (vi + d + pad), iiialena
palaloe.
'
'
with a fetter
cot
J.R.A
padoUka
[vdldgra).
(?)
'
July,
S.,
or loophole,
malida
(nigada).
'
French
'
marida.
S'.
oeil
-balagga-
'gateway'
{pratoli)
gav'akkha
190(5).
cf.
(vide Vogel,
round window
bull's-eye,'
dove-
'
hoeuf meaning 'bull's-eye,'
de
gavahka).
Grammarians should be gava4ka or

uvalade 'done for' (upa ratah). padave 'tree.'
vivayyami
(text
i.e.
'
window.'
(Ace.
vivajjami)
(vi
+ pad),
the
other
Candalavaae
âla-
pala-loe
'
world.'
Extract No.
Magadhi.]
24.
S'akarah (Mrcch. Act X).

{Entering in great
glee).
Mamsena tikkhamilikena bhatte

âkena upena sa-maseakena
bhuttam mae attanaa^â sehe
sali^â
Bhinna-kamâ-khankhanae
(Listening)
Yadha
Samyoe.''
hanam a
'
SiTpa,
(amlika
kula
36.
'
speech.'
'
'
have dined'
H.
cf.
kamia
'
îiva
(bhuj).
ruva.
tikkha
of
khal
'
'move
later
acid,'
cf.
'
tama-
H. bhat.
form than attano,
(svara)
'
intonation.'
vsa
brass,' etc.).
or shake.'
Proper Mg. said to be vayyha.
bhakta
treacle porridge' (H. gur).
accents.'
'
nama mama
pungent' =tlksna.
'
amilika
'rice.'
attanaaâ a
guJodana
goblet, gong' (kanisya
ukkhalide 'raised.'
vadhya.
cf.
rice.'
combination
'
S'attuvinase
bhatte 'food,'
imll).
food, boiled
Sala-samyoa
peskiîam.
tilkha would be better Mg. ).
oi
would expect
Ta
tti.^
bhuttam mae
(Possibly tihkha
rind
a eê ukkhalide vaj^â-dindima-âdde pada-
sunladi, tadha takkemi, dalidda-Caludattake vajjha-
tjhanam niadi
kulena gulodanena.'
vajjha 'of execution.'
The combination yyha suggests
that Mg. y differed from the usual pronunciation of "^ in the direction
of zh.
-ttana ace.
Hemacandra should be
-stana.
INTROOUCTION TO PRAKKIT.
170
mahante hajakkassa palidoSe

vavadaantatn
sattuni
ahkhi-roge
via
na
kidaena
hodi.
kiin
pi
{Does
so,
vajjham
anna^sim jammantale
tas4a
Mae khu visa-ganthi-gabbha-pavistena

antalam maggaraanena uppadide taha
dalidda-Carudattaha vinaê.^
da- balagga-padolikae
S'udain a inae, ye vi kila
hodi.'
peskadi,
Sampadaiu attanakelikae pana-
palakkamam peskami.^
ahiluhia attano
and has a
niamanaha
look) Hi,
edaha dalidda-Caludattaha
!il,
evaddhe
yam
yana-samraadde,
velain
amhaliSe pavale vala-raanuA'ie vajjham niadi tarn velam keliSe
bhave
via
Kadharn
{Looking again)
? *
mandide dakkhinam
disani
ESe 6e
nava-baladdake
Adha
niadi. ^
kiraniraittain
mama-kelikae pa4ada-balagga-padolikae samlve ghosana niva{Looking round) Kadham

Stavalake cede
Ma nama tena ido gadua raantabhede kade
Ta yava nam annesami. {Descends and comes
dida, nivalida a
? ^
vi natthi idha.^
bhavi^Sadi.'*
forward)
Servant.
{Catching sight of him) Bliattalaka, eê 6e agade
Oâladha, dedha maggain, dalam dhakkedha,
Executioners.
hodha tunhia,
avinaa-tikkiia-viâne du^ta- bailie ido
This character
is
edi.'*
supposed to speak a dialect Sakari
(see
hadakka is the usual form also halaa. halaka (in verse) *hrdaka.
Textakkhi (Pischel 24). Uidaa insect (Al(aA:a). viâganthi ? a plant.
ahiluhia (abhi-^rtih).
evaddhe 'so great' (JM. evaida ovaddaga)
'
trom *ayat (Pisch.

yanarSarnraadda
149, cf. *ayat
'
press
'
balagga {vide Ex. 23
of
+ tya
-*ayattia
e-
not from evain. but
6ttia) vaddha = vrddha.
pavale = Saur. pavaro.
people.'
keliê
kidr.ô.
^
baladdake
(cf.
balivarda).
'!
dahkinam.
(m + y.r
nivadida
Stavalake (text thavalake) {Sthavaraka).
(ni
+pat).
nivalida
raantabhede
oSaladlia (apa or ouo+r).
'shut'
'
breach of counsel,'
from ilhakkedi
like *8thak, cf.
"
bull'
'
*>
'
caus.).
'shuts,'
cf.
Pali
H. dhaknS, tlhaknS 'cover
bull," Apa. baillu,
modern.
separate dialect, and classed
aij
bail.'
kade
betrayal."
dalam 'door'
= krto.
(Saur. duaram).
thaketi
shut.'
Candali
is
an Apabhramâ.
from
-vidana
dhakkedha
an O.
horn
I.
root
'
bailie
sometimes spoken
of as a
'
171
This passage however appears to be in
next extract).
much
the same kind of Masadhi as spoken by other characters.
Extract No.
Mag-adhi.]
25.
Sakari.
Dialect.
Mrcchakatikam.
(a)
Act
I, V. 18.
cyistha Vaântaênie, cyistha,

kini yaî, dhavatî, palaaSi
vasu pa^lda na
kamena
dajjhadi
hit
me hadake
angala laî-padide via

cyisthn, = tistha,
paskhalanti
niali4ai, cyistha
tavaSÎ
khande
raaniiâ
Grammar
Pischel
dava
24,
and
ii
217 quotes
the commentator Prthvidhara as the authority for the form
and
ycistha,
Markandeya
in
general a
weak y
for a
before
may
for the strange yc ^"^.
but
if
before c: he
and
in
also quotes
Mg. and Vracada
yjaa = jaya.
The
spelling
be explained as the substitution of the familiar cy
At the same time
it
may
be noted
how 'ycistha should be pronounced. We

positive how "^ was pronounced in old Magadha
that no one knows
cannot be
= c^>am,
Apabhraraâ: Mg. ycilain

cyistha
weak y
'
resembled any modern pronunciation, or any sort of
it
palatal stop with an ofif-glide, one could
stand a weak y being heard
after
more readily under^ was
Very probably the
it.
used to mark a peculiar way of pronouncing ^, not amounting

to a distinct
English
sound either before or after
wh does not
or before
p.
179)
of pronouncing
is
(?
in
P. text
dayyhadi).
The reading
doubtful, but
of V'âraruci's rule
it evidently refers to a
XI, 5
method
not to the addition of a distinct sound.
paskhalanti (pra
should remain.
H. and
(So the h
as written in old English hiv, but the surd equi-
valent of the sonant w).

(Cowell,
it.
represent a separate sound either after w,
f skhal).
According to the grammarians .sÂ
Text pakkhalanti.
has cittha, which
hadake 'heart,'
is
mali4aSi
S'aur.
the
= S'aur.
dajjhadi
prose
form
'
is
is
marissasi.
burned.'
hadakke
INTRODUCTION TO RRAKRIT.
172
194
(*^rrfaA;a) Pise liel
ta.vsbm
= tapasir.
Iaî
mamâ
=rdH.
= mdmsa.
Mama maana-raanangam
Verse 21.
a aanake
nisi
pasalaiî
Vammaha so in
becomes
form).
niddaa 'sleep,'
Saur.
'
of
find the characteristic
is
paâ-
impossible),
The student
Ravana.'
change
mammadha. (Text
= aA;stpaw/t. Ks
(Text has anujada the Saur.
skh remains.
LavanaiSsa
II
askivanti
(Text has akkfiivanti, the a
sk.
\a,&i = prasarasi
anuyada Lavana^êva kunti
M. and Mg. verses.
mammalia),
askivanti
bhaa-bhida paskhalanti skhalanti
mama vaâm
has
vammaha'ii vaddhaanti
me niddaam
for r the
probably
will
most baulking feature
in reading
Magadhi
Verse 23.
Esa nanakamiisi kama-kasika ma^casika lasika
or its dialects.
ninnaâ kula-naSika avasika kamassa manjiiîka
e4a vesavahii suvesa-nilaa ve^ângana vesia

ese 6e dasa
namake mai
kale ayyavi
ndnaka
coin.'
milî,
stealing.'
mosi
masca + aîka fish-eating.' (Text maccha).
'
'
'
ninnaSa 'snub-nosed'
(nir
+ ndsa)
kamassa = Saur.).
ne^cadi
kaîka
lasika.
low
'
'
whip.'
dancer.'
caste.
(Text
se = Saur. se
these.'
eê nom. pi. raasc.
mai 'by me.' kala Mg. has also kada and (like
'of her.'
'
MSS. kale) (ajja

Text has necchadi.
(Text, like Northern
Saur.) kada.
Saur.).
of
i.e.
mam
nescadi (na + icchati).
Magadhi.
Extract No.
in
Text
is
26.
Dialect, Dhakki.
Mathura and
Mathurah.
'
papalinu.
paditto
si.'
judakaru,
nothing about
II).
Ale bhatta, daâ-suvannaha luddhu jiidakaru pa-
pallnu
Gren. sing, in -aha
dhah.
the Gambler (Mrcch. Act
is
Ta
genlia genha, cittha
common
in
Mg.
cf.
hiddhu = rudAs Prthvidhara says

The MSS. uive ; for Magadhi
aha
standard Magadhi yOdakaro.
becomes //, the
may
stand.
cittha diila-
in .\pa.
INTRODTCTION TO PRAKKIT.
Gambler.
173
Indam salanam
Jai vajjasi Padalam
ca
sampadam
jasi,
sahiam vajjia ekkam Luddo
vi
na lakkhidum
taladi.'
Kahim kahim su-sahia-vippalambhaa
M.
palasi
bhaa-palivevid' angaa
le
pade pade sama-visamam khalantaa
kulam jasam adi-kasanam kalentaaii
Esu
lam panatta
G.
{Looking at his
M.
{Looking doubtfully) Ale, vippadivu padu.
deulu!
foot)
vajjadi.
padavi.^
Padima-sunnu
Dhuttu judakaru vippadivehim pa-
(Reflecting)
dehini deulu pavitthu.*
Ta anusaremha.
G.
Evvam
M.
bhodu.
{Both pretend
enter a temple.
to
Looking at one another
with comprehension).
G.
Kadharp kattamayi padima
M.
Ale,
nahu nahu, êla-padima.
Ehi,
yudam kalemha.
Notes.
Prthvidhara
Evvam
classes this dialect
bhodu.
Dhakkl
as
an Apa-
bhramâ, with the phonetic peculiarities of prevalence of

(presumably as
in
standard Magadhi excluding
as well as palatal sibilant.

itself,
papalinu means prapalayitah
palaida-.
(p. 171).
text
I
is
cittha, this
is
r),
It is not quite clear
cf.
JM. palana.
the same as in Saur.
genha cittha do not end
in
cf.
u like pasalu.
and dental
whether
M. has pallia
cyistha.
S.
it
Mg.
yeistha above
dulat-pa as in H.P.
impossible.
This verse as printed in the editions looks
much
'Ruddo,
âlanarp {^âranam) and one has salanam.
like
M. except
for
rakkliidurp, tarai
'
have been corrected. (Pischel Gr. 25).

i khalantaa (skhal), no evidence whether Dhakkl followed Mg. in the
treatment of skh. Text jasam the wrong sibilant, kalentaa pres. part.
;
kaledi = Saur. karedi.

8
Text
vippadlvu
eso,
but esu
is
established elsewhere.
= vipratlpah.
seems to be a quotation
editions, beginning with
6
katthamayl
'
wooden
Dhakki and ending

'
Mg. would be
eê.
devakulam 82. The last sentence

hence perhaps the mixture of forms in the
deulu
in Sauraseni.
here y has been retained.
174
followed Mg. in any other respects.
Features pointing to Apa-
bhrarnâ stage are nom. sing, in u (masc. and neuter), imperative
2nd
and
it
The MSS.
sing, in u.
as usual fluctuate considerably
not always possible to determine the correct form
is
(assuming that the author wrote the dialect consistently),
Extract No.
Magadhi.
27.
Lalita-Vigraharaja nataka (Act
IV).
(Edited Kielhorn, Indian Antiquary, vol. xx, 1891).
Two Turushka prisoners meet
a spy
who
is
a fellow-country-
man.
Vandinau
Ese
sini
diSadi
Ta imado eda^sa
[laj-ulam
kadhaiii
{Purovalokya) Vaya^sa ese
davvam.^
Edas-
S'ayambhalisala-!îvila-nive6e.'
6e
alaskiyyamana-jaayyande
ke
chale
vi
sivilasâ saliivam
yani*
vva
laularn ca
yanisamha.
Carah A'^caliyam a^caliyam Alio Viggahala3-nalesala-;iilinam avayyandada.^ {Purovalokya) Amha-desiya vva kevi
puliâ pc^kiyyandi. Yane vandihim edehim huvidavvam.
!
Vandinau Bhadda, amhanam Tuluskauam deîye vva tumam peSkiyyasi. Ta kadhehi Cahamana-îvila-âlilvarii
:
laulam ca.
Carah
S'unadha
vandino
le
sunadha.
Hage Tuluskalaena
âambhalisala^â 6ivilani pe^kidurii peîde,

calain
vi
yado tatthastehim
a palakiye
paccakkhikadam
'
SakambharUvara
divila
alakyamana- par y ante.
'
chale
*
'''
kiinpi kiiiipi
= Sibira
YSnidavvani
S.
janidawani.
spy' (carah).
Inscription has 65aluvatn (svarupain).
'boundlessness' (aparyantata).
idale
ySniadi.
"T
ni[li^kan]de
vi
Tadhavi raae
''
puscande
idale
yaniyyadi.^
tti
Tani ca d lisani-
6.
idaro;
niliSkande
puscande
= 8.
pralyaknkrtam but
sill
S.
nirikkhanto
cf.
nam
'
of glories
pucchanto.
'
ySniyyadi
(ntr-fifc^).
bhiSkain la^kidam below.
should be
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKEIT.
Vandinau
A^caliam asscaliam
stidanam cadulide anuam
Charah
175
Kadham bhadda,
tattha uva-
pi tae la^kidam.'
Sunadha le vandino yadha mae tarn Sivilam niluviHage khu sili-Sbmeâla evam peSkidum vannanda^â
daiu.
sa^taâ milide, inilia a ettha paviiiuna bhi^katn paStidum
Tado yam yam yanidam tam
lagge.'^
yahastam
nam
kadhiyadu.
'^
tarn
tumhanam
Maavali-ni;?^Za-kalala-kada8tala-
kalindanain dava sahassam.*
Tulunganam una laskam. Nalanam una ?/M;;Aa-!5kamanain daha la^kaim ti.'

Kim vahuna yampidena ? Tasu kadaasâ pasu-stide aale
vi suske bhodi.*^
(Bahum utksipya) Edam ca tam laulum.''
(iti
dar&ayati).
Vandinau
Charah
Sahu
Ale
le
le
cala sahu
vandino cilam khu
me
Ta hage
nia-stanado niâli-da^sa."
Vandinau
Gasca
cala ga^ca.
le
{iti
Vandinau
caro niskrdntah).
(Purato gatvdvalokya)
vafifiami.'*
Tam nidam
laula-duvalam
ta idha stida eva nia-laa-ppahavam payaêmha.
avalokya
sanandam) Ese
se
âambhalfâle
{Punar
astana-stide
pulado disadi.
The Magadhi in this inscription is interesting because it follows more closely than any MS. the rules given by HemaAs the author Somadeva was a contemporary of
candra.
cadulide
= 6.
^
(?)
their cleverness."
la^kidam
of a prince -paviiiiana a
M. JM. or
from catura 'in
*caturite
lakkhidarn.
Sotnesvaradeva
AMg. ending,
may
be the
pa^tidum
yathartham.
mada-vari-nirjhara nijjhala
">
yujjha
Pischel
is
yuddha
is
M. nijjhara
against the dialect,
wrong.
"
kadaa
niSâlida p. part
">
'
host.'
wander.'
According to the rules should be yadhastain.
>
*
name
prarthayitum.
(kataka).
from
*vrajnami
Saale
'
ocean.'
niiâladi {nih-^sr).
in class
!).
should be niyyhala.
daha
for
daâ according to
176
Hemacandra,
it
has been suggested that he
may have
been
acquainted with that grammarian, or at least with his grammar.
Some
have been corrected
errors
theless there
Hemacandra,
is
of
in the inscription itself, never-
remain forms which are not correct according to

e.g. nij jhala, j'ujjha,
yahastaip, paviîilna.
There
no reason to suppose that the stage kept up the correct form

Magadhi down to the twelfth century, and this probably
M agadhi
represents an attempt to carry out the rules for
that
were traditional among the grammarians, more consistently
make
than usual in order to

,
the speech of the Turki prisoners
and spies sound very foreign.

latest recorded
fragment
of
It is
Magadhi
a curious accident that the

is
the most archaic in form
that has been found.
Extract No,
"Avanti."]
28.
and Ddksinntya.
Viraka and Caadanaka (Mrcch. Act

Are
Virakah.
re
VI).
are jaa-jaamana-candanaa-mahgala-phulla-
bhadda-ppamuha
kim acchadha visaddhii jo so govala-darao baddho,
bhettunasamain vaccai naravai-hiaam a bandhanam cavi
ii
Ale, puratthime padoli-duare.
Cittha
tumain
Tumam
tumam.
Jo
pi uttare.
vi
pi
pacchime,
tumam
pi
dakkhine,
eso paara-khando, edatn ahiruhia can-
danena samaiii gadua avaloemi.
Ehi Candanaa,
ehi.
Ido
dava.'
Candauakah.
Are
re
Viraa-visalla-Bhimahgaa-dandakalaa-
danda-sura-ppamuha
aacchadha visaddha turiain jatteha lahu karejjaha
Lacchi jena na ranno pahavai gottantaram gantuniH^
'
âur. acchadlia.
a verse
in
ment
i
of
M. bliettuna. vaccai.
gadua below
is
Mg. out of place here.
visalla=ri-â/)/a.
These
of tlie 6aur. type.
latter
however occur
Ale seems to be a frag-
177
avi a,
magge naarla avane ghose
ujjanesu sahasu a
Re
johaha turiam sanka va jaae jatthall
tain tain
Vlraa kirn kim darisesi bhanahi dava visaddham
re
bhettuna a bandhanaam ko so govala-daraam
haraiin
atthamo dinaaro, kassa caiittho a vattae cando,
kass'
ehattho a bhaggava-gaho, bhumisuo pancamo kassa?
bbana kassa jamma-chattho jivo navamo tabea surasuo

jiante Candanae ko so govala-daraam harai ? *
Virakah. Bhada Candanaa
Avaharai kovi turiain, Candanaa, savami tujjha hiaena
jaha addh-uida-dinaare govalaa-darao khudido.^
Yadhagona,
[Servant.
yadha.]''
Candanakah. Are re, pekkha pekkha.

Ohario pavahano vaccai majjhena raa-maggassa
edam dava viaraha kassa kahira pavasio pavahano
Are pavahana-vahaa
Virakah.
arudho
turiam
Kahim va
6.
common
(Apa.
jatteha
in forml
in
M.
verses,
{dyu)
joedi 'sees.'
jattha relat. of attha

'^
for
suo
vajjai
turidarn.
opt., pahavai, are all

-ia is
ma dava edam pavahanam

Ko va idha
Kassa-kerakam edam pavahanam
vahehi.
tti.''
karejjaha
jattedha (yatadhvam).
6.
naarla
oblique fem. sing, in
loc. sing,
johaha (" yojayata" " anveâyata")
Vyudh
or
= atra.
"go
to
jaae
for."
= JS.
In other dialects generally jahirn
fut. of
jayade.
is
used.
darisesi " seest."
caiittho
ggaho
'
'
'
ehattho
fourth,' S. caduttho.
planet.'
bhaggava
son of the earth
'
'
sixth
'
(of.
H. chata).
belonging to Bhpgu's daughter.'
gaho
bhumi-
= Mars.
'
surasuo
tahe&^tathaiva.
5>
savami 'I swear.'
'
son of the Sun
addh'uida 'half
'
= Saturn.
6aur. udida
risen,'
M. udia(?
removed' (" khanditah ") ? from a root khut. Not

the same as S. khudida broken,' = *ksudita for ksumia. (Pischel S 568).
6 The servant speaks Mg. gono
bull is the masc. form usual in AMg.,
Mg. For derivation Pischel suggests *gavana or *gurna. The first seems
read udia).
khudido
'
'
'
the
7
'
'
more probable.
oharia' covered' (opa
goes
'
(of.
JM.
out' {pra-\-vas-=propita).
12
+ vr). pavah ana
p. 123, n. 4).
viaraha
'
'
carriage.'
ascertain
'
(vi
(pra + vah).
+ car).
vaccai
pavasio
'
set
178
E6e kkhu pavahane
[Servant.
Vaântaêna
ayyaa
Idha
ayya-Caludattaha kelake.
yinnuyyanam kllidum Caludattas4a
Virakah
'
(going
wp
niadi.]
Eso pavahana-vahao bhanadi

pavahanam
Vasantasena arudha;
Candana).
to
ajja-Carudattassa
Puppha-karandaam jinnujjanam
C.
Ta gacchadu.
V.
Anavaloido jjeva.
C.
Adha im
niadi 'tti,"*^
V.
Kassa paccaena
C.
Ajja-Carudattassa.
V.
Ko
ajja-Carudatto
idam
Puspha-kalandaani
aludha.
Ka
va Vasantasena, jena anavalo-
vajjai?
Are, ajja-Carudattara na janasi, na va Vasantaseniam
C.
jai
ajja-Carudattam Vasantaseniam va na janasi, ta gaane
jonha-sahidam candain na janasi.^
Ko tam gunaravindam sila-miankam jano na janadi

avanna-dukkha-mokkhara caii-saara-saraam raanani,
do jeva piiania iha naarie tilaa-bhOda a
ajja Vasantasena, dhamma-nihi Carudatto
Notes.
Prthvldhara
a.*
makes both characters speak Avanti,
which he gives only the jejune information that
of
the dental
s,
and m, and
kandeya describes
it
is
it
possesses
rich in proverbial sayings.
Mar-
as a mixture of S'auraseni and Maharastri.
Such indeed appears to be the character of the dialect as given by

the MSS. Candanaka however speaks of himself as a Southerner
" vaam dakkhinattha avvatta-bhasino " 'We Southerners
MSS. and Editions have ja and jja for Mg. ya yya. Mg. kelake
kerako. puspha (following Homacandra), MSS. vary. Usual reatling
puppha. yinnuyyanam old garden.' Here we have the two Mg. genitives side by side.
1
=A
'
=2
There
is
no point
in
supposing V. mimics the
especially aa he does not repeat his exact
words
servant's dialect
naturally he reports to
C. in his usual language.

3
jonha
'
moonlight.'
cau-sSara-saraam
'
treasury.'
'
containing the essence of the four oceans.'
-nilii
speak indistinctly.
So Pischel thought
it
179
unlikely that Can-
danaka spoke AvantI, but more probable that he spoke Dakeinatya (Bharata 17. 48. Sahityadarpana, p. 173. 5). It would
appear that
this
was not very
from Avanti, and that
different
both were nearly related to Sauraseni.
however would be
'
amhe dakkhinacca
Extract No.
Jain S'auraseni]
'
'
vaam dakkhinattha
'
in Sauraseni.
29.
Pravacanasara.
(Portions of this were printed with Sanskrit version by R.
Bhandarkar
in
Appendix
III,
(p.
379
f.)
Search for Sanskrit Manuscripts in the
during the year 1883-84.
Published 1887.
of
Report on the
Bombay
Presidency
There
a complete
is
edition with several Sanskrit commentaries published at
bay.
I.
Vira
(69).
Samvat
Deva-jadi-guru-piijasu veva
danammi va
uvavasadisu ratto suhovaog'appago appa

(70).
(74).
Bom-
2438).
susilesu
Jutto suhena ada tiriyo va manuso ya devo va

bhiido tavadakalam lahadi suham indiyam viviham
i
ii
Jadi santi hi punnani ya parinama-samubbhavani

vivihani
janayanti visaya-tanham jivanam devadantanam

(75).
||
Te puna udinnatanha duhida tanhahim

sokkhani
visaya-
ya amaranam dukkha-santatta H
Caradi nibaddho niccara samano nanammi damsaicchanti anuhavanti
III.
(13).
namuhammi
pay ado mula-gunesu ya ajo so padipunna-samanno

Havadi va na havadi bandho made hi(m) jive'dha
kayacetthammi
bandho dhuvam uvadhido idi savana chaddiya
ii
(18).
savvain
(19).
Na
hi niravekkho caii
visuddhi
avisuddhassa ya citte
vihiu
11
na havadi bhikkhussa asaya-
kaham nu kamma-kkhayo
180
The
scripts
cerebral w
used
is
prefer initial
whereas AMg. JM. manu-
initially
(dental).
The
letter
ya
used as in
is
other Jain MSS.
This Prakrit contains words and forms that are quite foreign
to ordinary
Sauraseni
bub
Perhaps some
Magadhl.
found in Maharastri or Ardhathe Sauraseni forms which are
of
allowed by Hemacandra, but never found in the dramas, are

derived from Digambara Texts.
Editor suggests ye va.
veva.
(69).
(Pischel 21).
Sanskrit version co/w.
The MS. seems to have fluctuated

ya and va. danammi loc. as in
in the use of
M. upayoga-
dtmako.
a,dei
(70).
'
= dtmd,
animal
'
devaddntdndm.
(75).
tanha = tanha.
peculiarity
nanammi
(18).
uvadhido
cf.
AMg. aya JM.

;
atta.
tiriyo
{tiryak).
(74).
III. (13).
*dtd,
i.e.
This
so
is
is
merely an orthographical
the spelling khk for kkh.
'in knowledge.'
savana
idi = iti.
abl. of uvadhi (MpadA^).
= sramandh, chaddiya should be chaddida (Piscliel
vicchaddida, M. vicchad^ 291) = chardita cf.
S'.
dia,
(19).
cdiVi
is
AMg. JM. vicchaddiya.
tydgo JM.
The ending
cayo.
cf.
vihiu
exceptional and probably wrong, the mistake
being due to the influence of later vernacular.
Bombay
Edition has cayo and vihio.
Extract No.
Bhasa.]
Svapna -Vasavadattam
30.
(Act IV, p. 29).
Praveâkah.
Enter the Jester.

Jester.
{Oleefully) Ditthia taitahodo
vivahamangala-ramaniy/o
jaiiadi
tildise
vayam
kalo
Vaccha-raassa abhippedadittho.
Ko
nfuua edaiii
anattha-saji] avatte pakkhitta
una
ummajjissamo
tti.'
Idanim pasadesu
181
andeura-
vasiadi,
digghiasu hndiadi, palama-maiira-suumardni niodaa-khaj-
jmni
mae
khajjianti
tti
anubhaviadi.'^
an-Acchara-saravaso Utturakuru-vaso
Ekko khu mahanto doso,maraa
aliaro
sutthu na parinamadi, suppacchadanae sayyde niddaiii
vada-sonidam abhido via vattadi
labharai, jaha
ria
pek-
tti
Bho suhain ??amflt/a-paribhudam akallavattam
khami.^
ca.*
Enter a Maidservant.
Kahim nu khu gado
Maid,
tattahodo should be tattha.
throughout for the dental.

Cf.
ramanlam,
allowed in
{Stepping round)
man gala. Cerebral

common in MSS. written
45.
This
is
is
written
in S. India.
vayam Saur. has amhe, Daksinatya vaam

by Vararuci and Markandeya), AMg. vayam,
p. 36.
Saur.
ummajjinamo
vayam.
2
ayâ- Vasantao
we
'
(also
Pali
shall emerge.'
anteura is correct (as on p. 24) but MSS. often give -nd

"Saundala" for Sauntala. This was probably due to the
of Apabhramâ in which the change is common, hnaladi. Saur.
The MS. has regularly hn and hm for )ih, mh. At first sight
andeura.
for-nt, so
influence
nhaiadi.
this looks like a sign of antiquity
The
nearer sna than nha.
where nh,
mh
is
for h here represents s
hm, hn however
show that the inversion
between eg bamhano and
great to the ear.
So hna,
hma
(as in
vaa,y
and hna seems
found
is
Pali forms like
well estabUshed as correct.
tako {=snatako)
difference
spelling
^Moreover the
ancient.
is
in texts,
amhe, naha-
Bhasa) bahmano
is
not very
be only orthographical variations,
palama =paramo. No apparent reason for I or Zhere. maiira for mahura

(=madhura). This appears to be a mistake, p. 6 has mahura. suumarani = rairn. Neut. Plural in -arii occurs in AMg. JM. .j6. not in M. or
In Pali
Saur.
3
it
can be -ani as in Skt.
sayyae (:=sayyayam) M. AMg. JM. sejjae, Mg. êyyae.
double yy for double

quity.
Hemacandra
//,
as in ayyaiitta,
allows yya for rya in Saur.
sionally found in South
Indian MSS.
Here again
might be taken as a sign of

]\Iost
The
occa-
write only a circle
^c^
aa which, says Pischel, either allows a choice between yya and
intended to express a sound between the two.

case of Skt. yya there
jaha
*
is
is
no authority
anti-
is
spelling
for Saur.
(Pischel
284).
jja, or is
In the
having anything but
jja.
regular in M. (6aur. jadha).
namaya- amaya indigestion should be amaa in 6aur.

it is an archaism,
kalla-vatta breakfast.'
mistake,
'
'
'
If
it
is
not a
182
.4/imo eso Vasantao.
kalo
(Looking) Kirn nimittaiu, bhadde
Jester.
Maid.
Jester.
Maid.
(Approaches) Ayya\
mam
annesasi
Ahmanam bhattim bhanadi-avi hnddo jamaduo

Kim nimittam bhodi, pucchadi ?
Kim annam ? sumana-vannaain anemi tti.
Hnado
Jester.
Ko
Vasantaa!
tnmara annesami.'
toWabhavam.
Savvam
anedu
tti.'^
bhodi vajjia
bhoanani.
Kiin nimittaiu varesi bhoanam
Maid.
mama
Adhannassa
Jester.
koilanam akkhi-parivatto via kuk-
khi-parivatto samvutto.^
Idiso evva hohi.
Maid.
Gacchadu bhodi.
Jester.
Java aham
vi
Saasam
tattahodo.
gacchami.*
Exeunt.
(Enter
Avanti
Padmavati
with
and Vasavadatta
retinue
wearing
dress.)
Kimnimittam
Maid.
ddyii
Maid.
bhatti-daria Pamada-vanani aada
Haja, tani dava seh^lisi-guhmadni pekkhami kusami-
Padma.
va na
vetti.^
Bhatti-darie
tani
kusumidaru'
nama,
paval '-antari-
dehiip via mottia-lambaehini aidant kusumehini.
Hala jadi evvam, kira danim vilambesi ?

Tena hi imassim sila-vattae muhuttaam upavisadu
bhatti-daria.
Java aham vi kusumavacaam karemi.^
Padma.
Maid.
'
the spelling ahmo.

^
Ahmo
ayya, see note on sayyae above.
note on hnaladi above.
jamaduo
kukkhi
Java
is
usual spelling
ammo,
see
Telang's edition of the Malati-madhavam has
Another reading here
is
amme,
p. 10 htis
ammo.
CO.
belly.'
the ordinary form.
Ya does not appear
here,
ahampi would
be better.
6
guhmaa
reason
for
gulmaka") AMg. 6. Mg. yurama ^ 4S. There seems no

"
the spelling with hm. In the previous Act " guhmadu
{''
represents gumphadu, where the inversion
Hlapattaka 'stone
correct 6aur.
slab.'
(On
So correctly uvarada,
p.
is
3<i,
p. 40.
not archaic.
sil5-pattaka).
uvavisadu
is
a\aoaani, no ya appears here.
Padma.
Ayyel
Kim
Vasava.
Evvam
hodu.
ettha.
Mpavisamo
(They both
[The words in
183
down).
sit
are not normal S'auraseni].
italics
Translation.
Jester.
Hurrah
We
must congratulate His Highness King
Vatsa on this happy occasion graced by the good auspices
But who knows that
of his intended marriage.
shall
after being
this
like
affair
come up again
chucked out
At present
all
in an
in the sink,
we
through the palaces
they are dressing themselves, bathing themselves in the

private baths, and eating the sweetest, tenderest sweet-
meats
while
Nymph
that's very
my
may enjoy the arctic regions, without

me company There's one thing about
to keep
couch
bad
is
my food doesn't digest well, and
piled with quilts
Wind and Blood

Maid.
Wherever
here he
worthy
has
My
is.
though
can't sleep, for seing the
Bah
disease circling all around.
bad business, prostrate with
a
it
illness
and
no
it's
breakfast
Vasantaka got
to
good Vasantaka, how are you
Why
was
looking for you.

Jester.
Maid.
Jester.
Maid.
And why, good
lady, were
Our mistress says

Why do you ask lady
What do you think ?
you looking
for
me
Surely son-in-law has bathed.

?
am
bringing the wedding paint
of course.
Jester.
Maid.
Jester.
Bring anything except food.
Why
do you bar food
I've got a twist in
my
poor belly like the squint
cuckoo.
Maid.
Jester.
Maid.
May you keep

Fare you
Why
has
so.
well.
my
I will just
mistress
come
go to His Highness.
to Cupid's grove
of
184
Padmavati.
Ah,
am
looking to see
if
these vitex bushes are
in flower or not.
They are
Maid.
in flower,
of pearls hidden in the
Padma.
Maid.
madam, with
young
flowers like strings
leaves.
Ah
If that is so, why do you delay ?
Wont your ladyship sit on this stone
!
gather some flowers
Padma.
My
Vasava.
Let us do
good
girl
seat
while
Why
should we
sit
here
so.
Extract No.
Pali.]
Jataka
31.
308.
Trans. Francis and Neile,
(Fausboll. Edn., Vol. Ill, p. 25.

Vol. Ill, p. 17).
Java-sakuna-jatakam.
Atite Baranasiyam Brahmadatte rajjam karente Bodhisatto
Himavanta-padeserukkha-kottha-sakuno hutva nibbatti.

'ekassa sihassa
mamsam
khadantassa atthi gale
uddhumayi, gocaram ganhitum
na
sakkoti,
Ath-
laggi,
khara
galo
vedana
vattanti.
Fara?m5?/a?n = A Mg. Vanarasle. Brahma-Pkt. bamkarente causal participle, S'. karente is active, rukkha " woodpecker " rukkha so in M. S'., etc. ruksa Vedic
"tree" doubtless related to vrksa whence M. JM. vaccha(Pischel 320). hutva = S'. bhavia, AMg. hotta. nibbatti " was
born again" aor. (nir + vri) from nibbatti = 8'. nivvattadi.
Notes.
ha.
Atha=S'. adha.
from laggadi.
pass, aor:
genhidum.
siha so in M. (65).
ud-dhumayi
laggi "stuck" aor.
'was blown up, swelled
from uddhumi\ya,t'\ ûddhnynayate.
sakkoti =
S'.
sakkunoti.
up,'
ganhitum = S'.
JM. sakkai,
sakkei.
vat-
tanti =S. vattanti.
Atha nani so sakuno gocara-pasuto disva sakhaya nilino

samma dukkhatiti " pucchi. So tarn atthaiii acikkhi
" Ahan te samma etarn atthiiii apaneyyaiii, bhayena te
'*
kin te
mukham
pavisitum na visahami, khsideyyasi
bhayi samma, nalian
tarii
khadami,
jlvitani
pi
man "
medehiti."
ti
" nia
Notes.
prasita.
M.
of
loc.
S'.
i\a,m
pasuto 'intent on'
him.'
185
seekincr (food)
disva = drsiva, AMg. dissti, dissa, dissani. Sakhaya cf.

nialaa.
nilliio " perched" past part. pas.s. of niifyati
samma
nillamana.
'"
friend,
good sir"
from sninyak.
"told" acikkhati {a + khyd redupUcated) = Amg.

apaneyyam "I would remove" S'. would be avaneam, AMg. avanejja. visahami (vi + sah) "dare."
acikkhi
aikkhai.
So
"sadhu"
tarn
ti
passena nipajjapetva " ko janati
p'esa karissatiti" eintetva yatha

koti tatha
mukham
kiiii
pidahitum na sak-
tassa adharotthe ca uttarotthe ca dandakara tha-
Atthi
petva mukhani pavisitva atthikotini tundena pahari.

patitva gatam.
So atthiin patetva sihassa mukhato nikkha-
manto dandakam tundena paharitva patento nikkhamitva

sakhagge
Notes.
niliyi.
passa =
nipajjati
S'.
pasa.
{{0)^1 dha).
nipajjapetva gerund
pidahitum
{ni + pad).
niliyi 'perched
'
infin.
of causal
from pidahati
'
from
shuts
'
see nilino above.
Siho nirogo hutva ekadivasam vana-mahisam vadhitva khaSakuno " vimamsissami nan" ti tassa uparibhage sa-
dati.
khaya niliyitva tena saddhim sallapanto pathamam gatham aha
Akaramhase
te
kiccam
yam
balani ahuvamhase,
namo ty-atthu, api kifici labhamase.

Notes. vimamsissami fut. of vimamsati "examine, try"
(mimamsate). pathama = Pkt. padhama. akaramhase imperfect (or aorist) atm.
ahuvamhase the same from bhavati.
try-athu = (t7i -i-asiw). labhamase imperative atm.
migaraja
Tarn sutva siho dutiyam gatham aha
Mama
lohita-bhakkhassa niccam luddani kubbato
dant'antara-gato santo
tam bahum
yani hi jivasiti
Tarn sutva sakuno itara dve gatha abhasi
akatannum akattaram katassa appatikarakam

yasmim kataiinuta n' atthi nirattha tassa sevana.
Yassa sammukha-cinnena mittadhammo na labbhati
anusuyyam anakkosam sanikam tamha apakkame ti.
Evara vatva so sakuno pakkami.
186
bhakkha
Notes.
luddani
karoti.
'
kataniiu
of bbasati.
'
grateful
so,
"a deed done
Sometimes
means
'slowly'
tamha
'gently, softly.'
Jataka
'
performed
'
aor.
'
in a person's
'
quickly.'
used adverbially in
is
Extract No.
Pali].
spoke
sanaih: original meaning
like
(tasmdt)
'
sanikam
kindness."
personal
-cinna
(krtajna).
'
pres. part, of
abhasi
(lubdha).
(*clrna) used as p.p.p. to carati
presence,
kubbanto
'feeding on.'
cruelties.'
S'.
32.
339.
Trans. Vol. Ill, p. 83).
(Fausboll. Vol. Ill, p. 126.
Bdveru jataka.
Atite Baranasiyain Brahmadatte rajjam karente Bodhisatto
vuddliim
anvaya sobbagga-patto
iiiora-yoniyam
nibattitva
arailne vicari.
Tada ekacce vanija disa-kakam gabetva navaya
Tasmim
Baverurattharn agamamsu.
sakuna nama n'attbi.
kira kale
Baveruratthe
Agatagata rattha-vasino tam kup'agge
nisinnani disva " passath' imassa cbavivannam gala-pariyosanam mukhatundakani mani-gulaka-sadisani akkhiniti " kakam ev'â pasamsitva te vanijake ahatnsu "imam ayyo sakunam amhakani detha, amhakam bi imina attbo, tumhe attano
:
rattbe aiinam labhissatba

ti.
" Tena bi miilena ganbatba "
'
'
ti.
" Kabapanena no detbii "
bena vaddhetva " satena detba
"Nadema"
ti.
'
ti
'
vutte
'
ti.
Anupub-
ambtikara esa babu-
tumbebi pana saddbim raetti botu " ti kabapanasatam gabetva adanisu.

vuddhim anvaya " attaining full growtb " geruud {ami + i)
pakaro,
formed by analogy witb maya from mi, instead
ekacce
certain
'
mamsu,
3,
'
{*eka-tya-) disa
plur.
aor.
kakam
"went."
kingdom was evidently on the
'
Kira =
sea, in a
of
*anvetva.
aga
Tbe Baveru
foreign crow.'
kila.
country where birds
were supposed to be scarce, probably up the Persian Gulf,
agagag'ata
"passers
by,
spectators."
= JM. nisinna.
kupa
'mast.'
ni-
sinnam perched
passatha, 2nd plur. imperat.
"look at." -pariyosanam "at the end of" {paryavasdna)
'
'
" termination.
= S'.
-ajja.
Te
tarn
ayyo, perhaps we should read ayya.
'
'
Kahapana
"friendship."
187
a coin, here probably of
'
'
Sirs
'
metti
silver,
adamsu, adv. " they gave."
gahetva
pakkhipitva
suvanna-panjare
nanappa-
karena macchamamsena c'eva phalaphalena ca patijaggimsu.
Annesam sakunanam avijjamanatthane dasahi asaddhammehi

samannagato kako labhagga-yasagga-ppatto ahosi. Punavare
te vanija ekain may ura-rajanam gahetva yatha accharasaddena
vassati panippaharasaddena naccati
rattharp
evam sikkhapetva Baveru
So mahajane sannipatite navaya dhure
agamamsu.
thatvapakkhe vidhunitva madhura-ssaram niccharetva
nacci.
phalaphala "wild fruits." Pali often lengthens a vowel

when a word is repeated in a compound, so khandakhandam " in
pieces," kiccakiccani "all sorts of duties."
aor.
"watch
pati-jaggati
samannagato
'
'
'
endowed with
equivalent of this
is
look
over,
found
patijaggimsu,
after"
{sam + anu + a + gam)
'
Buddhist Sanskrit,
in
+ jagr)
{prati
the
yasagga
"height of glory." puna-vare "the next time." acchara

" snapping of the fingers." vassati " screams " x^'va&. They
had trained
it
to
thatva M. JM. thaiiina AMg. JS'.

causal of niccharati (nU +
-utter
fingers and to
dhure "on the prow."
scream at the snapping of the
dance at the clapping of the hands,

'
'
nicchareti "emit,
thicca.
car).
Manussa tam disva somanassa-jata " etam ayyo sobhaggapattam susikkhita-sakuna-rajanam amhakam detha " ti aham" Amhehi pathamam kako anito, tarn ganhittha, idani
su.
etam mora-rajanara anayimha, etam pi yacatha, tumhakam
ratthe sakunanam nama gahetva agantuni na sakka " ti " Hotu
ayyo, attano ratthe afinarn labhissatha, imam no detha" ti
mulam vaddhetva
ratana-vicitte
sahassena
panjare
ganhirpsu.
thapetva
Atha nam
satta-
macchamamsa-phalaphalehi
c'eva madhu-laja-sakkhara-panakadihi ca patijaggimsu, Mayuraraja
labhagga-yasagga-ppatto
jato.
Tassagatakalato pat-
nam oloketura pi
Kako khadaniya-bhojaniyani alabhamano kaka
thaya kakassa labhasakkaro parihayi, koci
na
ti
'
icchati.
vassanto gantva ukkarabhumiyam otari.
'
188
ahamsu aor. "they said." ganhittha 2, plur.

anayimha " we have brought." sakka "it
took."
sible."
'able'
Sometimes
this can
= iakyah),
but
derived from iakyal
it
petva = AMg.
thavia, thavia.
"
day forth."
"
we
parihayi "
ukkarabhumi "
stha), so
fell
tha-
thavitta, thaviilna, thaviya,
patthaya
ajjapatthaya
S'.
"
lit.,
"from
this
" from
khadaniyam " what
off."
can
otari " settled on."
dunghill."
Extract No.
Palil
come and
bhojaniyam " soft food." In verse

'kaka' ti vassanto "crying caw,
kajjabhojjam.
find
JM.
{'pra-'r
be chewed, hard food."
caw."
" It will be impossible to
any bird in your country."
laja " fried corn."
setting out from
and Pischel
often indeclinable,
is
of
thavetta,
pos-
be explained as the plural of sakko,
13'J.
even mention the name
'\vou
is
33.
Mahavamsa, Bk.
VII.
Conquest of Ceylon.
(Dines Anderson's Reader, p. 110.
of
Geiger's trans, p. 55).
The Buddha at his decease informed Indra that Vijaya son

King Sihabahu had gone to Lanka with seven hundred
followers,
and asked that he and
fully protected.
his followers
should be care-
Indra handed over the guardianship of Lanka
to Visnu.
V.
V.
6.
Sakkena vuttamatto so Lankam agamma sajjukam

paribbajaka-vesena rukkhamiilam upavisi.
7.
Vijaya-ppanuikha sabbe tain upecca apucchisum

" Ayani bho ko nu dipo ? " ti. " Lankadipo " ti abruvi.
6.
"
vutta
p.p. p.
from
matta
AMg. -mitta.
{matra),
kam
7.
" so
in
JM. AMg.
more commonly -metta.
agamma gerund of Jigacchati. sajju" quickly " derived from sadyah. vesena " in
the disguise
V.
vatti " he speaks
Pkts. have
-ppamukha
followers.'
'
"
(of
with
a parivrdjaka, wandering ascetic).
at their head,'
i.e.
'V. and his
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT,
V.
8.
" na
iti
9.
manuja ettha, na ca
vatva kundikayam te jalena
saflti
189
hessati vo
bhayam "
nisinciya
suttan ca tesam hatthesu laggetva nabhasagama,

dasaesi sonirupena paricarika-yakkhini.
10.
Eko
*'
11.
tarn variyanto pi rajaputtena
iti.
nama yakkhini
Tassa ca samini tattha Kuveni
kantanti tapasi viya.
nisldi rukkha-miilainhi
12.
anvaga
gaaiamhi vijjamanamhi bhavanti sunakha "
Disvana so pokkharanirn nisinnam tan ca tapasi m

tattha nahatva pivitva c'adaya ca muilalayo
pokkhare heva so vutthasi, tana abruvi
13.
Varifi ca
14.
mama, tittha " ti, alhabaddho va

Parittasuttatejena bhakkhetum sa na sakkuni
15.
Tam
" bhakkho
si
so naro.
yaciyanto pi tam suttani nada yakkhiniya naro.
gahetva surungayara rudantatp yakkhini khipi,
evatn ekekaso tattha khipi sattasatani

V.
S.
hessati,
also
V.
9.
from bhavati (*havissati) bhavissadi
fut.
suttam, e.g. as a protection against evil sprits, agama,

aor. " vanished"; also agami, agacchi, agamasi, etc.
"there appeared,"
cf.
dasseti
= dar-
variyanto, partic. of variyati pass, of vareti "forbid,"
anvaga
caus.
of
vunati.
" dogs
"
{iunakdh)
" only
V.ll.
Kantanti " spinning."
V. 12.
disvana, gerund
V. 13.
So Reader has
= disva,
the
tank
bound."
sakkuni
not
the
alhaka
aor.
sakkati.
sa but
is
it
"followed."
where there
is
also passitvana.
shoots"
ace. plur. "lotus
V.15.
aor.
soni " bitch."
iayati.
V. 14.
is
common.
dassesi
V. 10.
pi.
sunakha
a village."
mulalayo,
{mrndli).
was the man who came out
yakkhini.
of
alhabaddho "fast
a tethering post (drdhaka).
sakkunati
'is able.'
paritta-sutta
also
"protection
asakkhi from
thread,"
"thread charm" or "magic thread."

ada " he did not give."
khipi " hurled."
i.e.
nada = na
190
V. 16.
Anayantesu sabbesu vijayo bhayasankito

raddhapaficayudho gantva disva pokkharanim subbani
17.
apassa-m-uttinnapadam basantin c'eva tapasim,
me gahita nil " ti cintiya

me bboti tuam " iti aba tain,
bbaccebi, piva nabaya " ty-aba aa.
"ituaya khalu bbacca
18.
" kim na passasi bbacce
19.
" Yakkhini tava janati
"kim
rajaputta
mama
sigbam sanamarp savetva
jatin
"
ti
niccbito
dhanum sandbay'
upagato.
20.
Yakkbim adaya givaya naraca-valayena
21.
vamabattbena kesesu gabetva dakkbinena tu

ukkbipitva asira aba: "bbacce me debi dasi, tam
maremiti," bbayuttba sa jivitam yaci yakkbini:
22.
*'
Jivitam debi
me
sami,
raj jam
dassami
so
te
abam,
"
karissam' ittbikiccaii ca aniiam kinca yatbiccliitam
23.
24.
Adubbattbaya sapatbam so tam yakkbim akarayi,

" Anebi bbacce sigban " ti vuttamatta va sa nayi.
" Ime cbata " ti vutta sa tanduladi viniddisi
bhakkbitanam vanijanam navattbam vividbam babuni
25.
Bbacca
te
sadbayitvana bbattani vyafijanani ca
rajaputtam bbojayitva sabbe capi abbunjisuin.

V. 16.
anayanta " not coming." naddha " fastened, equipped witb." apassa " wbere be saw no footstep of
any man coming fortb," -mbhacca "servants" (hhrtyah).

V. 19.
a sandbi consonant.
bhoti "Lady."
sa-namam "bis name." savetva, gerund, caus. of

sunoti.
sandhaya "making ready-drawing" also
sandbetva,
{sam + dha)
sandabitva,
from
sandabati,
sandbeti
V.20.
naraca " a weapon."
V. 21
bhayattha = bhaya-sthd.
is
V. 22.
-kiccam
V.23.
adubhatthaya.
valaya- " noose."
{Icrtyam) so in S.
"tbat be migbt not be betrayed."
sapatbam " oatb."

V. 24.
chata " bungry "

(vi
+ nir +
di6)
{psdta) 39.
viniddisi
"sbowed"
Old Prakrit
Extract No.
Hathigumpha
This Inscription
from Cuttack.
in
is
one
191
34.
Inscription.
of the
Udayagiri caves 19 miles
corrected text was published by Bhagwanlal
Indraji in the Proceedings of the Sixth International Congress

of Orientalists at Leiden, 1883, Part III, p. 135.
It
written
is
Old Brahml characters and has been assigned to the 2nd
in
The inscription gave a summary of Kharavela's

Unfortunately it is very fragmentary.
year by year.
cent. B.C.'
reign
As
is
are
the case with Asoka's inscriptions, double consonants
written single,
but
tliey
have been rendered as double
consonants in this extract in order

be more familiar
to
"
orthographic, once
it
The
student.
the
the
tiiat
forms should
difference
only
is
has been determined what words were
intended.
(1)
Namo Arahantanam
Namo savva-Siddhanam
maharajena maha-megha-vahanena.
Verena
Ceta-raja-vamsa-vaddha-
nena pasattha-subha-lakkhanena catur-antala-thana-gunopagatena Kalingadhipatina
siri-Kharavelena
pandarasa-vassani
siri-kumara-sarlravata kidita kumara-kidaka.

verena, = virena.
pandarasa = Pali
pannarasa.
JM. pannarasa, Apa. pannaraha, H. pandrah.
It
AMg.
Pali,
is
remarkable
that the d should occur so early.

Translation.'^
Salutation to the Arhats.

fifteen years princely sports
Salutation to
all
Siddhas.
For
were played with an auspicious
princely body by the heroic Maharaja the illustrious Kharavela,
the lord of Kalinga, with a mighty cloud

vehicle, propagator of the
(elephant)
Chaitra royal dynasty,
as
his
bearing
lauded and auspicious marks, and endowed with the four internal virtues.
Early History of India,' 2nd Edition. Xotes on

and 196. Fleet, J.R.A.S. 1910, p. 242 and p. 824.
Follows that of Bhagwanlal Indraji, with some slight modifications.
Vincent Smith,
pages 38, 40, 187

2
'
102
(2)
Tato lekha-rijpa-ganana-vavahara-vidhi-visaradena sav-
va-vijjSvadatena nava-vassani yovvarajain pasasitani.
yovvarajam {yauva-rdjyam) Pali
Then
for nine years
raj jam.
he enjoyed
being proficient in writing, painting
and excellent at
of procedure,
(3)
(?)
as
heir-apparent,
arithmetic and the rules
learning.'
all
Sanipuiina-catuvisati-vasso
power
ca
dwaua-dharamena
sesa-
yovvanabhivijaj'a- vattiye Kalinga- raja- vamsa-purisa-yuge
maharajabhisecanarn papunati.
Danava. In his Sanskrit version Bh. gives danena ca and

he translates " hy peace and religious policy," but he records
no doubt about the reading given as above, except that he
leaves a space in the plate
between na and
va.
papunati, Pali
papunati.
And wiien he had completed twenty-four years, according to

Danava law (?) in a generation of the Kalinga royal family,^
that he might pass the rest of his manhood in conquests, he
was
installed as
(4)
Maharaja.
Abhisitta-matto ca padhama-vasse vata-vihata-gopura-
pakara-nivesanam
patisamkharayati
Kalinga-nagarim
khibi-
ra(m) ca sitala-tarlaga-padiyo ca bandhapayati savv-uyyanapatisaip-thapanain ca karayati panatisahi sata-sahassehi pakatiye rafijayati.
padhama.
'royal
'tanks.'
Palipathama.
camp.'
sitala
panatlsa JM.
tiye Bh. renders
read
S*.
etc.
sitala.
panatisa,
padhama.
padi
Pali
khibira(i{6j>a).
(pali)
'dike'
Bh.
paiicatinisam.
paka-
We
should
by prakftlh and " the people."
expect pakatiye.
Compare Biihler. Indian Studies N'o. Ill, p. 13.

Bh. "in the i/oke of the (previous) personages of the royal dynasty
The meaning of this is not clear. If the reading is correct,
of Kalinga."
it would appoar that a Kalinga prince could not become MaharSja until
he was 24.
'
INTRODUCTION TO PEAK BIT
193
In his
first year being barely installed he repaired Kalinga

and the cantonment with the gates, walls and dwellings
injured by the wind, had built cool tanks and dikes, and had
city
all
the gardens put in order for
thirty-five
lakhs, artd
thus
pleased the people.
Ditiye ca vasse abhittayitta Satakanni pacchima-disam
(5)
haya-gaja-nara-radha-bahulam dandam patthapayati.
banam khattiyanam ca
abhittayitta,
banam not
Kusam-
sahayavata pattam Masikanagaram(?).
gerund
abhi +
Reading
ira.
from
Kusam-
quite certain.
In the second year, S'atakarni protecting the west sent a
numerous
army
Assisted by the
of
horses,
elephants,
Kusamba Kshatriyas
(he)
men and
chariots.
obtained the city of
Masika(?).
Tatiye ca puna vasse gandhavva-veda-buddho dampa
(6)
natta-gita-vaditta-samdassanahi ussava-samaja-karapanahi
ca
kldapayati nagarim.
natta = wr/to.
karapana as in Pali
'
a causing to be made.'
In the third year again, he learnt the science of music, and
amused the
city
by exhibitions
of
dampa
(?)
dancing, music,
and musical instruments, and by holding festive parties.
The
inscription continues
up
to the thirteenth year of the
There are however so many gaps in the text that
reign.
it is
In
often difficult to interpret the remaining words or letters.
the eighth year he gave trouble to the king of Rajagrha
(Raja-gaha-napam pidapayati)
army and made off to Mathura.
who
apparently deserted
hi-s
In the twelfth year he caused
among the people of Magadha Magadhanam ca vipulam bhayam janeto) made his elephants drink
great consternation
having severely punished the king of

Magadha made him bow at his ieet{Magadham ca, rajanam
of
the Ganges, and
bahu
patisasitta
pade va(n)dapayati).
13
194
Old Magadhi.]
Extract No.
35.
S'utanuka nama devadaîkkyi
Kamayittha Balanaêye
Devadinne nama lupaddakkhe.
tarn
The long vowels and double consonants are not shown in the
The inscriporiginal in the Jogimara cave on Ramgarh Hill.
The dialect appears to be
tion is in Old Brahmi characters.
Old Magadhi. The meaning of lijpadakkhe {rupadakso) is
doubtful: " skilled in painting " "sculptor" ci. {rupakrt) ha,ve
been suggested.
Balanaeye
'
belonging to Benares.'
'
Ka-
mayittha, 3 sing. aor. as in AMg.
Liiders.
Survey
For another explanation see Bloch.
of India, 1903-4, p. 124.
Annual Report Arch.
INDEX OF EXAMPLES.
and
[This index comprises moat of the examples given in Part I,
words explained
in Part
AMg.,
anavayagga,
146, n.
a,
'
and,'
aam,
3.
(AMg.
'this,' 110.
'
ainsu,
H.
'
ajâm).
64.
mhi.
cf.
Also assu.
n. 2.
anasana, fasting,' p. 146, n. 10.

anahiaa, heartless,' p. 117, v. 64.
*
anahii3.na, ignorant,' 36.

anaiya, AMg., without beginning,'
*
'
asu.
akaannua,
'ungrateful,'
p. 120,
p. 146, n.
aniada,
V. 83.
1.
uncertain,' p. 87, n. 6.
'
to be
akanda, unexpected,' p. 93, n. 5.

akayya, Mg. (akarya), p. 165, n. 2.
akarimsu, aor., they did,' 133.
akasi, AMg., he did,' 133.
akkhala, Mg.
letter,' p. 165, n. 1.
akkhi, eye,' 40 Pb. akkh. H.
anU2;ejjha,
akh. cf. acchi.

agada, a well,' p. 123, n. 2.
anguliaa, rmg,' p. 90, n. 6.
aggala, ' bolt,' p. 136, v. 19.
aggahattha, finger,' p. 101, v. 4.
aggi, 'fire,' 36, 62, 88. Pb. agg.
anena, by this,'
anna, other,' 48,
'
'
anudiahaijl,
ag.
valuable,' 56.
accanta, excessive,'
acchai, 'stays,' 60,
acchara, nymph,'
'
'
44.
p. 123, n. 9.
'
* search,'
48.
p. 82, n. 5.
'
attae, AMg., son,' p. 147, n. 2.
cf. appa.
mother,' p. 110 (c).
attha, (1) here,' 45 (atra).
atta,
'
attia,
'
self,' 36, 100.
'
weapon,'
(1) 'is; (asti),

*
bone,'
(3) -arthi,
adidhi,
cf.
56 (astra).
38, 132.
atthi.
JM.
'guest,' 11, 14.

p. 122, n. 3.
anxiety,' p. 128, n.
adda, *wet,'
addhii,
adha,
'
'
then,'
adhannada,
6.,
3.
14.
'
misfortune,' p. 88,
n. 2."
:'.
{-adhyatmika).
p. 83,
n. 8.
'on
one another,'
annesidum,
(2)
7.
'determined,'
AMg.,
'
annesana,
atthi,
AMg.
110.
73.
58.
'
ajjaiifcta, 'gentleman,'
p.
111.
annunna=annonna
(3)
ajja (1) to-day,' 44. Apa. jju.

Pb. ajj.
Old H. aju.
H. aj.
p. 147, n.
27.
(2) -artha, 45.
' eye,'
cf. akkhi
39.
acchiim, acchi ni, M. plur. , i
acchera, M. =accharia, 76.
atthae,
day by day,'
affection,' 9.
'
aechi,
urya, 50.
(2)
ajjaa, 'lady,' p. 97, n.
'
145, n. 4.
39.
wonderful,'
Also accharlarn.
ajjhatthiya,
ajjhavasida,
'
anuvvaya, AMg., ordinance,'
'
acchariam,
favoured,'
'
'
'
anuraa,
'
aggha,
6.,
53.
'
'
H.
p.
incessant,' p. 129,
'
125.
tear,' 49, 64.
endless,'
'
1.
anavaraya, JM.,
ainia, 'led beyond,'

amsi, AMg., I am,'
of the
11]
account
of,'
atithi,
known,'
'
conscience,'
51.
andharia, darkened,'
82.
apavagga, JM.,
beatitude,'
'
p. 135, n.
appa,
appa,
1.
bone,' 38.
' not
anajjanto,
being
p. 123, n. 9.
antakkarana,
cf.
'small,'
'
'final
1.
self,'
37.
36,
100.
H. 5p.
atta.
appatta,
'
unobtained,' p. 114, v.
3.
196
appia
(1)
'
not dear,' 6.
(2)
sent,'
p. 109(e).
nectar,' p. 102, v.
amejjha, 'impure,' p. 130, n.
'
amham,
amhe,
9.
alasi,
vedic atasl,
cf.
avara,* other,'
an i {w)aver.
avarajjhai,
17.
125.
H.
'p.
Rom-
aur.
afternoon,'
'
AMg.,
avaratta,
'
52.
night,' p. 145, n. 2.
avaricida, stranger,' p. 91, n.
'
avassam,
avahga,
'
necessarily,' 49.
corner (of eye),' p.
of
1.
116,
aveia,
'of liim,'
'
horse,'
tear,' 04.
Hha, 'then,' 14.

ahara, lower,' p.
ahigliaa,
'
6.
M. asa.
amsu.
adha.
'
'
new,'
token,'
asi,
aada,
a(y)ava,
'
in
92.
sits
down,' 125.
they said,'
'
'
133.
overlordship,'
=ili, p. 136, v. 10.

'
ikkhu,
1.
icchai,
sugar-cane,'
40.
cf.
'
promi.ses,'
JM.,
p.
128,
n. 4.
9.
p. 130,
the beginning.'
ucchu.
7.
1.
aihl, Apa.,
AMg.,
ia =iti, p. Ill (e).

iaip, this,' 110,
aaredi, invites,' p. 101, n.

aittha, JM., commanded,'
'
'
133.
p. 90. n. 3.
trouble,' p. 101, n.
(2) 'sky,' p. 113(6).
li.
was,'
'
p. 125, n. 5.
p. 144, n. 5.
'
'
begun,'
= assa.
'
Also ahu.
ahevacca, AMg.,
13.
arrived,' 2.
'
heat,' p. 153, n.
aai>a, (I)
announced,'
'
'
ahamsu, AMg..
'
'
asiadi, 6.
116, v. 63.
smitten,' p. 116. v. 61.
abinava,
ahinnana.
cf.
cf.
is
'
picture,' p. 84, n. 3.
'
poured out,' a orj.
,
turned roimd,' p. 114.
'
horse,
asa, ace. plur.
110.
49.
arambhadi.
V. 6.
asa,
'
57.
12
JM.
avatta,
'all,' 20.
(2)
assu,
alekkha,
(o).
11.
(1)
begun,'
'
'
'
asesa,
9.
impatience,
'
arabbhai.
avajjia,
112
know,'
aruhai, mounts,' 125.

aliddha, ' embraced,' p. 116, v. 61.
v. 61.
p.
125.
125.
'
avi, also,' 17.

asamatthaa, unable,"
'
state ?' p. 145, n.
araddha,
half
latter
Ji
116.
I (don't)
(c).'
amarisa,
avaranha,
assa,
ane)
108
125.
adhappai, caus. pass, adha, 135(c).

abhioia, abhiogiya, AMg.. -of the
apa + radh,
passive.
bring,'
'
125,.
36.
brought,'
'
125
orders,'
ane, (na
38.
125.
asoga,
S.
anesu,
ordered,"
'
brought,'
anida,
condition,'
'
5.
58.
applied,"
anavedi,
ania,
23.
taken away,'
'
avattha,
teacher,"
'
anatta,
57.
'
avanida,
come,'
'
in vain,' 67.
alihadi, Mg. =arhati.
alia,
having
adhatta,
begun
pp. from adhai.
76.
wandering mendicant.'
'
2.
'
agara, AMg., house," p. 145, n.

agasa. AMg., JM. aasa, 11.
acaria,
worth,'
'
JM.
7.
'
'we,' 47, 106.
ariha,
'
p. 123, n. 9.
107.'
amhakera, 'our,'
drum T p 130, n.
battle,' p. 142, n.
agantum,
2.
AMg., JM.,
'of us,' M.,
agada, 6.=aftda,
interior,' 43.
'
JM.
Sojja,
aohana,
abbhahia (=:abhy-adhika)
amiam,
second,'
long-lived one,' p. 15Q,
'
n. 4.
136, V. 23.
abie. AMg., ' without

p. 145, n. 1.
abbhantara,
AMg.
auso,
JM.,p.
93.
icehe,
iddhi,
'
I desire,' atiu., 115.
AMg.,
iijiarp,
'
'
this,'
increase,' p. 146, n.
71.
6.
woman,' p. 84, n. 1.
idha. here,' 28.
the rainbow,
in
indaalammi,
itthi,
'
'
AMg. =imie.
'
iha,
sage,'
here,'
'
'
of this,' fern.
'
uvaarana,
aid,' 17.
'
uvacchandido,
110.
ificaê, Mg.,
isi,
looking up,' 46.

ure, on the breast,' p. 117, v. 76.
ullavida,
'shouted out,' p. 93,
n. 12.
p. 113(b).
imise,
umtnuha,
197
desirest,' 116.
UVajjhaa,
60.
90,
p.
teacher,'
'
17, 44.
uvatthavei AMg. ,' prepares,' p. 146,
=idha.
28.
coaxed,'
'
n. 16.
n.' 5.
uvaraa,
colouring,' p. 101, n. 4.
'
uvari,
above,' 17.
uvalevana, smearing,' p. 100, n. 4.
uvasappissam,
I will creep up,'
'
'
idisa,
like this,' 70.
'
'
gently,' p. 107 (o).

Thamiya, ' wolf,' p. 160, n.
isisi,
4.'
p. 99, n.
'
uvasampajjai, AMg., 'gets to,'

-ittanam, abôl. , p 147, n. 4.
uvahara, oblation,' p. 100, n. 5.
uvaiya, JM.
'offering' p. 128,
6.
'
n. 4.
ua, 'lo!,' M.,p. 103, v. 4.

water,' 10.
iiatthia {=upa-sthita), p. 118, v. 78.
uaroa. ill-will,' p. 136, v. 10.
ocean.' p. 114, v. 56.
tiahi,
uahiu.M., abl., 93.
uida, fitting.' p. 95, n. 2.
ukkara, multitude,' p. 94, 10.
Uia,
'
'
uvalahissam,
reproach,'
will
'
p. 83, n. 9.
UVvatta, 'turned
over,'
114,
p.
V. 56
'
uvvigga,
'
usu, AMg.,
'
'
'
ukkinna, scattered,'
ukkhaa, rooted up,'
'
'
ukkhitta,
thrown
Uggama,
'
p. 165, n. 1.
p. 121, v. 85.
up,' p. 116, v. 63.
anxious,' 42.
arrow,' 70.
ussasa (M. usasa) sigh,'

uhaa, both,' p. 101, n. 5.
'
41.
'
rising,' 34.
uggahihi, will sing,' p. 120, v. 84.

uccoda, withering ? p. HO (a).
ucehii, M., ' sugar-cane,' 40, 70
H. ikh. E.H. ukh.
cf. 6. ikkhu.
Mar. us. Bg. akh.
'
'
'
ujjala,
blazing,' 42.
'
ujjaij.a,
ujjua,
'
straight,' 15, 68.

'
'
47.
Guj.
unhu.
utta, spoken,' 125.

uttinna, traversed,' 125.
utthahgia, M., supported,' p. 114,
'
'
'
V. 56.
'
let
41, 63.
E
in this,' 47.
' in this state,' p. 1 10 (c).
e(y)aruva, AMg., ' of this form,'
p. 145, n. 2.
'
ei,
'
goes,'
ekka,
'
)2.
one,'
15, 112.
him stand
ettha, here,'
edi,' goes,'
'
edihasia,
'
12, 132.
legendary,'
they go,'
eravana, 61.
enti,
70.
'
lotus,' 34.
uppida, bursting out,' p. 114,

ubbheiya, erect,* p. 130, n. 2.
'
'
cf. ei.
61.
132.
erisa, like this," 24, 70.

evaddhe, Mg., so great,'
(evadda, JM.).
n. 4.
'
uppala,
ega.
'
up,' p. 97,
n. 8.
'
JM.
ettahe, M.,p. 119, v. 80.
Mar. un.
utthedu,
eavattham,
ujjoviya, lighted up,' p. 159, n. 14.

ujjhida, (JM., ujjhiya). 'left behind,' p. 129, n. 11.
una, but,' 3.
unha, 'hot.'
festival,'
usasa = ussasa.
eassim,
garden,' p. 97, n. 11.
'
usava,
'
v. 3.
evvam,
eso,
'
'
thus,' 68.
this,'
110.
p.
170,
198
kadharp,
how?'
6..
M.
14.
kaham.
oSsa, M., space," p. 114, v. 3.
oinna, ' descended,' 125. Also
odinna.
onavia, bent down,' 25.
otthaya,
covered with." p. 159,
'
'
'
n. 15.
having descended,'
'
122.
kadhedu,
him
let
'
tell.' 11.
14.
75.
kadhesu. tell,' 116.

kanta, gone,' 125 (kram).
kappa, age, etc.,' 37.
kappadiya, JM., 'pilgrim,'
JM.,
olagga,
'
'
odalia.
'
'
odaria,
Mg.
kadhida, told,' 11.

kadhidura, to tell,' 136.
'
'
followed,'
124,
p.
123,
p.
n. 10.
n. 9.
oviya,
decorated,' p. 159, n.
gone off,' p. 108 (6).
'
osaria,
'
osaha,
'
kamala,
(l)
20.
lotus,' p. 84, n. 9.
rice,' p. 102, n. 9.
'
'
(2)
herb,' AMg., osadha,

lopped,' p. 116, v. 61.
'
oharia,
16.
karaala,=.E'afcwz, p. 112
karamagara,
(/t).
'workman,'
JM..
p. 127, n. 5.
kammaggino,
JM.
(karmagneh),
93.
kaa,
S.
done,'
JM., kaya,
125.
60.
kada and kida.
kaa-ggaha,
'
hair-seizing,'
117,
p.
Kaanta,
'
Fate,' p. 99. n. 10.

'
plantain-house,' p. 82,
n._6.
p. 145,
1.
ki, poet,' p. 103, V. 3.

kaima, M., (=katama),
'
69.
kado,
6.
'
117,
p.
karania),
(S.
'
be
to
karandaa.
karidurn,
basket,' p. 97. n. 11.

to do,' 112.
'
'
AMg.,
having done,'
'
karissam,
'
I will do,' 134.
kariadi,
'
is
kariadu,
let it
'
122.
done,' 135.
be done,' p. 96, n.
'does,' 128.
karenta, doing,' 102.
karemana. AMg., doing,' p.
5.
'
'
145,
n. 2.
2.
kakkola =kankota,
kahkamaa, JM.,
16.
'like
heron's
124, n. 11.
kankhia, 'desired,' p. 112 (a) (kanbill,' p.
karesu, -do,' 116.

kalemi, Mg.. I do,' p. 166, n. 2.
kalevara, body,' 18.
kallakallim,' everv morning,' p. 150,
'
'
n. 6.
knla).
kacchabha, AMg., tortoise,'

kajja, to be done,' 50, 137.
'
AMg.,
'
is
done,'
135.
kavala, mouthful,' 18, p. 108

kavala, Apa., lotus,' 25.
kavalia, eaten,' p. Ill (/).
kavada, door-panel,' p. 101, n.
'
19.
(b).
'
'
kajjai,
karedi,
for the sake of 'p. 110 (a).
kao, J. AMg., 'whence,'

p. 153, n.
what
137.
karitta,
kayai kvaâvi, AMg., 'sometime,'
'
karanijia
done,'
kaall-hara,
'
V. 76.
V. 64.
kae,
kammi, M.
'
Note.
kflt;tkkha, side glance,' p. 1 12 (g).

kadaa, JM., fetter,' p. 129, n. 7.
kadua, bitter,' p. 87, n. 5.
kadhia, boiled,' 6. kadhida, 42.
'
'
kavva,
kasana,
6.
poetry,' 50.
dark,' p. 116, v. 63.
'
'
'
'
kaha,
'na,
'
gold,' p. 101, n. 6.
kanakkania,' resounding,'
p.
(d).
kantha, neck,' 3J.

kaQna, ear,' 48.
kanha, =krma, 47.
knda, see kaa.
'
'
p. 102, V. 2,
14.
kahS.
1 1 1
kaham, how
'
story,' p. 120, v. 84.
kabiqi
'
where,' p. 81, n.
1.
'
knhissam,
'
kadama, kadara,
'
which
kaatthaa
kaiirp,
?
"
69,
(1)
M.,
(2)
AMg.,
'
will relate,' 134.
Also kadhissam, M. kahis.sam.
to do,'
'
121.
having done.'
having done,'
kaduip,6. Mg..'
136.
'
136.
knuna, M.,
111.
kadhaissnip,
I will tell,' 1.34.

=kayasthaka, 38.
'
122.
to do,' 63, 121,
kamae =kamyaya,
komudi (M. komul),
48.
karedi, cans., has done,'

kSredum, infin., 136.
kfilake, Mg., 'door,' p, 165, n. 2.

kSlana, Mg. =karanat, p. 166, n. 3.
kaham, ' I will do,' 134.
what then
'
buys,'
klida, 'done,'
'
kilanta,
131.
11.
weary,'
'
kilitta,
prepared,'
'
kilissai,
kivina,
wretched,'
'
kidlsa,
of
what
done,'
is
'
'
'
(2)
'dug,' 125.
khacida),
why
kuo, JM.,
khavia.
?
'
khara,
70.
5.
'
'
does,'
131, p. 112 (o).

p. 144,
14.
'
wasted,' 125.
wasted,' 125. cf. khina.
'
'
khippai,
'
thrown,' 40, 125.

is thrown,' 135, p. 130,
n. 7.
khippam
AMg.,
eva,
'quickly,'
p. 146, n. 5.
'
'
is
is
'
khitta,
1.
40. kucchio, AMg.,

kucchi rnsi, loc. , 93.
kujja, AMg., he may do,' 133.
kuttedi, Mg.
has cut,' p. 166, n.
kudila, crooked,' 16.
kudumba, household,' 16.
'
'
khinna,
'
40.
dug,' 135 {d).

exhau.sted,' p. 115, v.
'
eats,' 127.
'
thin,' p. 97, n. 2.
alkali,' p. 110 (6).
khijjai,
135.
belly,'
abl., 93.
kunai,
'
khama,
60.
kukkhi, 6 kucchi, M.
sword,' 34.
dug,' 135.
dug,' 125. AMg., JM.,
is
khai, Apa.=khaai,
125.
p. 85, n. 2.
whence,' p. 139, n.
'
p.
'
'
Khattia,= Ksatriya,
'
S.khanida'inlaid,'
109 (a).
khammai,
i9.
sort
^.
khatta.
is afflicted,'
'
wound.'
125, p. 110(6).
(^
khanna,
57.
kilittha, 'afflicted,' 125.

kilinna, ' moistened,' 57.
kisa,
khaia,
khajjai,
KH
a
-hurt
khada,
(l)
khagga,
n. 7.
kirai,
khaa,
?,' 3.
kinkini, 'bell,' p. Ill (d).

kicca, AMg., ' having done,' p. 147,
kinai,
moonlight,'
'
61.
128.
'
kim una,
199
kunamane, AMg., 'doing,'
khividum,
khina,
khu,
'
'
to throw,'
wasted,'
'
particle,'
khujja,
play
H. chin,
74.
hump-back,'
'
khel. khel
136.
40.
6, 34.
6, 22.
'),
n. 5.
kuddho, J.M.,
kuppadi,
is
'
kumbhanda,
'
'
angry,
n. 5.
kumbhilaa,
n.
Mg.
'
thief,'
p.
165,
1.
kulta,
canal,' p. 110 (a).

kuvia, JM. , ' angry,' p. 129, n. 11.
'
kuvida,
kuwam,
p. 12S, n. 8.
angry,' 125.
white gourd,' p. 93,
angry,' 125.
AMg., doing,'
gaa (6. gada)

gaana, 'sky'
n.
'
gone,' 11, 125.
{gagana),
p.
101,
i.
gaammi= grafe.
92.
ga(y)ava(y)a, JM.,
'
aged,' p. 136,
V. 14.
gainda,
lord of elephants,'
'
81.
'
kuvvamane atm.
103.
p. 146, n. 9.
kera, to be done,' 76.

keria, belonging to,' p. 99, n. 8.
kerisa=kidisa, 24, 70.
Mg.,
gaccha,
(l)
'go,'
gats.
(2)
JM.,
Kash.
116.
"school-sect,"
'
'
keliê.
kelake, Mg.
'
belonging
to,' p. 167f
gando,
'
night-watchman
'
p. 122,
n."3.
n. 6.
kevali,
AMg., ' absolute
ledge,' p. 145, n. 3.
kesesu, (Mg. keieSu), 21.
ko, who,' 110.

koila, cuckoo,'
'
konca,
p. 136, V. 23.
gacchahi, AMg., ' go,' 116.
gacchittae, AMg., inf., 136.
ganthi, ' knot,' 55.
'
p. 112 {g).
crane,' 35.
know-
ganta, AMg.,
gantum,
'
'to
having gone,'
go,'
122.
121,
136.
Also gacchidum, gamidum.
gamissadi, will go,' 134.

gamiadi. 6. passive, is gone,'
M. gammai, 119, 125.
119.
'
'
200
garala.
poison,' p. 110
'
garua,
heavy,'
cakka,
(6).
garukkha, JM.,
'
full
wheel,'
Apa. cakku.
H. cak.
45.
Sindhi caku.
71.
of,'
13fi,
p.
Pb. cakk.
cakkamai, JM., goes in
circles,'
'
p. 122, n. 4.
V. 13.
Garuda, 6.=Garula, M.
Galuda,
Mg.,'22
gallakka,
gavittha,
gahavai,
eanga,
crystal,' 50.
'
'
'
cakkavatti,
cakkhusa,
sought,' 125 (gaveaai).

house-holder,'
99,
p.
'
emperor,' p. 93, n.
with the eye,' 104.
beautiful,' p. Ill
'
13.
'
(c).
caccara, square,' p. 124, n. 10.

cadavia, increased,' p. 123, n.
catta, abandoned,' 119.
'
'
12.
'
n. 8.
gahia (6. gahida), seized,'

gahium, M. inf., 136, note.
'
gai,
'
125.
village,' 45.
25 end.
esteemed,'
cf.
from M., AMg., JM.,

garava=M.S. gorava =âMroro.
p. 135, V. 5,
gijjai,
'
sung,'
is
ginhium, AMg.,
135, p. 130, n. 6.
'to seize,' 136,
note.
giddha,
H. gidh.
summer,'
giddh.
gimha,
vulture,'
'
'
47.
Pb.
60.
Mar. dia-
lect, glm.
AMg.,
'
house,' p. 152, n.
sung,' 125.
guttha, ' strung,' p. Ill {/).
giha,
gia,
7.
'
gumma,
bunch,'
'
48.
'
genhia, gerund., p. 95,
n.
genhiura (S. genhidum),

genhidavva. 137.
4.
inf., 136.'
house,' p. 152. n.
geha, JM
goccha, M., bush,' 71.
gotthi, JM., society,' p. 136,
,
'
leather- worker,' 82.
H. camar.
JM., 'generous,'
Canakka, 43.
Caunda, 25.
p. 135, v.
M.
Citthni,
citthadi).
(6.
cf.
6.
'collects,'
einha,
13
1.
'
(2) ' heart,' p. Ill (e).

cittaaro, 'painter,' p. Ill (e).
'
picture tablet,'
CUUna,
5.
135.
'
ciadi, passive ci,
ghadavehi, have fashioned,' p. 100,
128,
mark,' 52.
Citta(l) 'bright,' 45.
Mg., delays,'
civvai = cimmai.
115,
cinai (cinoti).
v. 23.
joining with,' p.
Mg.
cisthadi, 'stands,' 7.
citthittae, AMg., inf., 130.
cinai, ' collects,' 131.
cinijjai, pass., 135.
cindha=cinha, 52.
cimmai, passive ci,
v.' 6.
.5.
cava, ' bow,' p. 109 (e).

cia, 'like,'p. 114,v. 3; p. 117, v. 75.
ciiicaia, ' adorned,' p. 130, n. 4.
cittaphalaam,
GH
'
'
cai,
cilaadi,
ghadanta,
oceans,' 61.
'
cammaraa,
7.
'
'
(caiikkaM.),' square',
38.
einedi,
gejjha =grahya, 70, 137.

seizes,'
genhai, (6 genhadi)
52, 131.
four,' 112.
H. cauk.
cadussamudda, four
garavia, JM., 'highly
'
cadukka, ^.
sings,' il27.
gam a,
cattari,
p. 167, n.
I.
135.
'lime,' p.
102, n.
H.
3.
cuna, (cur7ia) 'powder,' p. 141,
'
n.'3.
ghara, M.AMg., abl. 'from home,'

92.
gharini,
wife,' p. 93, n. 13.
'
ghettum,M.
'
V. 14.
cf.
'
is
to seize,' 19, 136.

p. 121,
ceiya, AMg., ' sacred,' p. !51, n.

coria ca?irâ, 58.
genhia.
CH
seized,' 135.
Cha, M. AMg.,
abandons,' 125.
caiira, 'four,' 112. causu.
112.
'
six,' 6. 112.
34.
chaccarana, six footed,'

chattha, sixth,' 6.
chuna. 'festival,' p. 119, v.
*
caai, M.,
101.
n. 5.
ghettuna M.,' having seized,'

gheppai,
n. 8.
CUmbia, kissed,' p. 107 (o).

CUa (6. cuda), 'mango,' p.
'
'
loo.
chai;ii;La,
'
81.
hidden,' p. 91, n. 5.
6.
chammuha,
six- faced,' 46.
'
'colour,' etc., p. 97, n. 6;

p. 102, n. 2.
chane (?), p. 119, v. 81.
chava, AMg., 'child, etc'
Pali
chijjai,
109
is split,' p.
'
ehinna,
jugga,
-AMg.
9.
cuts,'
juvala,
'
n. 10.
39.
joined,'
119,
129,
battle,' p. 128. n. 7.
Pb.
'
is
H. jujh.
jujjh.
'
'
135.
jujjha,
130.
jealousy.'
'
pair,' 36.
'
jujjadi,
'
chuhai, JM.
throws,' p. 124, n. 6.
chuha, M., hunger,' 39.
chea, a cut,' p. 116, v. 62.
cheetta, AMg.. ' having cut,' p. 146,
,
pair,'
'
juguccha,
2.
(a).
chindadi),
(6
'
juala,
p. 146, n. 10.
cut,' 125, 130.
chindai,
jivvai, is conquered,' 135.

jiha, ' tongue,' 54.
juai, ' young women,' p. 109 (e).
juarao, heir apparent,' 99, note,
chaa,
chapa=.â6a, S G.
chaha, 'shadow,' p. 102, n,
201
125.
junjai,
'
joins,'
jutta,
'
joined,'
judiaro,
.34,
125.
gamester,' p. 97, n.
'
10.
jeum, to win,' 136.

jeva, jevva, 68.
'
chettum, to cut,' 136.

chettuna, M. JM., 'having
'
cut,'
jo,
p. 146, n. 10.
'
who,'
110.
joisara, ' magician,' p. 93, n. 10.

joehi, harness,' p. 97, n. 12.
'
jai, (6. abso. jadi),
J auna= Yamuna,
if,'
S 1-
'
25.
jakkha. =yaksa, p. 128, n. 4.

jaccana, gen.
"genuine,'
plur.,
p. iii(c).
janna,
}ogi=yogl, 1.
jogga, fit,' 43.
jonha, 'moonlight,'
dat. jonhaa, 94.
jovvana,
'
youth,' 15, 61, 68.
sacrifice,' 36.
'
JH
jadha
Mg. yadha),
(M. jaha.
'a3,'l, 14.
jappia, babbled,' 37.
jampia, JM., 'said,' p. 129, n. 9.
jampimo, we speak,' 69.
'
'
Jambu.
jhanajhananta,' jingling,' p.
jhai,
jhana,
meditation,' p. 96, n.
'
jhma=khina,
80.
'
'running
with
stands,' 127.
thadurp, ' to stand,' 136.
thai,
blazes,' p. 110 (6).
jaladda,
water,'
'
thavetta, AMg., 'having
p. Ill (b).
jalana, flames,' p. 113 (6).

jasa, glory,' p. 113 (6).
stand,' p. 147, n. 2.
thahihi, ' will stand,'
jaha =jadha,
thia
'
'
jaa
14, i8.
jada), born-child,'
JM.. 'quantity,'
'
(6.
ja(y)a,
122,
thii
'
bom,'
is
jada, 6.
jamadua,
jalaula,
'
'
'
134.
stood,' 12, 38,
thidi),
Also thii.
'
standing-state,'
115.
child,' p. 90, n. 7=jaa.

son-in-law,' 60.
mass of flames,' p. 136,
'
dakka, bitten,' 125.

dajjhamana, JM.,' burning,'
'
,
wines,' 125, 131.
old,' p. 97, n. 11.
jibbha, AMg.,
tongue,' 54.
125.
p. 129,
n. 8.
dasai,
jia (6. jida), 'conquered,'

Also jitta.
M.
'
doya,
'
'
bites,' 125.
?
p. 130, n. 3.
dapper
'
DH
'
'
'
jibh.
to
125.
knows,'
V. 17.
jinna,
(6.
38.
janae. atm.
jinai,
thida),
(6.
made
also thia.
125.
p.
n. 5.
jaadi,
6.
40.
TH
'
'
HI (d).
reflects,' 127.
'
35.
jammai, is born,' 135 (a).

jammantara, another birth,'
jalai,
110(6).
p.
H.
dhakkedi,
dhanka,
'
'
shuts,' p. 170, n.
crow,'
7.
9.
202
nitthavana,
'inflection,'
136.
p.
V. 11.
naa,
'
bent,'
naHna,
125.
'eye,' 7,
nain.
nada).
(6.
H. Pb.
20.
nenu.
S.
naara,
nayara, JM.,
'city,' 9.
p. 122, n. 1.
naia, ' having led,' 122.

nalssadi, will lead,' 134.
'him,' 110.
now,' p. 85, n.
(l)
'
(2)
nakkha,
najjai,
nattaa,
nattha
known,'
drama,'
is
'
'
namayam,
naraejja.
nilada, 'forehead,'
H. hlar.
niruvaissam,
43.
nivadanta,
2.
meekness,' p. 135,
'
may
'
nivanna,
bend,' p. 115, v.
14.
'
naha = nakkha, 13.

naa, known,' 125.
,
naagu, Apa. (=nayakah),
n].
naham,
'
Ilia,
(1)
not I,'
'own,'
14.
83.
AMg.,
niyaya,
niya.
niatta, ' returned,' =nivutta.
niattaissadi, fut. caus. 134.
niattSidurn, caus., inf 136.
niattihihi, fut. caus , p. 120. v. 84.
niala, ' fetter.' p. 169.
nikkam ' go out,' 38.
,
nikkiva,
'
nikkhitta,
'
cruel,' p. 108
(c).
placed,' p. 101. n. 5.
nikkhivirt,* having thrown down,'

p. 81,
2.
nikkhividum,
inf.,
40.
' still,'
Mg. niScala.
38.
to be blamed,' p. 136, v. 13.
niccalH,
nijja,
'
vanquished,' p. 84, n. 1.
nijjhaida, looked at.' p. 98. n. 1.
nijjhaanti,
tliey look at,' p. 102,
nijjida.
4.
Apa.
60.
laut.
to enter,' p. 124,
made
n. 13.
nivvavijjjaii, let
p. 118, V. 76.
it
'
be poured out,'
pours out,' 120.

without hindrance,'
6 (mrvighna).
'
'
nivvinna, disgusted,' p. 87, n. 2.

nivvuo, 'finished, etc' p. 108 (d).
nivvudha, 'accomplished,' p. 116.
'
(52.
nisagga,
'
nisiara,
nihfla
'
nature.' p. Ill
(c).
AMg.
fiend,' p. 117, v. 64.
nihada),
(6.
'
struck down.'
p. 121, V. 85.
nihanium, JM., "to bury.'
p.
124,
n. 3.
nihasa, M.. rubbing,' 19.

nihaa, 'smashed,' p. 121, v. 85.
nihuda, (M. nihua) secret, etc.*
00.
'
'
^la
nida),
(6.
'
led.'
125.
cf.
riia.
sigh.' 110 (a) (niMvasa).

nisasiuna, 'sighing,' p. 129. n. 9.
nisasa,
'
nisesa,
'entire,' p. 135, v.
nuâ^l, now,'
'
I.
7, 20.
n9, 'thoy,' 110.

ne(y)a = na vci, p.
136, v. 13.
'
'
'
n. 7.
'
nisamenti,
p. 95, n. 3 {nija-ka).
' led,'=nia,
125. AMg.
(2)
nivuttu.
nivesavia,
v.
protector,'
9.
p. 101,
nivuttT, 'returned,'
p. 96, n.
nauna,
to know,' 136.
[Jain MSS.,
absol., p. 139, n. 1.
vary in the use of initial n and
'
84,
p.
entered,' p. 123, n.
'
niwiggha,
10.
'
(M. naha).
down,'
falling
'
niv-vavedi,
'
nadha
investigate,'
will
v. 7.
'
'
'
117, v. 64.
p.
nivaha, 'multitude,'
narinda, king,' 81.

navara, only,' p. 121, v. 8?'.
navari, ' thereupon,' p. 120, v. 82.
navahl, Apa. = (namanli) 25.
na'iip,
94,
n. 10.
isn't,' 83.
'
fruitless,' 38.
'
'
p. 84, n. 8.
placed,' p. 123, n.
'
(2)
natthi,
13.
116, v. 63.
sleeps,' p. 102, n. 8.
niddha=siniddha, 47.
'
'
lost.' 125.
'
(1)
pitiless,' p.
niddnati,
n. 11."
5.
135, n.
niddaa,
informed,' p. 93, n.
perseverance,' 45.
nibbhinna,
burst open,' p.
dancing,' p. 108 (b).

(*nrtyana).
'
46.
'
'
nibbanda
nail,' 15.
'
naccana,
low,'
'
nidittha,
nipphala,
'
nam,
ninna,
Iêaip,
êura,
'
to load,'
136.
'anklet,' p. 109
Ijlgochadi,
'
(ti).
does not wiBh,'
83.
nena,
by
'
this,' 110.
neda,m=nu + etad,
nedi,
neha,
tisu,
affection ,'=sineha
'
nehihi,
'
bathes,'
'
nhana,
jasmine,'
75.
125.
125.
tar, loc.
by
'
tao,
thee,'
(2)
three,'
'
(1)
'
p.'
106.
AMg.,
him, her,
125.
122, n.'2.
tumma, M.,
112.
tumhakera,
108.
it,'
tnmhe,
thou,'
'
'
like you,' 24.
'
you,'
'
106.
turukka, incense,' p. 157, n.

tuUa, 'equal,' p. 110 (a),
tuvara, hasten,' 57.
'
Pb. takk-.
107.
107.
of thee,' 107.
your,' 76.
'
tumharisa,
1.
'
time,' p. 90,
n. 14."
tuvatto, from thee,' 107.

tussadi, is pleased,' 125.
tuha, of thee,' 106.
tuharn, thee,' 107.
tuhu,'Apa. 'thou,' 107.
musical instrument,'
tura, JM.,
'
'
tacca, meritorious,' p. 151 n.

tada, edge,' p. 124, n. 5.
tanua, ' small, p. 121, v. 86.
tanhiae, abl., 94.
'
8.
from
tattha,
2.
AMg.
teyasa,
telia,
there,' 45.
'
1.
^tejasa,
tebbho, AMg.,
thee,' 107.
tado, 'then,' 11,
tadha,
'
p. 128, n.
heated,' 125.
(2) =tattva, p. 103, v.
'
(1)
'
'
'
'
125.
'
'
tatto,
pleased,'
tume, AMg.,
H. tak-, gaze.'
takkhanam, 'at that
tatta,
'
125.
broken,'
tubbhe, AMg., 'you,' 107.

tumammi, M., in thee,' 106,
107.
I guess,' 45.
'
is
tunnao, tunnago, JM., 'beggar?'
(2) 'thou,' M., 107.

tamsi, loc. AMg., 109.
takkissadi, fut., 134.
takkemi,
'
tuttha,
=tado.
(1)
tam,
tuttai,
in thee,' 107.
'
Apa. 'thee,'
'
tutta, 'broken,'
T
tal,
rae,
to, or of thee,' 107, p. 117,

76 (
*tuhyam for tvbhyam).
H. tujh (ko).
tujjha,
V.
bathing,' 30, 47.
'
6.
in three,' 112.
'
tui, 'in thee,' 107.

tue, ' with thee,' 106.
47.
will lead,' 134.
'
nomalia, fresh
nhaa, bathed,'
nhai,
8.
leads,' 127.
'
tisam, thirty,' p. 147, n.

tise, AMg., 'of her,' 109.
*
83, p. 94, n.
203
from
104.
that,' 109.
'oil,' 15, 61, 68.
tevatthi,
109.
'
'
sixty-three,' p. 144, n. 4.
Also tesatthi.
tti=ti, 74.
ttha, ye are,' 132.
'so,' 14.
tamhola =tambula, 71.

tammi, loc. in that,' 109.
'
'
talavara,
'
chief,' p. 144, n. 5.
TH
tavana, heating,' p. 110 (6).

tavida=tatta, 'hot,' 125.
tassa, of him, 45.
tahim=tassirn, 27.
'
thana, breast,' 38.

thala, -surface,' p. 101, n. 6.
thavai, architect,' p. 127, n.
'
'
ta, 'so,' 109, p. 81, n.
tae,
of,
tSo, abl.
tava,
'
4.
stood,' =thia,
thia,
(thida).
'
by her,' 108.
AMg., 109.
thii (6. thidi),
fever,' 17.
tasa, M.
tassa, 109.
'
thuvvai,
ti,
'
thus,'
'thrice,'
p.
152,
n. 8.
tinni, 'three,'
112.
oblique,'
tissa, M., ' of her,'
tiriccha,
tirai,
'
'is
p. 123, n.
is
thero,
thora,
'
'
3.
38.
6.
p.
127,
=thii.
praised,'
135.
theo=thevo, JM., 'little,'

n. 8; p 135, v. 7.
74.
AMg.,
tikhutto,
'
elder,' 82.
large,' 71.
Pb. tinn.
74.
H. tefhS.
109.
accomplished,'
7.
Also tirae.
135,
15.
having given,' 127.

damsaissam, I will show,'
daia,
'
'
127.
204
damsadi,
damsanta,
dimmuha,
bites," 125.
'
damsanijja,
showing,'
'
worth
137.
'shown,'
daipsida,
(I)
damsedum,
(2) 'bitten,' 125.

inf., 136.
dakkhina,
dakkhina,
'
right-south,' 40.
fee,' p. 93, n. 10
AMg.
dacchami, p. 118, v. 77.

dacchimi, dacchimmi, p. 121,
134.'
see,' 136, p.
119,
'
firmness,'
p.
119,
H. diya.
17.
'appears,'
93,
p.
115.
p.
v.
14.
dihaurn,
long-lived,'
'
duara,
door,'
'
duggada,
103.
57.
trouble,' 51.
poor,' p. 101, n.
'
'
122, n.
7.
38.
rascal
'
'
3.
dunnimitta,
bad omen,'
'
84,
p.
n. 2
v.'Sl.
dalayai, dalai, AMg., gives,' p. 153,
duttara,
invincible,'
'
duddha,
1.
dalidda,
davavia,
'poor,'
made
'
26
to give,' p.
125,
'
milk,'
'
'
dulaha.
'now,' 74.
dadavva, to be given,' 137.
dabai, 'heats,' p. 108 (c).
duvara,
'
festoon,' p. 101, n.
boy,' p. 99, n. 5.
dalarn, Mg., door,' p. 170, n. 9.
'
2.
dahini,
'
9.
difficult,'
door,'
57.
duvario, door-keeper,' p. 102, n. 8.

duvalasa, AMg., 'twelve.' p. 145,
'
'
forest fire.' p. 112 (h).

'let it be demanded,'
dussaha,
duha kaum,
intolerable,'
'
having
134.
p.
112(a),
42.
p.
136,
72.
diaha, 'day,'
dusa,
robe,' p. 157, n. 6.
'
de,=ê,
deula.
9.
consecration,' p. 93, n.
is
split.' p. 124,
dua, messenger,' p. 145, n. 6.

duijjamane, AMg., 'wandering,'
dusah.a= dussaha.
V. 11.
'
125.
p. 145, n. 6.
twice-born,'
dijjadi,
51.
'
p. 146, n. 3.
'
n. 11.
= dakkhina,
dia,r8i= devara,
Also
50.
79.
n. 4.
3.
p. 113(6).
daham, ' I will give,'
101,
p.
duve, two,' 112.

duvvinida. ill conducted,'
'
davijjau,
134.
'
'
'
'impervious,'
ed,' p. 145,
dull aha,
danim,
davaggi.
Pb. duddh.
duria, ' sin,' p. 135, v. 1.

duruhitta. AMg., 'having mount-
'
daissaro, ' I will give,' 134.

daum, ' to give,' 136.
dadha, ' tusk,' 65, p. 116, v. 63.
dava=<5uo<,
38.
n. 6.
dahi, curd,' p. 102, n. 9.

dahidum, to burn,' 136.
damaguna,
34.
H. dudh.
dubbhai, is injured,'
dubbhejja,
n. 4.
dikkhS,
19.
be given,'
it
6. disadi, 125.
p."
'
'
quarters,'
'
dadha, firm,' 60.

dadiha, burnt,' 125.
daddhavva, 'to be seen,'
dia,
the
duccarida, wickedness,'
duttha gando,
JM.,
v."80.
darao,
'let
dukkha,
V. 85.
datthuip, 'to
n.
'
diadu,
dlsai,
'I will see,'
dihi, M.,
n 1.
diva, 'lamp,'
'
dacchara, M.
facing
'
35, 46.
given,'
ditttia, 'seen,'
9.
dejja,
dedi,
119.
'
temple,'
82.
he might give,' AMg.,
13S.
6., -gives,' 125. 127.
devattae=de?'nff'5v.
125.
ditthi, 'sight,' 38, 60. Sindhi

diti.
Pb. ditth. H.-dlth.
61, 63, 79.
3.
devSnuppiya, AMg.,
92,
'
ii.
beloved
the gods,' p. 146. n. 7.

dovi, declension, 91.
devvannaa 'soothsayer.'
of
'
ditthia.=di/ftffa,
95.
didha,
firm,'' 60.
dina,
'
day,' p. 97, n.
dilÎjia, 'given,'
p. 109 (e).
of.
dadha.
5.
126, p. 97,
p.
93,
n. 13.'
desi, 'givest,' 127.
5,
do,
'
two,'
112.
donha(m),
ins.
Also donni, gen.

doloc.
dohira
:
205
8u(m), doggacca,
poverty,'
'
of the
'
(2)
p.
dohala,
longing.'
'
23.
paottha,
'
courtj'ard,'
pakka,
'
cooked,'
=S.
.JM.
city,'
pora, p. 136, vv,
106," V. 76.
1, 2.
102, n.
1.
42.
pakkhalanti, stunibling,' p. 171.

pakkhiyarn, AMg., 'lasting a fort'
DH
night,' p. 145, n.
dhaya, JM., 'flag,' p. 130, n.

dhQ.minai, = dharma, 48.
dhamraia, juggler,' p. 82, n.
2.
1.
pagSra, JM., kind,' p. 125, n. 4.

pagasa. AMg., clear,' p. 156, n. 6.
pagasento, JM., revealing,' p. 122,
'
'
'
1.
'
dharia, 'waited,' p. 129, n. 13

dhai, dhaai, places,' S 127.
dharidutp, to support,' 136.
n. 2.
'
paecaa,
trust,' p. 91, n. 6.
'
dhida,
'daughter,'
S.
dhiya.
cf.
paccakkha,
JM.,
74.
'
p. 115, v. 20.
certainly,' p. 105, v. 42.
paccanida, restored,'
AMg.,
paccutthuya.
'
dhunai, 'shakes,' 131.

dhunijjai, is shaken,' 135.
dhuvai, washes,' 129. Also dhu-
p. 160,
'
is
'
2.
p. 89,
shaken,'
125.
'covered,'
AMg.,
'present,'
p. 155, n. 5.
128.
dhuvvai,
98, n.
4.
li.
paccupanna,
'
vei
vi.sible,' p.
n. 11.
dhua, 'agitated,'
dhuam,
'
paccacakkhldum,' to repulse,'
dhuda.
paccuse,
135.
'
paecha,
dhuda
at dawn," p. 87, n.
'
afterwards,'
8.
38.
JM., dhuya),
(M. dhua.
'daughter,' 19. p. 129, n. 12.
Also S. duhida.
dhumai, smokes,' p. 104, v. 13.
pajjatti, 'sufficiency,' p. 141, n. 6.

Also pajjattia, p. 110 (c).
pajjalai, blazes,' p. 104, v. 13.
Pajjunna=Prad^?<ina,
dhuva,
pajjussua, 'excited.'
41, p.
'
'
'
incense,' p. 157, n.
dhoadi, 'washes,'
dhovai, dhovei.
AMg.,
129.
1.
n.
46.
168,
1.
pajjharavedi, 'makes ooze,'
40,
p. 94, n. 10.
pataa,
patta,
paada, (M.)
'
evident,'
JM. payada,
,
p."
136, V. 17.
setout,'
125.
paatta,
p." 118, V. 76. payatta,
paatta,
JM.,
paavl, 'path,' p. 106, v. 107.

payai, foot-soldier,' p. 129, n.
p.
'
'
n.
9.
cf.
n.
pai,
pada, cloth,'
padaa, M.6.
125.
AMg., 'beginning,'
paiinjai,
pautta
p.
168,
78.
'
flag ' (patakapaAMg. JM.,

20.
al-o padaya. Pai^.
cf
16.
padSga. JM
pataka. Pischel 218."
read padaa for pataa.
pad'\.=prciti,
(1)
'
paiima,
'
paiira, (1)
p.
'
90,
20.
p. 147, n. 7^
cur a).
'
keeping
(pro-
= pratisthapita,
p. 93,
n.'8.
paditthia,,
1
lotus,' 36, 57.
'abundant,'
101,
(S.
paditthavida
125,
n. 2 {prayukta).
set forth,' p. 85, n.
{pravrlta).
exiled,' 125.
(2)
paiittha,
'used'
On p.
vigil,' p. 145, n. 1.
uses,' 125.
'
3.
15.
paiiyngaramane, AMg.,
husband,' p. 118, v.
9.
padida), ' fallen,' 20.

'confessed,'
pad'ikkante, 'AMg.,
1.
'
'
'
padia
padi.
paidi,
4.
pattha, eminent,' p. 159, n.

patthavei, sends,' p. 140, n.
tUka),
p. 136, v. 20.
painna, 'scattered,'
n. 3.
'
1.
paasa, reveals,' 2.
pal, 'towards,' p. 141,
bandage
'
'
124, n.
=padaa.
n.
" putty
" p. 122,
flag,' p. 101
'
'
'
padivajjadi
padivanna.
'
'
established,' 113 (b).

attains,' 125.
attained,' 125, p. 126,
V. 83.
neighbour,' p. 99, n. 8.
padihaadi), 'seems,'
padivesia,
'
padihai
(6.
127.
206
padihara, JM.,' door-keeper,'
p. 135,
padhana,
reading,'
'
padhama,
parissauli,
16.
community,'
'
p. 145,
'
'
panaa,
confidence,' p. 91, n.
to read,' p. 103, v.
road,' 58.
2.
panai, 'beloved,' p. 106,

attached,' p. 136, v. 15.
3.
v. 76;
panasa,
I salute,' p. 95, n.
revere,' p. 113
'
phanasa),
(6.
1.
AMg.,
[pannattam,
'
.>
perceived,
p. 145, n. 3.]
panha,
pataria,
'
'
wing- leaf,'
'obtained,'
'
palobheum,
myriad,' p. 147,
to allure,' p. 123, n.
'
1.
palohida, 'greedy,' p. 102, n. 9.

pallattha, .surrounded, etc.,' 60.
hamlet,' p. 136, v. 17.
palli,
palhatta, brought to nought,' 52,
'
'
p. 121, v. 85.
10.
45.
125.
(2)
patteya, 'alone,' p. 130, n. 11.
'
severally,' p. 141, n. 11.
'
patthana,
1.
question,' 47.
seduced,' p. 89, n.
(1)
'
172, n.
n. 8.
bread-fruit,'
'
palaia.
6. palaida, p.
JM. , also palSna.
paliovama, AMg.,
(6).
'
^-
49.
palattam, 'cried,' p. 119, v. 79.

palaa, M., JM., 'fled,' 125. M.
'
'
'
is
panamami,
panamaha,
embraces,'
'
padhiadi,
'
'
pariharia, 'avoiding,' p. 84, n. 8.

parunna, cried out,' p. 119, v. 76.
parokkha, invisible,' p. 94, n. 3.
first,' 20.
'
padhium,
patta
AMg.,
parisa,
n. 7.
V. 2.
request,' p. 83, n.
2.
cf.
Mar.
H. palta.
palat.
AMg.,
palhayanijja,
'
refreshing,'
p. 158,' n. 7.
pavarnga, 'monkey,'
pavanca,
37.
display,' 111 (e).

pavattai, occur,' 125.
pavasanta, ' living abroad,' p. 106,
V. 94.
pavittha, 'entered,' p. 88, n. 2;
'
'
patthara,
'
stone,' p. 91, n. 6.
114, v.
57.
patthia, 'set out,' p.
6. patthida, p. 82, n. 4.
padolika, gateway,' p. 169.
panti or pamti, row,' 35, p. 102,
'
n. 5.
papalinu,
fled
'
pabodhiami,
away,' p. 172, n. 1.
awakened,' p. 87,
am
'
n. 10.
pabbhattha,
slipped
'
90,
p.
off,'
n. 8.
pabhada,
pamada,
morning,
'
p. 97, n. 8, 9.
pleasure,' p. 94,
'
pamhala, AMg., 'downy,'
4.
p. 93, n. 9.
'
arisen,' 125.
pavvaa, ' mountain,' p. 115, v. 94.
pavutta,
pavvaia,
'
entered the Order,' JM.,
p. 130, n. 12 (pravrajita).
pavvaittae, inf. AMg., p. 146, n. 2.
pasammai, ' is soothed,' p. 115, n. 6.
Mg.,
[paala6i,
p. 172, v. 21].
pasadikida,
p.
159,
n. 5.
'
'
presented,' p. 98, n.
7.
be quiet,' p. 83, n. 1.
to request,' p. 175,
[patidum, Mg.
pasida,
'
paramatthado, really,' p. 90, n. 2.

parassim = parasmin, 111.
parahua, cuckoo,' p. 157, n. 7.
pariynga, AMg.,' wandering,' p. 146.
'
'
'
n. 2.
paha, path,' p. Ill (/).

paharanta, attacking,'
pahavanahirn, loc. Mg.
'
n." 10.
parikamma,
pariggaha,
'
pahada = pabhada,
toilet,' p. 88, n. 5.
wife,' p. 90, n. 2.
'
parlccaia,
p. 83,
forward,"
goest
having abandoned,'
'
n. 6.
pariccatta,
12.
cf.
'beginning,"
pabhii.
AMg., paidi and
pahuttanain, power,' p. 90,

paa, foot,' p. 122, n. 4.
'
'abandoned,'
115,
p.
1.
p. 88, n. 4.
94, n. 3.
pahava, power,' p.
pahui (6. pahudi),
'
p. 84, n.
92.
n. 10.
'
V. 20.
parinaidavva,
marry,' p. 03,
'
to
n. 4.
be made to
pariaedavva,
p. 93, n. 14.
parinlda,
'
married,'
'
being des-
troyed,' p. 130, n. 9.
mendicant,'
peurivvnjaa,
p. 109(6).
'
pSikka.
50,
'
(6.
expiation,'
152,
p.
foot-soldier,' 82.
puuda).
'
Prakrit,'
12,
p. 103, v. 2.
pBuin, to drink (t>. padurn),

pauiiiuna, 'putting on,' p.
'
'
n. 4.
paiia
125.
pariluppamana, JM.,
payacchitto,
n.'S.
'
136.
''''*
123,
AMg.,p.
paunitttl, 'fulfilling,'
146,
paubbhavittha, 'appeared, AMg.,
puvvaratta, AMg.,
pausa, JM., rains,' p. 139, n. 7.

pnga, AMg., refined,' p. 158, n. 6.
thief,' p. 1G5, n. 5.
padaccale, Mg.
'
'
'
padava, tree,' p. 87, n. 3.

parnvana, pigeon,' p. 157, n. 7.
pariyaya, JM., 'coral tree,' p. 128,
'
'
n. 5.
ll.Mg.,pali-
doSia.
pavai, pavedi, 'obtains,'

'
125.
panada,
pia, dear,' 9.
piaana, lover,' p. 112
'
puhavi
p.
paternal aunt,'
pikka,
ripe,'
69=pakka.
father,' (M. pia), declen-
gen. piduno, piuno.

sion, 97
pivai, pivadi, 'drinks.' 125.
pidhamadda, ' parasite,' p. 160,
;
n. 2.
AMg.,
pinanijja,
'pleasing,' p. 158,
'
'
(3)
'
(sprsta).
JM.
back,'
Gfij.
puth.
(prstha).
Sindlii pu-
(1) 'full,'
meritorious,'
'
(2)
limit,' 76.
'
sent,' p. 82, n. 3.
sends,' p. 128, n. 6.
peskami, Mg. , ' I see,' p. 168, n.
pokkhara, ' lotus,' 38, 71.
pokhar, ' tank.'
pottha, ' belly,' p. 107, v. 171.
popphall, ' areca nut,' 74.
H.
pomnna,
82,
cf.
'fast-day,'
Pali uposatha.
74,
'
'
'lotus,'
paiima.
posaha, AMg.,
1.
36,
4.
PH
phamsa,
'
phagguna,
'
phadiha,
'
touch,' 38, 49, 64.

the month,' 37.
'
6.
'soft,'
161,
p.
n. 2 (*sparsaka).
48.
puttSi, son,' 2; declension,

puttakidao, ' fosterchild,' p.
Alsophaliha,
crystal.'
i9, 38, p. 101, n. 5.
phanasa=panasa,
pharisaga, AMg.,
thi.
puijna
'affection,' 15, 68;

pema, p. 121,
98.
asks,' 60.
asked,' 125 {prsta).

(2) 'touched,' AMg., 125
(1)
pek-
khihimi.
crushes,' 65.
'
pucehai, pucchadi,
puttlia
sees,' 40, 81.

Apa.
fut., 134.
'
pokkhissam,
p. 145, n.
n. 7.
pisei, pisedi,
earth,'
'
pesei,
pittei, crams,' p. 107, v. 171.

piniddha, 'put on,' p. 159, n. 11.
'
peccha, see ', 40.

pecchai, sees,' p. 114, v. 57.
pecchae, atm., 115.
pecchissarn, M., I will see,' 118.
pesida,
74.
'
6.
pudhavl),
(S.
118, V. 78.
peranta,
(a),
'
'
asked,'
declension,
V. 86.
74.
piussia,
'
p. 165, n. 5.
pemma,
n. 4.
pi=api,
in succes-
sion,' p. 145, n. 6.
puficide. Mg. =pucchido
pekkhacii,
'palace,' p. 102, n. 6.
'guest,' p. 124,
JM
'
'
side,' 49.
pahunaya,
2.
puvvanupuvvim, AMg.,
'
paridosia, 'reward,'
part of
first
the night,' p. 145, n.
p. 151, n. 4.
pida,
102; fut. puloissam,
134.
n.lO.
pasa,
puloanto,
207
86.
90,
phSsa, AMg., =pharnsa, 63.

phurantaa, manifest,' p. 112
'
phusai, AMg.,
'
touches,'
(g).
38.
n. 14.
puttalia,
'
statue,' p. 94, n. 10.
puppha,
'flower,'
purattha,
'
bailie,
East,' p. 160, n.
71.
purisakkara,
with
strength,'
PururuvS,
puliâ, Mg.
,
'
AMg.,
3.
man's
p. 153, n. 3.
104.
'
man,'
looks
Mg.,
69
badifia,
pros. past.
'bull,'
p.
170,
n.
H., etc., bail,

bound,' 135.
baiilu.
is
'
Mg
baddha,
bandhai,
bappha,
92.
at,'
Apa.
bajjhai,
purisa, 'man,'
puloedi,
O.H.
38.
H. phup.
puhup.
'
'
'
hook,' p. 166, n.
'bound,'
binds,'
125.
125.
steam,' p. 84, n.
bainbana=brahmana,
10.
52.
2.
9.
208
balakkara, violence,' 34.

baladdaka, Mg., ' bull,' p. 170,
bhavissam,
'
bal,
n. 5.
perforce,' p. 101, n. 9.
baliarn, ' more strongly,' p. 108
bahinia, 'sister,' p. 98, n. 5.
bahini. sister," s 19.

bahuphala
fruitful,' 5.
barasa, twelve.' p. 130,
Apa baraha. H. barah.
bhaveam,
'
M.
2.
cf. 24.
AMg.
JM.
'second,'
p. 136, V. 19.
bujjhai,
is wakened,'
Pb. bujjh.
'
buya, AMg.,
'
might
shines,' p. 112
bhadi.
6.
(g^).
127.
son,'
'sister's
p.
144,
n. 2.
bhadusaa.
100 brothers,' 60.

'frown,' p. 117, v.
AMg., bhigudi.
bhiudi,
tear,' p. 84, n. 10.

fears.' 125, 132.
'
bihei, '
bla, biya,
bhainejja,
baha,
be,' 129.
bhaa, part,' p 100, n. 5.

bhaadi. fears, 125, 132.
bhai,
'
n.
might
'
(c).
'
'
I will be,' 134.
'
'
125.
cf.
bhijjai,
V. 56.
'is
bhinna,
split,"
135,
p.
64.
114,
split,' 125.
'
bhindai, splits,' 1_'5, 130.

bhia, bhida, frightened,' 125.
bhujjai,
is enjoyed,'
135.
bhunjiadi.
bhunjadi, enjoys,' 125. 130.
bhutta. 'enjoyed,' 125.
bhumaa, brow.' p. 117, v. 64.
'
'
say,'
133.
bola, speech,' p. 124. n. 8.

cf. H.
bolna.
'
bolanti, they pass,' p. 114, v. 57.
bolina, ' passed.' p. 120. v. 83.
'
'
S.
"
bhua, bhuda.
bhettum, to
BH
bhaavam,
'
blessed,'
declension,
bhai,
hire,' p. 150, n. H.
'
bhoana,
bhottum,
103.
become,'
meal,' 9.
to enjoy,' 136.
'
9.
M.
hoi.
'
broken,' 135.
bhajjanta, 'being broken.'
is
116,
p.
maa,
'dear,'
p. 112
(l)
n. 62.
bhajia,
'
bhanjai,
'
(2)
97
(3)
bhattidaraa, crown prince

bhattha, dropped,' 125.
'
bhanedi,
bhatta,
'
97
60.
(4)
speaks,' 132. Also

132; passive bha-,
128,
husband,'
'
'
1.
declension,
AMg..
H. bhalS
Apa. *bhallau.
alia,
p.
Also maia.
maagala, JM., 'elephant,' p. 128.
n. 9.
maarahara,
AMg..
'invigorating,'
1.
'
sharks' home,'
p. 120,
V. 83.
blessed,' 45.
through.
{mrta).
mode of {=maya),
'
raaanijja,
p. 158, n.
gon. bhattuno.
bhadda,
125.
105, V. 11.
135, n.
food-rice,' p. 169, n.
bhatta,
Also mua, muda.

'
'
bhanaii,
."J;
{mada).
dead,'
gen. bhattino.
'
n.
(mvrga).
intoxication, etc' p. 97,
'
n. 2.
declension.
lord,'
'
87,
p.
{<7).
Also mia.
wife,' p. 135, V. 3.
breaks,' 130.
bhatta,
niadi,
75. 127.
'
'
'
125.
bhodi, becomes,' 4.11,
bhakkanti, they eat,' p. 102, n.

Rather bhakkhanti, vide 40.
bhagga, broken,' p. 129, n. 6.
bhajjai,
split.' 136.
'
'wet,'
cf.
=6.
M.,
adda
{ardra).
maalaiichana, moon,' p. 94,

mai, loc, in me,' 106.
mai, Apa., by me,' 107.
-maia = ma i/a.
mai, doe,' p. 108 (6).
'
n. 9.
'
'
bhamara,
'
bee,'
p.
bha lira.
bhamaida, agitated,'
Bharaha, 19.
'
bhavam = 6/tauan
107 (a).
p. 101
H.
V. 3.
n. 2,
declension,
maiia, 'tender,' p. 112 (a), p. 114,
maiila, 'bud,'
103.
bhavitta, bhavitt&narn, AMg., having been,' 122.
71.
budding,' p. 116,
maiili, 'head,' 61.
maiilanta,
'
maura = mora,
82.
'
mao, by
'
nie,' 106.
v. 62.
mamsuim, mamsuni,
AM<j;.,
mahusava, groat
mada, S. maa,
mous-
road,'
declension,
maridum,
45.
demanding,' p. 09, n. 9.
H. mag-na.
selfish,'
39. p. 13G,
maccara,
S
inagganta,
'
mala,
M.
mother,'
'
97.
to strike,' 136.
'
garland,' declension,
'
91.
tj
maliâî, with strike,' 134.

miaa, ' hunting,' p. 87, n. 2.
'
'
V.
festival,' 81.
'
taches,' 93.
iiiakkada, 'ape,' p. 107, v. 171.
magga,
209
10.
miahka, moon,' p. 94, n. 10.

mimja, AMg., 'marrow,' j) ISO,
'
maocha,
majjara,
114, v. 56.
fish,' 56, p.
'
M. mam-
fat,' 67.
'
S.
n".
majjida,
swept,' p. 100, n.
majjha
middle,'
'
(1)
4.
44.
M. 'of me,' S 107.

majjhaaranimi,
in the middle,'
10.3, V. 3.
jhamdine,
n. 3; also
majjhima,
mattia,
at
'
majjhanha,
middle,'
'earth,'
of gems,' p. Ill (c).

clever,' p. 112 (A).
'
maniisa,
manojja,
charming,'
"
S.
'
M.
14.
116,
p.
manne, '.I think,' 115.

-matta= -metta, p. 119, v. 81.
madda, crushing,' p. 88, n. 6.
mamam, M., AMg., JM.. me,'
'
107".
maha),
6.
'love' (M. vam-
'
dies,' 125.
(6.
moragada),
emerald,'
12,
p.
93,
n.
p. 115, V. 6.
mallia,
jasmine,' p. 101, n.
masana, cemetery,'
maSca, ma^âti, Mg.
n. 2; p. 168, n.
mahara,
'
'
fish,' p. 166,
9.
mahasi, 'desirest,' 113
maharao,
14
'
,
'
'
munala,
mutta,
'
lotus fibre,'
60.
urine,' p. 130, n. 9.
muddha, 'foolish' (niugdha).
*
muddha,
mulla,
'
muha,
'
'head,' declension,'
value,' 50.
muhala,
98.
face,' S 13.
noisy,' 26.
92.
make
release,'
134.
raoavia, "having
p. 109 {&).
moavedi,
moggara,
mugur.
'
made
makes
to release,'
release,' 128.
Bg.
71.
'hammer,'
moccham, mocchihimi,
mora,
'
peacock,'
mblla, 'price,'
precious,' p. 167,
p. 117, v. 75.
'woman,'
mahuara,
'
will
re-
'
99, n.
raahila,
releases.'
'
Also muncedi. 28
passive munciadi, 135, n.
mutthi,
handful,' p. 102, n. 3.
JM.. mutthiga, p. 1.30, n. 12.
munai, knows,' Pali munati.
'
103.
(c).
great king,' declension,
mahalika, Mg.
125.
lease, '" 134, p. 118, V. 76.

motta, pearl,' p. 115, n. 6.
mottura, to release,' 136.
of me,' p. 118, v. 77.
mahao, AMg., ^=mahatah,
2.
47.
'
perplexed,'
is
'
'
maragaa, M.
p. 130, n. 7.
released,' 125.
is released,' 135.
stunned,' p. 114, v. 56.
greedy,' p. 145, n. 9.
mulahi, M.=mulat,
will
moavaissasi,
25.
marai, maradi,
drum,'
'
61.
mammadha,
170,
p.
S 125, 130.
scimetar,'
1.30,
muncai, muncadi,
manairaha.
naandalagga.
49.
125.
'
mujjhai,
AMg.
36.
wish,'
n.
'
'
AMg.,
63.
manoradha,
'
mukka,
mucchia,
49.
mixed,'
dead,'
'
releases,'
'
muinga,
H. matti,
159,
p.
'
(M. misa),
inuccai,
'
faded,'
57.
shining,'
'
v. 115.
ins., 104.
manussa, 'man,'
V."
jj
muai,
69.
mitti.
manasa,
manina,
manlsi.
milana,
mua, muda,
52.
55.
92.
ij
72.
missa
74, majmidday, p. 87,
'
pair.s,'
'
16.
'
majjhanna, midday,'
S.
mittca =niaitreya,
misimisinta,
(2)
p.
3.
midhuna,
jara.
bee,' p. 109 (d).
8.
mha, we
mho.
'
mhi,
'
are,'
am,'
71.
82, p. 108
(b).
H. mol.
30,
S 30, 132.
132.
Also
210
B
raa
raia,
,'
gratified
'
laddha,
'taken,' 34, 125: inf.

laddhurn, S 136: passive labbha,
labbliadi, S 1.34.
Also lambhiadi.
25.
formed,' p. 129, n.
'
ralsara,
raccha, highroad,' 44.

ranna, ' jungle,' 74. Alii.
'
AMg.
rannau, 92.
ranna, by the king,' 99.
rattim,
during the night.'
lahai,
takes,' 125.
take.' p. 95. n. 2.
lahua, 'light,' S 13.
lahum, 'quickly,' p. 91, n. 2.
lahe, 1 take.' atm.. 115.
lahearn, opt., p. 88, n. 7.
laaklya, Mg. , ' royal,' 165, n. 1.
laiile, Mg.,
palace," 82.
lautte. Mg. , :=rajapiUrnh, p. 160.
n. 1.
'
lahetsu,
'
'
'
87,
p.
'
n. 7.
'
ramai,
delights,'
'
'
ray,'
125.
9.
lia,
47.
weeps,' 125.
'
'
rahasa,
j?
lower world,'
rasSala.
rassi,
ravai,
135.
4.
prince,' p. 144, n. />.

rakkhaghara, 'prison,' p. i)r, n. 7.
'
'
force' (rabhasa), p.
rahassa, secret,' 49.

raa, king,' declension,
(/).
Jj
99.
'
58.
licked,'
is
'
(2)
'
135.
licks,' 125.
writes,'
risao,
ij
'
rundhedi,
S.
'
16a, M.
world,'
logamsi,
loua,
loga,
H.
*!
lou.
;
loc.
92.
salt,"
'
Apa.
9.
AMg., JM.,
73.
loadi, Mg., 'shines,'
93."
ruai, ' weeps,' 125.

125.
ruia, bright,'
ruccai, ruccadi, ' is made bright,'
125, 129.
rujjhai, ' is obstructed,' 135.
ruttha, angered,' 125.
'
lihida.
p.p.
painted,' p. 100, n. 5.
lukka, sticking to,' p. 105, v. 49.
luddha, hunter,' p. 87, n. 8.
luppai, is robbed,' 125.
lekkha, list,' p. 125, n. 5.
AMg. ,plur.
60.
'
'
riecha, bear,' 39, 60.

rittattana, 'emptiness, p. 112 (h).
risi=rsi,
libbhai,
lihai, (1)
Also Una.
n. 3 (Up).
'
'
increase,'
'
'
'
'
attached to,' 12.5.

smeared,' p. 122.
'
raia, 'mustard,' p. 107, v. 128.

ral, road,' p. 87, n. 4.
raesi,
royal sage,' 80.
riddhi,
'
litta,
129.
Sindhi lunu.
75.
lun.
loluva, 'greedy,' p. 108 (rf), (=/nlupa).

lohara, blacksmith,' 82.
ro/i,' p. 166, n. 4.
lohida, Mg.
'
'
obstructs,' pp., ruddha, 125; passive, rubbha.

supports,' p. 120, v.
rumbhai,
'
'
va = ira,
82.
ruvai,
weeps.' Also rovai
sive ruvvai, 125.
rusai, is vexed,' S 125.
rudhira, ' red,' ^ 13.
pas-
"
ruva,
form,'
reha, M.
rehai, M.
roadi,
17.
(M.
rila,
Ji
9).
lines,' 94.
'
'
'
shines,' p. 103. v. 4.
'
136.
'
vakkha,
vaggana,
vaggura,
n.
'
'
v.
14.
37.
vaccha
(l)
'
'
'
ciiild,'
39 (ratsa).
go,' see vaccha'i.

tree {vrksa).
"
breast, = vakkha.
vacchai, 'goes," p. 123, n. 4.
(4)
creeper,' 12.
Laccia=Lakami, p. Ill (c).
latthi, 'stick,' p. 110(a): p.
"..
(3)
lada),
bark,'
breast," p. 101, n. 6.
jumping,' p. 158, n. 5.
crowd.' p. 152.
AMg.,
(2)
(6.
49.
p. 145, n. 8.
'
story,' p. 123, n. 7.
vaiyara,
,
vaira, .M. 'hostile,' 61.
vae. AMg., herd," p. 150, n. 5.
vakkala,
weeps,' S 125, p. 99, 7rodadi, rovai, ruai, ruvai: fut.

rodissam, roccham, S 134; pass.,
rottum,
inf.
rodladi,
135;
laa
JM
'
'
p. 108, n. 4.
vaassa, companion,"
vayasi, AMg., 'spoke,'
'
'
'
vaccha, girl,' p. 95, n. 4.

vajja, adamant,' p. 101, n.
vajjadi, wanders," 129.
'
121.
'
'
6.
vajjanti, is sounded,' p. 130. n.
vajjia, excepting,' p. 84, n. 9.
vajjha, * of execution,' p. KH), n.
vanfiami, Mg., 'I wander,' p.
M.,
vialia,
7.
'
'
211
vanished,' p. 119, v. 79.
'
vialida, S., p. 97, n.

3.
AMg.,
viinna,
17"),
'
G.
bestowed,'
144,
p.
n.'5.
n. 8.
viuha,
vattadi, twins,' 45.

vatti, box,' p. 157, n. 2.
vatte, opt. of vattadi, 117.
vatthida, engaged in,' 74.
'
learned,'
'
9.
viesa,
'
abroad,' p.
vioa,
'
separation,'
7G.
10(), v.
vikkaa,
'
vada,
'fig-tree,'
sale,' p. 166, n. 5.
'
viggha,
AMg.,
15.
9.
obstacle,'
'
.36.
!?
vighattha, eaten up,' p. 129, n. 10.

vicchadda, liberality,' p. 130, n. 8.
'
vadha,
19.
'
-vadaa,
flag,' p. 130, n. 3.
'
vaddhida,
vatta,
increased,' pp. 83,
'
vijju,
6.
lightning,' p. 136, n. 10.
'
vijjulia,
leaf,' p. !y,n. 10; pp. 108.

3; p. 115, V. 6.
vattia, 'paint brush,' p. 82, n. G.
wick.'
cf. H. batti,
vattum, to speak,' 130.
vattehami, I will perform,' 134.
vaddhavanaarp, AMg., birth cere-
lightning,'
'
23.
'
vijjhai,
Virnjha,
vinadida.
'
vinodemi,
n.'
25,
'
120,
p.
p."
'
p. 96, n. G.
1 divert,' p. 99, n. 3.
reported,'
'
125, p. 93,
10.
vinnaviadi,
p. 172, V. 21.
varittha, choicest,' 111 (6).

varisa, rain,' 57.
valia, 'turned round,' 111 (/).
vavadesi, pretending,' p. 91, n.
puzzled,'
'
vinnatta.
'love,'
perceived,'
'is
V. 82.
n. 5.
M.,
(a)-
(?), p. 140, n. 2.
vinajjai,
'
vammaha,
112
p.
35.
vidahara
'
'
mony,' p. 128,
Vappairaa, 34.
wounds,'
'
95, n.
is
'
reported,'
125,
3.
vinnada, 'understood,'
125.
'
'
5.
vavasissam, I will decide,' p. 89, 5.

vasantusava, spring-festival,' 81.
vasaha, bull,' 60.
vasahi, dwelling.' 19=vasai.
'
'bride,'
14.
'
'
vaasa,
vai,
vau, wind'
vadaana,
vamaddana,
re-
in full,' p. 93, n. 6.
coral.' p. 115, v. 6.
has arranged,' 135.
'
p. 87, n. 11.
54.
'
unloosed,' p. 114, v. 3.
indifferent,' p. 106, v. 76.
'
'
vimhanijja,
p. 158, n.
90.
7.
'
'
158,
p.
n. 5.
valaga, AMg., snake," p. 160, n. G.

vavadiadi, "is destroyed,' p. 169;
p. 109 (d).
perishes,' p. 123, n. 3.
vivara, aury,' p. 121 v. 85.
vivujjhadi, ' awakes,' p. 97, n. 7.
visaraghadanta, 'dispersing,' p. 100,
vivajjai,
p. 102, n. 6.
massage,'
astonishment,' 47.
AMg., 'nourishing,'
vimharia=vlsaria,
declension,
'
'
vinnavedutn,
p.p. vinnavida, p. 93.
inf.
vidhappai,
vipphodao, 'pimple,'
vibbhala, 'agitated,'
vaadi.
S.
9.
127.
window,'
'
'
vimhaa,
'
'
vidduma,
vimukka,
vimuha,
blows,' p. 112 (a).

crow,' p. 102, n.
M.=vaai,
13; declension,
91vaai,
125;
vinnavedi),
'
'
vahu,
ports,'
vittharena,
vasa, by force of,' 92.

-vaha, 'path,' p. 115, v.
vahai, 'carries,' 125.
(S.
p. 94 n.
n. 2.
'
'
vinnavei
'
vavadedurp, p. 167. n. 3.
vaharanta, calling,' p. 101, n. 4.
vaharesu, summon,' p. 140, n. 9.
inf.,
'
vahi, illness,' p. 129, n. 10.

vahiria, outside,' p. 124, n.
'
'
vi=api,
via,
'
').
pain,' 72.
viambhidam, ' exploit, p. 94, n.
viala, ' lame,' p. 88, n. 7.
'
'
'
7.
2.
vihatthimitta, AMg., 'measure of

a span ,' 69.
vihalia, trembling,' p. 124. n. 7.
vihana, "manner,' p. 123, n. 3.
vihadi, 'shines,' 127.
vihi, performance,' p. 93, n. 9.
vihu, moon,' p. 136, v. 19.
viana, fanning,' p. 144, n. 5.
'
3, 74.
like,' p. 81, n.
viana,
1.
V. 115.
visalla, 'pointless,' p. 176, n.
vissa, ' musty,' p. 166, n. 6.
vissama, rest,' p. 88, n. 7.
'
'
INTEODtrOTION TO PRAKRIT.
212
visaip,
'
twenty,'
khala,
112.
' takest
visameisi,
rest,'
105,
p.
V. 49.
visasadi, ' trusts,' p. 91, n. 4.
visaria, ' forgotten,' p. 109 (d).
vis5=visani, 112.
vihattha, loathsome,"
'
vuccai,
vuddha.
p. 117, v. 75.
samkhasutti,
'
Mar
35.
ij
Bg. jikal.
sikar.
mother
of
pearl,'
p. 103, V. 4.
samkhaa,
'coagulated,'
samkhoa,
shock,' p.
'
samghia, 'applied,'
said,' 135.
grown,' S 55.
'
H.
116,
p.
V. 63.
is
'
sihkhala,
sakbal.
sacca,
vutta, 'iinished,' p. 87, n.

vuttanta, news,' (iO.
11.
true,' S 44.
verified," p. 109 (e).
sacchaha, of the same hue,' p. 102
n. 2.
'
saccavia,
'
14. v. 3.
p. ll(i, v. 01.
'
'
vuttham, 'dawned,' p. 119,

vubbhai, is carried,' 135.
vudha, carried,' 125.
v. 80.
'
sajja,
'
ready," p. 128,
1.
'
vGlia,
order of battle,' p. 129, n. 4.

'wages.' p. 150,
'
veyana, AMg.,
sajjha,
samjha,
veana,
pain,' p. 96, n. 1.
'
I shall know,' 134.
vejja, 'learned,' 61.
vedha, 'enclosure,' p. 115, v. 14.
vedhia, 'enclosed,' p. 115, v. 14.
vedia, 'raised seat,' etc., p. 101,
'
veccham.
n. 5.
verulia,
'
134.
cat's eye,' 58.
seven.'
'
(1)
'nature,
(2)
S.,
118,
p.
V. 78.
sadda,
sound,"
'
'
'
saa,
'
with.'
own'
sutnrnoned,'
saddhasa,
'
'feast,'
168
p.
n. 3.
samtappadi,
li.
'is in distress,' p. 98
3.
samtava, 'anguisli,' p. S3, 3.

samdattha,' bitten through.' p. 116
v. 63.'
(sfl).
(sva), p. 95, n.
(>.
saphala, fruitful,'
5.
sapphala. of good results," p. 122
!}
'
AMg., saya.
sada.
(f^.
'hundred,'
Sada),
Mg.,
'2,
SS
112,
p. 144, n. 4.
cart,' (Mg., âala),
'
S 16.
saadia, toy cart,' p. 98. n. 8.

saasa, presence,' p. 82, n. 7.
samlehana, AMg., "final mortifica'
'
tion,' p. 147, n. 6.
sakkei,
saki<ai,
'
is
n. 14
sabbhava, 'good
nature,'
34
p. 89, n. 7.
samaa,
'contract,
p.
'doctrine.' p. 150, n.
samagga
n.
8!t,
10
2.
coniplett>,'
p.
129.
n. 3.
samsaida, 'questioned,'
p. 89, n. 6.
able,'
p.
123,
n. 5
samannagaya,
.AMg.,
'
provided
with,' p. 147, n. 4.
'consigned." p. "^4,
iuiperat. sainappehi, p. 9S.
samappida,
Hakkada,
."akkft,
p. 146
panic,' p. 84, n. 5.
Mg..
[Saddhike,
'
saada,
124
p.
n. 4.
'
12
Pb. sadd
34.
saddavetta, AMg., gerund.,
to carry.' 136.
vottum, ' to speak.' 136.
voliya, JM., 'passed,' p. 129, n. 8.
M. bolina.
M. bolo,
cf.
cry.'
volo, JM.,
'
speech.'
(2)
5t
n. 12.
'
(1
M. saa,
H. sad.
saddavia,
vo, 'you, of you,' 106, 107.

vocchani, 'I will speak,' S 134.
vojjha, to be carried,' 137.
sa
etc." (sattra).
hundred.'
'
112.
vehavvam, 'widowhood,'
vodhum,
'
'
'
satta
sada,
vedissarn= veccham,
63.
twilight,' 44.
troop,' p. 112 (a),
satthia, ' weapon,' p. 140, n. 7.
sanha, ' smooth.' p. 160, n. 5.
sannia, ' made of sign,' p. 124, n. 8.
sannihie, in vicinity,' p. 122, n. 5.
satthaa,
n. 6.
practicable,'
'
'
sakkara,
'Sanskrit.
able,'
!j
II.
n. 3;
1.3.3.
favour,' p. 125,
sakkunomi, I can,' S 131.
'
ii.
3.
'
sahkala,
'
chain,'
19.
Also san-
.">.
samadhatta, 'begun,'
p. 127, n. 4.
saniane. .\Mg., pass. part.

p. 147, n. 3.
'
being,
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKUIT.
Mg.,
[damalovide,
samasattha,
'consoled,'
Salavahana,
125.
p. 131,
sahai,
box,' p. 82, n.
'
samucchida,
saraudaara,
6.
elevated,' 45.
address,' p. 89, n.
'
23.
125; imporat.
sahasu, p. 118, v. 76; gerund.

AMg. sahetta, p. 141, n. 10.
1.
samuggaa,
(M. sariccha),
'like"
40, C(^
samikkha, AMg.,' discovers,'

n.
sarikkha,
mounted,'
'
p. 107, n. 7.
213
'tells,'
sahania, praiseworthy,'
'
49.
'
sahavo,
7.
'.saints,' 93.
samudda,
ocean,'
'
p. 145, n.
45.
samuppajjittha, AMg.
si,
occurred,'
'
2.
ing,' p. 131. n. 1.
samullasanta, 'brilliant,'
AMg..
'
'is
sijjhai,
AMg
n. 7.
reflects,' p. 152,
sifija,
jingle,' p. Ill (d).

told,' 125, p. 127, n. 6.
'
sitlha,
'
siniddha, sticky,' etc.,

sineha, affection,' 47.
'
'stores,' p. 141.
_
'
remembering,'
samma, AMg.,
n.
'
right,' p. 145, n.
sammajjia, swept,' p. 156, n.

saraa, autumn,' p. 141, n. 5.
1.
4.
'
siri=sVi,
11.
sisa,
like,' 24.
!
[6ala,
Mg.
accent," p. 109, n.
2.
savana,
57.
ear,' p. ill
'
savatti, co-wife,'
Mar. savat.
sa vara =,a6or a, 18.
'
savva,
'
all," 50.
savvannu,
'
savvanaru,
(/).
sihu,
sua,
(I)
suai,
omniscient,' 09.
'of all," 111.
AMg.
132.
'
49.
is
7.
Pb. sukkha.
Bg. Suka.
dry,'
38.
125.
131.
S.
purified,"
sutthu, -well,'
SUuai, 'hears,'
(d).
49.
'
H. sukha.
sujjhai,
(g).
'
thousand,'
(c).
125.
-parrot' (suka).
sleeps,'
SUkkha,
loveliness,' p. 101, n. 8.
sahattha, own hand,"

s&hava =,<-aphara, S 13.
'
'
hard.'
05.
'
sahassa,
'
simha.
cf.
fragrant,' p. 100, n. 5.
suia, cleaned,' p. 156, n. 4.
suidavva, ' to be slept,' p. 87, n.
H. sab.
sasahara, moon," p. 112

sasimuhi, 'moon.' p. Ill
'
camp,'
rum,' p. 110
'
,
suandhi.
savvesiin.
sassiriada.
'
'
Siha, M., 'lion.'

Apa. slhu, 73
(2)
H. saut.
36.
100,
palki,' p. 140, n. 8.
p. 174, n. 1
head,' p. 101, n. 1.
salalia, 'praise,'
neha.
p.
08.
'
125,
47.
cf.
4.
sivia, AMg.,
[îvila, Mg.
'
'
Sarassadi,
'sprinkled,'
sitta,
p. 120, v! 84.
'
sambhariuna,
sarisa,
125; fut.
n. 3.
sambalayam, JM.,
40.
fulfilled.'
p. 147, n. 9.
sificai. 'pours,' 125.
gerund, sampehetta, p. 146,
sial.
p. 145, n. 4.
1.
n. 3
H.
'
sikkhida, learnt,'
sampai, JM., 'now,' p. 127, n. I.

sampadatta, 'bestowed,' p. 125,
sainpehei,
be,' S 133.
lion,' 65.
AJNIg. .
'precept,'
sikkhavaiya.
n. 5.
n.
may
jackal,' 60.
'
simba, simgha,
101,
p.
AMg.,
siala,
AMg.. 'perceiv-
samupehiyanara,
art,' 132.
'
siya,
'
38.
siuiadi,
132 gerundive sunidavva, 137

passive, suniadi 135, n.
-grog-shop,'
[Sundikagala,
Mg.
p'.
'l08, n. 3.
sahl, friend," 13.

saamsamae, in the evening,' p. 93,
'
'
sunua, 'empty.'
sunna.
H.
p. 90, n. 6.
Pb.
sijna.
n. 3.
saadam, S.
welcome,'
âadam, II.
ocean," p.
[6aala, Mg.
,
'
'
49.
Mg.
SUnedi,
'hears,' 125, 12S, 131.

sunai.
sunha, ' daughter in-law,' p 100,
cf.
175, n.
saunia, fowler,' p. 87, n. 8

Sauntala, p. 88, n. 2.
sao, ' from his own,' p. 152, u.
6.
V. 107.
'
sutta
7.
(I) 'asleep,'
(2)
=sutra.
34, 125.
214
suttaa,
AMg.,
suda,
6.
'belt,' p. 159, n. 10.
hoard.'
126.
cf. sua.
suddha, 'purified, 125.
siindaraara,
more
beautiful,"
p. 109 (a).
'
ij
'
sumaraua, memory,' p.
remembers."
sumaradi,
'
10 (a).
57.
Also sumaredi, 128. (M. bharai.

p. 120, V. 84) ; caus. part, sumaravida, p. i'O, n. 3.
summai,
'
is
heard,'
suvai, 'sleeps.'
suvahum.
'
135
(</).
much,'
p.
very
137.
be purified,'
to
89,
p.
n. 4.
.somma, good
sir,' 48, 61.

sleeps,' 132.
sovana, stairs,' p. 102, n. 5.
sohagga, 'auspicious,' p. 101, n. 4.
'
sovai, sovadi,
'
'
haa, hada (1)
struck,'
taken,'
'
'
(2)
125.
125.
cf.
hia.
123.
n. 12.'
hage, AMg.,
Apa.
S.,' 11, 107.
hafi, 107.
5.
hattha,
'
delighted,' p. 145, n.
hadakka, Mg., 'heart,'

hanai,
'
upon,'
134.
suhaa,
'
125.
suvina, 'dream," p. 128, n.

SUVO, to-morrow," 57.
suvvai, is heard,' 135.
I
shall wait
sussuissam,
sodavva=soavva.
sodhania,
hattha,
haddhi,
fortunate," p. 110 (a).

suaa, spy," p. 165, n. 6.
suida, JM., suiya, 'shown.' p. 128,
'
'
n. 5.
8.
p. 170, n.
1.
kills.' 125.
'
hand.'
'
38.
!;
alas," p. 81, n. 1.
'
is killed,' 135 (d).
'
hammai,
harida, green,' p. 100, n.

haridurn, to take,' 13(>.
4.
'
'
harisa, joy,' 57.

will be,"
havissadi,
haviâdi
se,
AMg.,
(1)
Mg.,
'he.'
6e,
109.
j;
'him,' AMg.
(3) 'his.' M., AMg.,S., 109.
(4) 'her,' AMg. (Mg. ie gen.).
they, them,' AMg. (Mg. 6e),
(5)
(2)
'
109.
sea,
'
(1)
(2)
{.iveda).
seya,
white,' p. 144,
'
seyam,
better,'
14G, n. 2 (sveyas).
sela,
rock,' p. 109 (6).
aohaUa, vitex,' p. 94, n. 10.
.AMg.
'
p.
'
'
SO, 'he,'
soa, (1)
(2)
108.
grief {oka).
'
p. 123,
'
(muea).
soavva=sunidavva,
SOUqi, to hear.'
'
laughs.'
'
!i
13(),
p.
103,
12.
9, (50:
cf.
haa.
abl. 92.
>?
V. 85.
huvai, M.=hoi.
huvissam (Mg. huviîam).
be.' 134.
'
become,'
125.
'
shall
bhua.
cf.
H. hua.
'
becomes.'
I--'-
"-'f-
'i""
6. bhodi.
vai.
V. 2.
128.
taken,'
'
hoi,
137.
Mg.
4.
hio, yesterday,' 58.

hihgulaa, 'cinnabar,' p. 157, n. 7.
hutta, 'facing,' p. 108 (c), p 121.
hua,
JM. soya, washing,'

n. 2
'
hia, hida,
heart,'
hiaa,
H. hia.
n. 5 {sveta).
(3)
hasedi.
'
sweat'
AMg.
'
109
houin, 'to be." p.
122.
houna,
miglit
liojja, AMg.,
(<;)
gerund.
ii
SOkkha, happinoss,' 43.

socca, .\.Mg., having heard," p. 146,
n. 8.
sonlia=sunha,
p. KXi,
\'.
107.
80ttia,=iirotriija , p. 102, n.
Lottie, p. I(>6, n. 3.
sottum, to sleep,' 130.
'
8.
be,' 133.
being,' p. 119, v. 80.

hotthS, AMg., ' was,' p. 144, n. 1.
thou
1 am.' S
129, hosi,
homi,
hottani,
'
'
.Mg.
art.'
hossani=havis3ain,
hohii. 'it will be."
134.
134.
STUDENTS' BIBLIOaKAPHY.
[This Hat
is
intended to assist the student to extending his knowledge of

and to serve as a guide to ('oUege Libraries.
Prakrit,
Prakrit.
(1).
A.
Grammars,
Pischel
(Dr.
Sprachen.
etc.
Richard)
["Grammar
Grammatik der
of
Prakrit-
the Prakrit Languages'']
Forms one volume (Band 1, Heft 8) of the Grundriss

der Indo-Arisehen Philologie und Altertumskunde.
Strassburg, 1900. 500 pages.
Price l-ls.-6d.
[Deals with Jain Prakrits, Dramatic Prakrits, Paiâci and
Apabhraniâ. A monument of industry and sound scholarship.
A student who was worked through this "Introduction,"
should be able to make use of this work of reference, without
any knowledge of German, by studying the examples given.
The book contains an index of more unusual and special
forms. ]
(2).
A complete Index
to Pischel's
Grammar
has been pubin the
by Don. M. deSilva Wickremasinghe

Indian Antiquary. [Is sold separately,]
lished
(3).
(Dr. Hermann).
Ausgewahlte Erzahlungen
in Maharashtri, zur Einfiihrung in das Studium des
Prakrit.
["Selected Narratives in Maharastrl as an
introduction to the study of Prakrit."]
Leipzig.
1886.
Jacobi
[As regards the classification of Prakrits, and in some details

of derivation this book is no longer up to date.
For .Jain Maharastrl it gives a concise account (in German) of Phonetics and
Grammar, 86 pages of Selections, and a Vocabulary (PrakritSanskrit-Grman). Nos. V. and IX of the Selected Narratives
have been annotated and translated in this " Introduction"
also portions of No. Ill to illustrate Ardha-Magadhl.]
;
(4).
B.).
The Prakrta-Prakas'a, or
the Prakrt Grammar of Vararuci with the commentary (Manorama) of Bhamaha
with notes, an
English Translation and index of Prakrt words to
which is prefixed a short introduction to Prakrt Grammar. Second Issue. London, 1868.
Cowell (Professor E.
[Unfortunately Bhamaha's commentary on the Xllth Secwhich deals with Sauraseni has been lost, and many of
The corresponding
the sutras are " obscure and corrupt."
rules in Hemacandra's work are given in an Appendix, " but
Bhamaha
even these leave many difficulties unexplained."
has sometimes misunderstood Vararuci.]
tion,
216
(5).
Hemacandra
(G).
(7).
page
79).
Des'inamamala, edited by Pischel.
(ft)
The Prakrta-Lakanam
Hcernle.
of the
Ancient (Arsha) Prakrt.
Ar3a=AMg., not
(8).
{vide
Siddha-hema-candra (Adhyaya VIII deals with

Prakrit), edited by Pischel, Parts I and II. Halle,
1877, 1880, with translation and notes. {Oerman).
(n)
as Hoernle
Bombay,
or Canda's
1880.
Grammar
Calcutta, 1880.
.stated=AMg. +M.]
Edition of Prakrta-laksmih.
Biihler.
"The
Paiyalachchhi Namamala, a Prakrit Kosha
by Dhanapala. Edited with critical notes, an introGottinduction and a glossary bv George Biihler "
gen, 1878.
B.
Mdharasiri.
Texts.
(9).
Hala.
Saptasatakam.
Edited by Weber.
(a)
[Vocabulary
(10).
(Ftrfep. 73).
Leipzig, 1881.
in
German,]
Kavyamala Series No. 21. Edited by Durgaprasad

and Parab. Bombay, 1889.
(6)
[With Sanskrit commentary.]

(11).
Setubandha or Ravanavaha. (Firfep. 72),

Edited by
(a) Kavyamala Series No. 47.
and Parab. Bombay, 1895.
S'ivadatta
[With Sanskrit version and commentary.]

(10).
(11).
Edited by Siegfried Goldschmidt-Strassburg, 1880.

[With German tran.^lation and vocabulary.]
(h)
Gaiidavaho, ed. Sh. P. Pandit. Bombay, 1887.

Bombay Sanskrit Series XXXIV. Out of print, revised
I
edition expected.]
Dramatic Prakrits.
[It is unnecessary to enumerate editions of Sanskrit Plays.
Many will be familiar to the student, others he will find in
Schuyler's bibliography. Very few editions givo a correct or

consistent Prakrit text. This is mainlv due to corruptions in
the iMSS.]
(12).
Karpuramaiijari
of Rajaiêkhara.
Critical edition with
Vocabulary by Dr. Sten Konow.
Translation and Introduction by Prof. C.
B Lanmau.
INTEODUOTION TO PRAKRIT.
217
[Harvard Oriental Series, Vol. 4. This play is also in the

K. M. Series No. 4, edited Durga Prasad and Parab. Bombay,
1887.]
(13).
Kiel, 1877.
S'akuntala, ed. Pischel.
[Follows the Bengal version, edited with a sounder knowledge of Prakrit than Monier Williams' edition of 1867.]
(14).
Bombay,
Mrcchakatikam, ed. Godabole.

(Bombay Sanskrit Series).
1896.
Rama
Maya Sariiia.
1847.
editions Stenzler,
1829.
Hiranand and Parab., 1902. The last has
been quoted in the extracts, as it is much used by students.
Translation.
Dr. A. W. Ryder, Harvard Oriental Series,
[Other
Calcutta,
Vol.
(15).
9.]
A second text of this, with a PrakritSanskrit glossary by Capeller, is given in Bohllingks

Chrestomathic, p. 290 ff. St. Petersburg, 1877.
Ratnavall.
Ardha-Mdgadht.
(16).
Kalpasutra (Kappasutta),
[Translated
ed. Jacobi, Leipzig, 1879.

by Jacobi, S.B.E., XXII, vide p. 71, and p. 161.
n. 3.]
(17).
ed. Jacobi.
Ayarangasutta,
(Calcutta edn.,
[The
(18).
first
1936).
aAga and the most archaic.
Suyagadangasutta,
ed.
Bombay.
Important
[Second ahga.
(19).
London, 1882,
Samvat
Uvasagadasao,
for verse.
ed. Hcernle.
Important
Samvat
for prose.]
1936.
Calcutta, 1890.
(Bibliotheca Indica).
[Eleventh anga, contains narratives.
mentary are edited
Both text and com-
critically.]
Jain Mahdrdstri.
(20).
Avasyaka, Erzahlungen,
ed. Ernst
Leumann.
Heft
Leipzig, 1897.
See also No. 3 above, Jacobi.

(21).
Kalakacarya-caritam, ed. Jacobi {vide

Z. D. M. G. Vol. 34 (1880). p. 262.
(22).
Kakkuka
Inscription.
p. 139).
(Extract No. 17, p. 134).
1.
INTRODDCTION TO PRAKRIT.
218
Jain Sauraseni,
(23).
Pavayanasara by Kundakundacarya.
(24).
Kattigeyanupekkha by Karttikeyasvamin,
ed.
Bhan-
darkar.
PaUaci.
{Vide p. 68-69).
Pali.
[It is
student
only necessary to mention a few books useful to the

a special study of this language.]
who does not make
Grammars,
(25).
etc.
Miiller, E.
A simplified grammar of the Pali language.
London, 1884. (Triibner).
[There
is
a short grammar by Frankfiirter with selections

A better grammar is that of M. Duroiselle.]
and vocabulary.
(26).
Childers, R. C.
Dictionary of the
Fourth Impression. London, 1909.
Pali
Language.
Texts and Translations.

(27)
(-8).
edited
by Fausboll.
London, 1877.
Jatakas,
translated
,,
Cowell and Rouse.
Triibner.
by various hands,
Cambridge.. 1895.
7 vols.
edited
by
[With these the student can make a good start without a

teacher.]
(29).
Andersen
(30).
Mahavamsa,
(31).
Publications of the Pali
Pali Reader.
(Dines).
edited
Copenhagen.
Turnour, translated Geigêr.
Text Society.
Old Prakrit.
The material is scattered.

the student may consult
(32).
.Les inscriptions de Piyadasi.
Senart
The
volume of the Corpus Inscriptionum IndiAsoka's Edicts edited by Cunningham is

to obtain
and needs revision.
first
carum.
difficult
(33)
For Asoka's Edicts
Franke
(Professor 0.)
IGerman.
" Pali and Sanskrit," 1902.
Vide
p. 74, n. 2.]
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT,
(34).
Liiders.
" Fragments
[German.
of
two buddhistic dramas."
Vide p. 72, p. 78.]
Late Prakrit. Apahhram&a.

Hemacandra. Vide No. 5 above, and
(35).
219
p. 6.
Pingala-chandahsutra or Prakrta-Pingala-siitra.
vj'amala series No. 41, ed. Sivadatta and Parab.
[A
critical edition is needed.]
Ka-
^Y
Hf
RETURN
TO#^
CIRCULATION DEPARTMENT
202 Main Library
LOAN PERIOD
HOME USE
^^^^^'B.y..c.
^00U30S7
,,,,,

Woolner's Introduction To Prakrit

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Woolner's Introduction To Prakrit

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

INTRODUCTION TO PKAKRIT

UNIVERSITY OF THE PAN JAB,

whatever Examiners may imagine, the student reads

which a considerable portion

At any rate he begins that way

Prakrit afterwards, noticing certain similarities, and some of

the differences, so that he

be able to recognize a passage,

reads the Prakrit as

check looks down at the

cannot blame them.

comes, at the slightest

Consequently few students

Sanskrit form, and

Even the more advanced

perhaps in an English translation.

Tlie editions they use are often incorrect

in the Prakrit portions, and there

reference on which they can

find definite rules.

this Introduction to Prakrit is to provide students

more attentive and more scholarly study

and Maharastri passages

in their Sanskrit Plays.

The main object however

History of the great Indo- Aryan

to assist the student of the

Language from Vedic

The Indian student

starts with an inti-

In the Sanskrit he learns at school, he becomes familiarised

he studies Sanskrit in the University, he will discover that

the Vedic language represents a

more ancient stage

there are accurate

The middle stage has been comparatively

dead languages, than

Outside India scholars

convenient representative of this stage.

student of Indo- Aryan Philology needs a clear view of

characteristics of the diflFerent Prakrits.

work may prove

the mediaeval Prakrits are in a more real sense

useful for this purpose.

Perhaps the best plan

the thorough study of one dialect, afterwards comparing others

This was the method of the Indian

with this as a standard.

grammarians who took Maharastri as their standard.

only fyroae extant in Maharastri was written by Jains, and that

not in the same dialect as the songs in the dramas.

a separate subject in our

Moreover the Sanskrit student does

into contact with Prakrit in the plays,

been thought desirable to present a general view

with special stress on Sauraseni and Maharastri.

The student making

use of this book

advised to read the

general sections, and to study the chapters on Phonetics and

with special reference to the two main

A. Macdonell, Clarendon Press.

The more important examples